2006 GMC Envoy, Envoy XL, Envoy Denali,
and Envoy XL Denali Owner Manual M
................................................................ 1
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is.
Then we tell you what to do to help avoid or reduce the
hazard. Please read these cautions. If you do not,
you or others could be hurt.
Index
A good place to quickly locate information about the
vehicle is the Index in the back of the manual. It is an
alphabetical list of what is in the manual and the
page number where it can be found.
You will also find a circle
with a slash through it in
this book. This safety
symbol means “Do Not,”
“Do Not do this” or “Do Not
let this happen.”
Safety Warnings and Symbols
There are a number of safety cautions in this book. We
use a box and the word CAUTION to tell about things
that could hurt you if you were to ignore the warning.
{CAUTION:
These mean there is something that could hurt
you or other people.
iii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Damage Warnings
Vehicle Symbols
Also, in this manual you will find these notices:
The vehicle has components and labels that use
symbols instead of text. Symbols are shown along with
the text describing the operation or information
relating to a specific component, control, message,
gage, or indicator.
Notice: These mean there is something that could
damage your vehicle.
A notice tells about something that can damage the
vehicle. Many times, this damage would not be covered
by your vehicle’s warranty, and it could be costly. But
the notice will tell what to do to help avoid the damage.
If you need help figuring out a specific name of a
component, gage, or indicator, reference the following
topics:
When you read other manuals, you might see
CAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colors or in
different words.
• Seats and Restraint Systems in Section 1
• Features and Controls in Section 2
• Instrument Panel Overview in Section 3
• Climate Controls in Section 3
There are also warning labels on the vehicle. They use
the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.
• Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators in Section 3
• Audio System(s) in Section 3
• Engine Compartment Overview in Section 5
iv
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
These are some examples of symbols that may be found on the vehicle:
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
vi
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Front Seats
Manual Seats
{CAUTION:
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to
adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle
is moving. The sudden movement could startle
and confuse you, or make you push a pedal
when you do not want to. Adjust the driver’s
seat only when the vehicle is not moving.
Lift the bar located under the front of the seat to unlock
it. Slide the seat to where you want it and release
the bar. Try to move the seat with your body to be sure
the seat is locked in place.
1-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Power Seats
Manual Lumbar
If the vehicle has power
seats, the controls used to
operate them are located
on the outboard side of
the seats.
If your vehicle has this
feature, there is a knob
located on the outboard
side of the driver’s seat.
To adjust the seat, do any of the following:
• Move the seat forward or rearward by sliding the
horizontal control forward or rearward.
Turn the top of the knob toward the front of the
vehicle to increase lumbar support. Turn the top of
the knob toward the rear of the vehicle to decrease
lumbar support.
• Raise or lower the front part of the seat cushion by
moving the front of the horizontal control up or down.
• Raise or lower the rear part of the seat cushion by
moving the rear of the horizontal control up or down.
• Raise or lower the entire seat by moving the entire
horizontal control up or down.
If the seats have power reclining seatbacks, the control
used to operate them is located behind the power
seat control on the outboard side of the seats. See
“Power Reclining Seatbacks” under Reclining Seatbacks
on page 1-5.
1-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Power Lumbar
Heated Seats
Your vehicle may have power lumbar on the driver’s
and front passenger’s seats.
Your vehicle may have
heated front seats. The
buttons used to control this
feature are located on
the front door armrests.
The engine must be
The seatback lumbar
support can be adjusted
by moving the control
located on the outboard
side of the seat cushions.
running for the heated seat
feature to work.
To heat the entire seat, press the horizontal button with
the heated seat and seatback symbol. Press the
button to cycle through the temperature settings of high,
medium, and low and to turn the heated seat off. The
indicator lights above the button will come on to
designate the level of heat selected: three for high,
two for medium, and one for low. The low setting warms
the seatback and seat cushion until the seat temperature
is near body temperature. The medium and high
settings heat the seatback and seat cushion to a slightly
higher temperature. You will be able to feel heat in
about two minutes.
To increase or decrease support, hold the control
forward or rearward.
Keep in mind that as your seating position changes,
as it may during long trips, so should the position of your
lumbar support. Adjust the seat as needed.
1-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To heat only the seatback, press the vertical button with
the heated seatback symbol. An indicator light on the
button will come on to designate that only the seatback
is being heated. Additional presses will cycle through
the heat levels for the seatback only.
{CAUTION:
If the seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
push and pull on the seatback to be sure it is
locked.
The feature will shut off automatically when the ignition
is turned off.
Reclining Seatbacks
Manual Reclining Seatbacks
If the seats have manual reclining seatbacks, the lever
used to operate them is located on the outboard
side of the seats(s).
{CAUTION:
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to
adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle
is moving. The sudden movement could startle
and confuse you, or make you push a pedal
when you do not want to. Adjust the driver’s
seat only when the vehicle is not moving.
1-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To recline the seatback, do the following:
1. Lift the recline lever.
Power Reclining Seatbacks
If your seats have power
2. Move the seatback to the desired position, then
release the lever to lock the seatback in place.
reclining seatbacks, use
the vertical power seat
control located on
the outboard side of
the seat(s).
3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it
is locked.
To return the seatback to an upright position, do the
following:
1. Lift the lever fully without applying pressure to the
seatback and the seatback will return to the upright
position.
2. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it
is locked.
• To recline the seatback, press the control toward
the rear of the vehicle.
• To raise the seatback, press the control toward the
front of the vehicle.
1-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle
is in motion can be dangerous. Even if you
buckle up, your safety belts cannot do their
job when you are reclined like this.
The shoulder belt cannot do its job. In a
crash, you could go into it, receiving neck or
other injuries.
The lap belt cannot do its job either. In a
crash the belt could go up over your abdomen.
The belt forces would be there, not at your
pelvic bones. This could cause serious
internal injuries.
For proper protection when the vehicle is in
motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit
well back in the seat and wear your safety
belt properly.
Do not have a seatback reclined if your vehicle
is moving.
1-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Pull the head restraint up
to raise it. To lower the
head restraint, press
the button, located on the
top of the seatback,
and push the head
Head Restraints
restraint down.
Adjust the head restraint so that the top of the restraint
is at the same height as the top of the occupant’s
head. This position reduces the chance of a neck injury
in a crash.
1-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety belts
still fastened may cause damage to the seat or the
safety belts. Always unbuckle the safety belts
and return them to their normal stowed position
before folding a rear seat.
Rear Seats
Rear Seat Operation
Flip and Fold Second Row Seats
(Five-Passenger)
Your vehicle may have flip and fold second row seats
which provide additional cargo space.
To flip and fold the seat(s), do the following:
2. Lift the lever, located on the outboard side of the
seatback, and fold the seatback forward. The head
restraint will automatically fold out of the way as
the seatback is folded down.
1. Pull up on the loop located where the seat cushion
meets the seatback and flip the seat cushion
forward.
1-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To return the seat(s) to the original position, do the
following:
{CAUTION:
If the seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
push and pull on the seatback to be sure it is
locked.
1. Lift the seatback until it locks into the
upright position. Push and pull on the
seatback to make sure it is locked.
2. Return the head restraints to the upright position by
reaching behind the seat and pulling it forward until
it locks into place. Push and pull on the head
restraint to make sure that it is locked.
3. Flip the seat cushion back into place.
1-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Pull up on the rear part of the lever indicated as 2
on the handle and side cover to release the rear set
of seat hooks from the floor pins.
Fold and Tumble Second Row Seats
(Seven-Passenger)
Your vehicle may have a second row 65/35 split bench
seat which may be folded and tumbled for access to
the third row seats.
4. Tumble the seat forward.
To return the seat(s) to the original position, do the
following:
To fold and tumble the seat(s), do the following:
1. Push the head restraints down fully.
1. Tumble the seat rearward to reengage the rear seat
hooks to the floor pins.
Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety belts
still fastened may cause damage to the seat or the
safety belts. Always unbuckle the safety belts
and return them to their normal stowed position
before folding a rear seat.
{CAUTION:
A seat that is not locked into place properly
can move around in a collision or sudden stop.
People in the vehicle could be injured. Be sure
to lock the seat into place properly when
installing it.
2. Fold the seatback flat
on the seat by pulling
up on the front part
of the lever, located on
the outboard side of
the seat, and indicated
as 1 on the handle
and side cover.
2. Try to raise the seat to check that it is locked down.
1-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Lift the seatback up to return it to the upright position.
Third Row Seat (Seven-Passenger)
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
If the seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
push and pull on the seatback to be sure it
is locked.
Be sure to return the seat to the passenger
seating position when finished. Push and pull
on the seat to make sure it is locked in place.
Never use the third row seating position while
the second row is folded or folded and
tumbled. This could cause injury in a sudden
stop or crash.
4. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it
is locked.
To enter the third row seat, you must fold and tumble
the second row seat following the instructions given
previously.
1-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you are exiting the third row with no assistance, do
the following:
To fold the third row seat, do the following:
1. Pull up on the handle located on the bottom of the
seat cushion to release the seat cushion.
1. Pull the handle, located on the center of the second
row seatback, up to release the seatback and fold
the seatback forward.
2. Lift up the seat, and then pull it forward.
3. Fold the seatback forward until it is flat.
2. Pull the back of the
seat lever, located on
the outboard side
of the seat and
4. If the second row seat is also folded, unhook the
elastic loop, if equipped, on the back of the
seatback.
indicated with the
number 2, to tumble
the seat forward.
5. Fold the panel, if equipped, located on the back of
the seatback, to make a continuous surface to the
second row folded seat.
1-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Belts
{CAUTION:
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo
area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a
collision, people riding in these areas are more
likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not
allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle
that is not equipped with seats and safety
belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a
seat and using a safety belt properly.
This part of the manual tells you how to use safety
belts properly. It also tells you some things you should
not do with safety belts.
{CAUTION:
Do not let anyone ride where he or she cannot
wear a safety belt properly. If you are in a
crash and you are not wearing a safety belt,
your injuries can be much worse. You can hit
things inside the vehicle or be ejected from it.
You can be seriously injured or killed. In the
same crash, you might not be, if you are
buckled up. Always fasten your safety belt,
and check that your passengers’ belts are
fastened properly too.
Your vehicle has a light
that comes on as a
reminder to buckle up. See
1-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In most states and in all Canadian provinces, the law
says to wear safety belts. Here is why: They work.
Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as
it goes.
You never know if you will be in a crash. If you do have
a crash, you do not know if it will be a bad one.
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so
serious that even buckled up, a person would not
survive. But most crashes are in between. In many of
them, people who buckle up can survive and sometimes
walk away. Without belts they could have been badly
hurt or killed.
After more than 30 years of safety belts in vehicles, the
facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up does
matter...a lot!
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just a seat
on wheels.
1-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Put someone on it.
Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider
does not stop.
1-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The person keeps going until stopped by something. In
a real vehicle, it could be the windshield...
or the instrument panel...
1-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Questions and Answers About
Safety Belts
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after an accident
if I am wearing a safety belt?
A: You could be — whether you are wearing a safety
belt or not. But you can unbuckle a safety belt,
even if you are upside down. And your chance of
being conscious during and after an accident,
so you can unbuckle and get out, is much greater if
you are belted.
Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should I have to
wear safety belts?
A: Airbags are in many vehicles today and will be in
most of them in the future. But they are
or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.
You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance,
and your strongest bones take the forces. That is why
safety belts make such good sense.
supplemental systems only; so they work with
safety belts — not instead of them. Every airbag
system ever offered for sale has required the use of
safety belts. Even if you are in a vehicle that has
airbags, you still have to buckle up to get the most
protection. That is true not only in frontal collisions,
but especially in side and other collisions.
1-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Position
Lap-Shoulder Belt
Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive far from
home, why should I wear safety belts?
A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you are in an
accident — even one that is not your fault — you
and your passengers can be hurt. Being a good
driver does not protect you from things beyond your
control, such as bad drivers.
The driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here is how to wear
it properly.
1. Close and lock the door.
2. Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight. To see
how, see “Seats” in the Index.
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km)
of home. And the greatest number of serious
injuries and deaths occur at speeds of less than
40 mph (65 km/h).
Safety belts are for everyone.
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
This part is only for people of adult size.
Be aware that there are special things to know about
safety belts and children. And there are different
rules for smaller children and babies. If a child will be
those rules for everyone’s protection.
3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Do not let it get twisted.
First, you will want to know which restraint systems your
vehicle has.
The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt across
you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt go back
slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt across you
more slowly.
We will start with the driver position.
1-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on
the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this
applies force to the strong pelvic bones. And you would
be less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid
under it, the belt would apply force at your abdomen.
This could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The
shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across
the chest. These parts of the body are best able to take
belt restraining forces.
5. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the
shoulder belt.
The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop or crash,
or if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor.
1-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt
is too loose. In a crash, you would move
forward too much, which could increase injury.
The shoulder belt should fit against your body.
A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not give nearly
as much protection this way.
1-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt is
buckled in the wrong place like this. In a crash,
the belt would go up over your abdomen. The
belt forces would be there, not at the pelvic
bones. This could cause serious internal
injuries. Always buckle your belt into the
buckle nearest you.
A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.
1-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if you wear the
shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your
body would move too far forward, which would
increase the chance of head and neck injury.
Also, the belt would apply too much force to
the ribs, which are not as strong as shoulder
bones. You could also severely injure internal
organs like your liver or spleen.
A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should
be worn over the shoulder at all times.
1-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt.
In a crash, you would not have the full width of
the belt to spread impact forces. If a belt is
twisted, make it straight so it can work
properly, or ask your dealer to fix it.
A: The belt is twisted across the body.
1-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be
seriously injured if they do not wear safety belts.
To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.
The belt should go back out of the way.
Before you close the door, be sure the belt is out of the
way. If you slam the door on it, you can damage
both the belt and your vehicle.
A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, and
the lap portion should be worn as low as possible,
below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the
mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it is more
likely that the fetus will not be hurt in a crash. For
pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making
safety belts effective is wearing them properly.
1-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
Right Front Passenger Position
All rear seat positions have lap-shoulder belts. Here is
how to wear one properly.
To learn how to wear the right front passenger’s safety
The right front passenger’s safety belt works the
same way as the driver’s safety belt — except for
one thing. If you ever pull the shoulder portion of the
belt out all the way, you will engage the child restraint
locking feature. If this happens, just let the belt go back
all the way and start again.
Rear Seat Passengers
It is very important for rear seat passengers to buckle
up! Accident statistics show that unbelted people in
the rear seat are hurt more often in crashes than those
who are wearing safety belts.
Rear passengers who are not safety belted can be
thrown out of the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike
others in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.
1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Do not let it get twisted.
The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt
go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt
across you more slowly.
1-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
When the shoulder belt is pulled out all the way,
it will lock. If it does, let it go back all the way and
start again.
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on
the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this applies
force to the strong pelvic bones. And you would be less
likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the
belt would apply force at your abdomen. This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go
over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of
the body are best able to take belt restraining forces.
The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop or a crash,
or if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor.
3. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the
shoulder part.
1-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides
{CAUTION:
Rear shoulder belt comfort guides may provide added
safety belt comfort for older children who have outgrown
booster seats and for some adults. When attached to
a shoulder belt, the comfort guide positions the belt
away from the neck and head.
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt
is too loose. In a crash, you would move
forward too much, which could increase injury.
The shoulder belt should fit against your body.
There is one guide for each of the rear outside
passenger positions. Here is how to attach the comfort
guide to the shoulder belt.
1. Find the comfort guide located on a storage clip
between the interior body and the seatback or in
a pocket sewn into the side of the seatback.
Slide the guide off of its storage clip or out of the
pocket.
To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle.
1-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Slide the guide under and past the belt. The elastic
cord must be under the belt. Then, place the guide
over the belt and insert the two edges of the
belt into the slots of the guide.
3. Your comfort guide may have an adjuster to
lengthen or shorten the cord. If it does, you
can adjust the cord by following these steps.
3.1. Squeeze and hold the ends of the lock (A)
on the elastic cord.
3.2. Pull the loop to shorten the guide or pull the
cord to lengthen the guide.
3.3. Release the lock.
1-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat.
The elastic cord must be under the belt and the
guide on top.
{CAUTION:
A safety belt that is not properly worn may not
provide the protection needed in a crash. The
person wearing the belt could be seriously
injured. The shoulder belt should go over the
shoulder and across the chest. These parts of
the body are best able to take belt restraining
forces.
1-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Buckle, position, and release the safety belt as
Make sure that the shoulder belt crosses the
shoulder.
Safety Belt Extender
If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you, you
should use it.
To remove and store the comfort guides, squeeze the
belt edges together so that you can take them out of the
guides. Slide the guide back onto its storage clip or
into its storage pocket.
But if a safety belt is not long enough, your dealer will
order you an extender. It is free. When you go in to
order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, so
the extender will be long enough for you. To help avoid
personal injury, do not let someone else use it, and
use it only for the seat it is made to fit. The extender has
been designed for adults. Never use it for securing
child seats. To wear it, just attach it to the regular safety
belt. For more information, see the instruction sheet
that comes with the extender.
Safety Belt Pretensioners
Your vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for the driver
and right front passenger. Although you cannot see
them, they are located on the retractor part of the safety
belts. They help the safety belts reduce a person’s
forward movement in a moderate to severe frontal, near
frontal or side crash or a rollover.
Pretensioners work only once. If they activate in a
crash, you will need to get new ones, and probably other
new parts for your safety belt system. See Replacing
1-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?
Child Restraints
A: An older child should wear a lap-shoulder belt and
get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can
provide. The shoulder belt should not cross the face
or neck. The lap belt should fit snugly below the
hips, just touching the top of the thighs. It should
never be worn over the abdomen, which could
cause severe or even fatal internal injuries in
a crash.
Older Children
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear seat.
In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strike
other people who are buckled up, or can be thrown
out of the vehicle. Older children need to use safety
belts properly.
Older children who have outgrown booster seats should
wear the vehicle’s safety belts.
1-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulder belt,
but the child is so small that the shoulder belt
is very close to the child’s face or neck?
A: If the child is sitting in a seat next to a window,
move the child toward the center of the vehicle.
page 1-28. If the child is sitting in the center rear
seat passenger position, move the child toward the
safety belt buckle. In either case, be sure that
the shoulder belt still is on the child’s shoulder, so
that in a crash the child’s upper body would
have the restraint the belts provide.
{CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here two children are wearing the same belt.
The belt can not properly spread the impact
forces. In a crash, the two children can be
crushed together and seriously injured. A belt
must be used by only one person at a time.
1-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the belt
should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching
the child’s thighs. This applies belt force to the child’s
pelvic bones in a crash.
Infants and Young Children
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes
infants and all other children. Neither the distance
traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes
the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact,
the law in every state in the United States and in
every Canadian province says children up to some age
must be restrained while in a vehicle.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Children can be seriously injured or strangled if
a shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck
and the safety belt continues to tighten. Never
leave children unattended in a vehicle and never
allow children to play with the safety belts.
Never do this.
Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a
lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part is
behind the child. If the child wears the belt in
this way, in a crash the child might slide under
the belt. The belt’s force would then be applied
right on the child’s abdomen. That could cause
serious or fatal injuries.
Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles,
they should have the protection provided by appropriate
restraints. Young children should not use the vehicle’s
adult safety belts alone, unless there is no other choice.
Instead, they need to use a child restraint.
1-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
People should never hold a baby in their arms
while riding in a vehicle. A baby does not
weigh much — until a crash. During a crash a
baby will become so heavy it is not possible to
hold it. For example, in a crash at only 25 mph
(40 km/h), a 12 lb (5.5 kg) baby will suddenly
become a 240 lb (110 kg) force on a person’s
arms. A baby should be secured in an
appropriate restraint.
Children who are up against, or very close to,
any airbag when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder
belts offer protection for adults and older
children, but not for young children and
infants. Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system
nor its airbag system is designed for them.
Young children and infants need the protection
that a child restraint system can provide.
1-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What are the different types of add-on child
restraints?
{CAUTION:
A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by the
vehicle’s owner, are available in four basic types.
Selection of a particular restraint should take
into consideration not only the child’s weight, height
and age but also whether or not the restraint will
be compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will
be used.
Newborn infants need complete support,
including support for the head and neck. This
is necessary because a newborn infant’s neck
is weak and its head weighs so much
compared with the rest of its body. In a crash,
an infant in a rear-facing seat settles into the
restraint, so the crash forces can be
distributed across the strongest part of an
infant’s body, the back and shoulders. Infants
always should be secured in appropriate infant
restraints.
For most basic types of child restraints, there are
many different models available. When purchasing a
child restraint, be sure it is designed to be used
in a motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will have a
label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle
safety standards.
The restraint manufacturer’s instructions that come
with the restraint, state the weight and height
limitations for a particular child restraint. In addition,
there are many kinds of restraints available for
children with special needs.
1-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Child Restraint Systems
{CAUTION:
The body structure of a young child is quite
unlike that of an adult or older child, for whom
the safety belts are designed. A young child’s
hip bones are still so small that the vehicle’s
regular safety belt may not remain low on the
hip bones, as it should. Instead, it may settle
up around the child’s abdomen. In a crash, the
belt would apply force on a body area that is
unprotected by any bony structure. This alone
could cause serious or fatal injuries. Young
children always should be secured in
appropriate child restraints.
An infant car bed (A), a special bed made for use in a
motor vehicle, is an infant restraint system designed
to restrain or position a child on a continuous flat
surface. Make sure that the infant’s head rests toward
the center of the vehicle.
1-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A rear-facing infant seat (B) provides restraint with the
seating surface against the back of the infant. The
harness system holds the infant in place and, in a crash,
acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint.
A forward-facing child seat (C-E) provides restraint for
the child’s body with the harness and also sometimes
with surfaces such as T-shaped or shelf-like shields.
1-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: How Should I Use a Child Restraint?
A: A child restraint system is any device designed for
use in a motor vehicle to restrain, seat, or position
children. A built-in child restraint system is a
permanent part of the motor vehicle. An add-on
child restraint system is a portable one, which
is purchased by the vehicle’s owner. To help reduce
injuries, an add-on child restraint must be secured
in the vehicle. With built-in or add-on child
restraints, the child has to be secured within the
child restraint.
When choosing an add-on child restraint, be sure
the child restraint is designed to be used in a
vehicle. If it is, it will have a label saying that it
meets federal motor vehicle safety standards. Then
follow the instructions for the restraint. You may
find these instructions on the restraint itself or in a
booklet, or both.
A booster seat (F-G) is a child restraint designed to
improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system.
Some booster seats have a shoulder belt positioner,
and some high-back booster seats have a five-point
harness. A booster seat can also help a child to see
out the window.
1-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To help reduce the chance of injury, the child restraint
must be secured in the vehicle. Child restraint systems
must be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the
lap belt portion of a lap-shoulder belt, or by the LATCH
system. See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
be endangered in a crash if the child restraint is not
properly secured in the vehicle.
Securing an Add-on Child Restraint in
the Vehicle
{CAUTION:
A child can be seriously injured or killed in a
crash if the child restraint is not properly
secured in the vehicle. Make sure the child
restraint is properly installed in the vehicle
using the vehicle’s safety belt or LATCH
system, following the instructions that came
with that restraint, and also the instructions in
this manual.
When securing an add-on child restraint, refer to the
instructions that come with the restraint which may be on
the restraint itself or in a booklet, or both, and to this
manual. The child restraint instructions are important, so
if they are not available, obtain a replacement copy
from the manufacturer.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure
any child restraint in your vehicle — even when no
child is in it.
1-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Securing the Child Within the
Child Restraint
{CAUTION:
There are several systems for securing the child within
the child restraint. One system, the three-point
harness, has straps that come down over each of the
infant’s shoulders and buckle together at the crotch. The
five-point harness system has two shoulder straps,
two hip straps, and a crotch strap. A shield may take the
place of hip straps. A T-shaped shield has shoulder
straps that are attached to a flat pad which rests
low against the child’s body. A shelf- or armrest-type
shield has straps that are attached to a wide, shelf-like
shield that swings up or to the side.
A child can be seriously injured or killed in a
crash if the child is not properly secured in the
child restraint. Make sure the child is properly
secured, following the instructions that came
with that restraint.
Because there are different systems, it is important to
refer to the instructions that come with the restraint.
A child can be endangered in a crash if the child is not
properly secured in the child restraint.
1-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Where to Put the Restraint
CAUTION: (Continued)
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat. We
recommend that child restraints be secured in a rear
seat, including an infant riding in a rear-facing infant
seat, a child riding in a forward-facing child seat and an
older child riding in a booster seat.
restraint, no system is fail-safe, and no
one can guarantee that an airbag will not
deploy under some unusual circumstance,
even though it is turned off. We recommend
that rear-facing child restraints be secured in
the rear seat, even if the airbag is off.
Your vehicle has a rear seat that will accommodate a
rear-facing child restraint. A label on your sun visor says,
“Never put a rear-facing child seat in the front.” This
is because the risk to the rear-facing child is so great, if
the airbag deploys.
If you need to secure a forward-facing child
restraint in the right front seat, always move
the front passenger seat as far back as it will
go. It is better to secure the child restraint in a
rear seat.
{CAUTION:
Wherever you install a child restraint, be sure to secure
the child restraint properly.
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating airbag.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure
any child restraint in your vehicle — even when no
child is in it.
Even though the passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the passenger’s frontal
airbag if the system detects a rear-facing child
CAUTION: (Continued)
1-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle, you
need a child restraint equipped with LATCH
attachments. The child restraint manufacturer will
provide you with instructions on how to use the child
restraint and its attachments. The following explains how
to attach a child restraint with these attachments in
your vehicle.
Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH)
Your vehicle has the LATCH system. The LATCH
system holds a child restraint during driving or in a
crash. This system is designed to make installation of a
child restraint easier. The LATCH system uses
Your vehicle has lower anchors and top tether anchors.
Your child restraint may have lower attachments and
a top tether.
anchors in the vehicle and attachments on the child
restraint that are made for use with the LATCH system
Make sure that a LATCH-compatible child restraint
is properly installed using the anchors, or use the
vehicle’s safety belts to secure the restraint, following
the instructions that came with that restraint, and
also the instructions in this manual. When installing a
child restraint with a top tether, you must also use either
the lower anchors or the safety belts to properly
secure the child restraint. A child restraint must never
be installed using only the top tether and anchor.
Not all vehicle seating positions or child restraints have
lower anchors and attachments or top tether anchors
and attachments.
1-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lower Anchors
Top Tether Anchor
Lower anchors (A) are metal bars built into the vehicle.
There are two lower anchors for each LATCH seating
position that will accommodate a child restraint with
lower attachments (B).
A top tether (A, C) anchors the top of the child restraint
to the vehicle. A top tether anchor is built into the
vehicle. The top tether attachment (B) on the child
restraint connects to the top tether anchor in the vehicle
in order to reduce the forward movement and rotation
of the child restraint during driving or in a crash.
1-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your child restraint may have a single tether (A) or a
dual tether (C). Either will have a single attachment (B)
to secure the top tether to the anchor.
Lower Anchor and Top Tether Anchor
Locations
Some top tether-equipped child restraints are designed
for use with or without the top tether being attached.
Others require the top tether always to be attached. In
Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
attached. In the United States, some child restraints also
have a top tether. Be sure to read and follow the
instructions for your child restraint.
i (Top Tether Anchor):
Seating positions with top
tether anchors.
j (Lower Anchor):
Seating positions with
two lower anchors.
If the child restraint does not have a top tether, one can
be obtained, in kit form, for many child restraints. Ask
the child restraint manufacturer whether or not a kit
is available.
Second Row
To assist you in locating the
lower anchors, each
seating position with lower
anchors has two labels,
near the crease between
the seatback and the seat
cushion, showing where
the anchors are located.
1-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For five-passenger vehicles, the labels are located
above a flap, at the base of the seatback, in the rear
outside seating positions. The anchors are located under
the flap. In order to get to the anchors you will need
to pull the strap at the center of the seat where the seat
cushion meets the seatback. This will allow you to
fold the seat cushion up and out of the way. Lift the flap
to expose the anchors and then lower the seat
cushion. Be sure the cushion is locked into place.
Five-Passenger Vehicles
For five-passenger vehicles, the top tether anchors for
each rear seating position are located on the floor in the
cargo area of your vehicle. Do not use the rear
tie-down brackets near the liftgate for attaching top
tethers. Be sure to use an anchor located on the same
side of the vehicle as the seating position where the
child restraint will be placed.
1-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For seven-passenger vehicles, the top tether anchors
for each seating position in the second row are located
at the bottom rear of the seat cushion. Be sure to
use an anchor located on the same side of the vehicle
as the seating position where the child restraint will
be placed.
Do not secure a child restraint in the right front
passenger’s position or in the third row seating position,
if your vehicle has one, if a national or local law
requires that the top tether be attached, or if the
instructions that come with the child restraint say that
the top tether must be attached. There is no place
to attach the top tether in this position.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat. See
information.
Seven-Passenger Vehicles
1-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for
the LATCH System
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Each top tether anchor and lower anchor in the
vehicle is designed to hold only one child
restraint. Attaching more than one child
restraint to a single anchor could cause the
anchor or attachment to come loose or
even break during a crash. A child or others
could be injured if this happens. To help prevent
injury to people and damage to your vehicle,
attach only one child restraint per anchor.
If a LATCH-type child restraint is not attached to
anchors, the restraint will not be able to protect
the child correctly. In a crash, the child could be
seriously injured or killed. Make sure that a
LATCH-type child restraint is properly installed
using the anchors, or use the vehicle’s safety
belts to secure the restraint, following the
instructions that came with that restraint, and
also the instructions in this manual.
1-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. Attach and tighten the lower attachments to the
lower anchors. If the child restraint does not have
lower attachments or the desired seating position
does not have lower anchors, secure the child
restraint with the top tether and the safety belts.
Refer to your child restraint manufacturer
{CAUTION:
Children can be seriously injured or strangled
if a shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck
and the safety belt continues to tighten.
Secure any unused safety belts behind the
child restraint so children cannot reach them.
Pull the shoulder belt all the way out of the
retractor to set the lock, if your vehicle has
one, after the child restraint has been installed.
Be sure to follow the instructions of the child
restraint manufacturer.
instructions and the instructions in this manual.
1.1. Find the lower anchors for the desired
seating position.
1.2. For five-passenger vehicles, pull the strap at
the center of the seat where the seat
cushion meets the seatback. This will allow
you to fold the seat cushion up and out
of the way. Lift the flap to expose the anchors
and then lower the seat cushion. See Rear
information. Be sure the cushion is locked
into place.
Notice: Contact between the child restraint or the
LATCH attachment parts and the vehicle’s safety
belt assembly may cause damage to these parts.
Make sure when securing unused safety belts
behind the child restraint that there is no contact
between the child restraint or the LATCH attachment
parts and the vehicle’s safety belt assembly.
1.3. Put the child restraint on the seat.
1.4. Attach and tighten the lower attachments on
the child restraint to the lower anchors.
Folding an empty rear seat with the safety belts
secured, may cause damage to the safety belt or the
seat. When removing the child restraint, always
remember to return the safety belts to their normal
position before folding the rear seat.
1-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. If the child restraint manufacturer recommends that
the top tether be attached, attach and tighten the
top tether to the top tether anchor, if equipped.
Refer to the child restraint instructions and
the following steps:
For five-passenger
vehicles that have a head
restraint, fold down the
head restraint and
route the single tether
under the head restraint
and in between the
2.1. Find the top tether anchor.
2.2. Route and tighten the top tether according to
your child restraint instructions and the
following instructions. For five-passenger
vehicles, if your vehicle is equipped with a
cargo shade, route the top tether between
the seatback and the cargo shade.
head restraint posts.
For seven-passenger vehicles that have
adjustable head restraints, raise the
head restraint and route the single tether
under the head restraint and in between the
head restraint posts.
If the position you are
using does not have a
head restraint and you are
using a single tether,
route the tether over
the seatback.
If the position you are
using has a head restraint
and you are using a
dual tether, route the tether
around the head restraint.
If the position you are
using does not have a
head restraint and you
are using a dual tether,
route the tether over
the seatback.
3. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
1-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear
Outside Seat Position
If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCH
system, see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
There are no top tether anchors at the third row seating
positions (if equipped). Do not secure a child seat in
these positions if a national or local law requires that the
top tether be anchored, or if the instructions that
come with the child restraint say that the top tether must
be anchored.
If your child restraint does not have the LATCH system,
you will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the
child restraint in this position. Be sure to follow the
instructions that came with the child restraint. Secure
the child in the child restraint when and as the
instructions say.
3. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
1. Put the child restraint on the seat.
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
1-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
5. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the
lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder
belt back into the retractor. If you are using a
forward-facing child restraint, you may find it helpful
to use your knee to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
1-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. If your child restraint manufacturer recommends
using a top tether, and the position that you are
using has a top tether anchor, attach and tighten the
top tether to the top tether anchor. Refer to the
instructions that came with the child restraint and to
on page 1-43.
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position
Your vehicle has a right front passenger’s airbag. A rear
seat is a safer place to secure a forward-facing child
In addition, your vehicle has a passenger sensing
system. The passenger sensing system is designed to
turn off the right front passenger’s frontal airbag
when an infant in a rear-facing infant seat or a small
child in a forward-facing child restraint or booster seat is
for more information on this including important
safety information.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, if the top tether is attached
to the top tether anchor, disconnect it. Unbuckle the
vehicle’s safety belt and let it go back all the way. The
safety belt will move freely again and be ready to
work for an adult or larger child passenger.
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Center Rear Seat Position
Many child restraints are too wide to be correctly
secured in the center rear seat, although some of them
will fit there. If the center seat position is too narrow
for your child restraint, secure it in a rear outside
seat position.
If you secure a child restraint in the center seat position,
follow the instructions in Securing a Child Restraint in
1-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
If you need to secure a forward-facing child restraint in
the right front seat position, move the seat as far
back as it will go before securing the forward-facing
{CAUTION:
If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCH
system, see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating airbag.
There is no top tether anchor at the right front seating
position. Do not secure a child seat in this position
if a national or local law requires that the top tether be
anchored or if the instructions that come with the
child restraint say that the top tether must be anchored.
on page 1-43 if the child restraint has a top tether.
Even though the passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the passenger’s frontal
airbag if the system detects a rear-facing
child restraint, no system is fail-safe, and no
one can guarantee that an airbag will not
deploy under some unusual circumstance,
even though it is turned off. We recommend
that rear-facing child restraints be secured in
the rear seat, even if the airbag is off.
1-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the
child restraint in this position. Be sure to follow the
instructions that came with the child restraint. Secure
the child in the child restraint when and as the
instructions say.
1. Your vehicle has a right front passenger’s frontal
page 1-67. We recommend that rear-facing child
restraints be secured in a rear seat, even if
the airbag is off. If your child restraint is
forward-facing, move the seat as far back as it will
go before securing the child restraint in this
When the passenger sensing system has turned off
the right front passenger’s frontal airbag, the off
indicator in the passenger airbag status indicator
should light and stay lit when you turn the ignition to
RUN or START. See Passenger Airbag Status
4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
1-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the
lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder
belt back into the retractor. If you are using a
forward-facing child restraint, you may find it helpful
to use your knee to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt. You should not be
able to pull more of the belt from the retractor
once the lock has been set.
1-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in the child
restraint in a rear seat position in the vehicle and
check with your dealer.
8. If the airbag is off, the off indicator in the rearview
mirror will be lit and stay lit when the key is turned
to RUN or START.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety
belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an
adult or larger child passenger.
If a child restraint has been installed and the on
indicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove the child
restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the child restraint.
If after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting
the vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to make
sure that the vehicle’s seatback is not pressing the child
restraint into the seat cushion. If this happens, slightly
recline the vehicle’s seatback and adjust the seat
cushion if possible. Also make sure the child restraint is
not trapped under the vehicle head restraint. If this
happens, adjust the head restraint.
1-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Here are the most important things to know about the
airbag system:
Airbag System
Your vehicle has a frontal airbag for the driver and a
frontal airbag for the right front passenger. Your vehicle
may also have roof-mounted side impact airbags
designed for either side impact or rollover deployment.
Roof-mounted side impact airbags are available for
the driver and the passenger seated directly behind the
driver and for the right front passenger and the
{CAUTION:
You can be severely injured or killed in a crash
if you are not wearing your safety belt — even
if you have airbags. Wearing your safety belt
during a crash helps reduce your chance of
hitting things inside the vehicle or being
ejected from it. Airbags are “supplemental
restraints” to the safety belts. All airbags are
designed to work with safety belts but do not
replace them.
passenger seated directly behind that passenger.
If your vehicle has roof-mounted side impact airbags,
the word AIRBAG will appear on the airbag covering on
the sidewall trim near the driver’s and right front
passenger’s window.
Frontal airbags are designed to help reduce the risk of
injury from the force of an inflating frontal airbag.
But these airbags must inflate very quickly to do their
job and comply with federal regulations.
Frontal airbags for the driver and right front
passenger are designed to deploy in moderate
to severe frontal and near frontal crashes.
CAUTION: (Continued)
1-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CAUTION: (Continued)
{CAUTION:
They are not designed to inflate in rollover,
rear crashes, or in many side crashes. And, for
some unrestrained occupants, frontal airbags
may provide less protection in frontal crashes
than more forceful airbags have provided in
the past.
Both frontal and roof-mounted side impact
airbags inflate with great force, faster than the
blink of an eye. If you are too close to an
inflating airbag, as you would be if you were
leaning forward, it could seriously injure you.
Safety belts help keep you in position for
airbag inflation before and during a crash.
Always wear your safety belt even with frontal
airbags. The driver should sit as far back as
possible while still maintaining control of the
vehicle. Occupants should not lean on or sleep
against the door.
Roof-mounted side impact airbags are
designed to inflate in moderate to severe
crashes where something hits the side of your
vehicle. They are not designed to inflate in
frontal or in rear crashes. If the vehicle is
equipped with rollover capable airbags, it has
been designed to deploy the roof-mounted
side impact airbags in the event of a vehicle
rollover. Everyone in your vehicle should wear
a safety belt properly — whether or not there
is an airbag for that person.
1-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
There is an airbag
readiness light on the
instrument panel cluster,
which shows the airbag
symbol.
{CAUTION:
Anyone who is up against, or very close to,
any airbag when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder
belts offer the best protection for adults, but
not for young children and infants. Neither the
vehicle’s safety belt system nor its airbag
system is designed for them. Young children
and infants need the protection that a child
restraint system can provide. Always secure
children properly in your vehicle. To read how,
The system checks the airbag electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
for more information.
1-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If your vehicle has a roof-mounted airbag for the driver
and the person seated directly behind the driver, it
is located in the ceiling above the side windows.
If your vehicle has a roof-mounted airbag for the right
front passenger and the person directly behind that
passenger, it is located in the ceiling above the
side windows.
1-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When Should an Airbag Inflate?
{CAUTION:
The driver’s and right front passenger’s frontal airbags
are designed to inflate in moderate to severe frontal or
near-frontal crashes. But they are designed to inflate only
if the impact exceeds a predetermined deployment
threshold. Deployment thresholds take into account a
variety of desired deployment and non-deployment
events and are used to predict how severe a crash is
likely to be in time for the airbags to inflate and help
restrain the occupants. Whether your frontal airbags will
or should deploy is not based on how fast your vehicle is
traveling. It depends largely on what you hit, the direction
of the impact and how quickly your vehicle slows down.
If something is between an occupant and an
airbag, the bag might not inflate properly or it
might force the object into that person causing
severe injury or even death. The path of an
inflating airbag must be kept clear. Do not put
anything between an occupant and an airbag,
and do not attach or put anything on the
steering wheel hub or on or near any other
airbag covering. And, if your vehicle has
roof-mounted side impact airbags, never
secure anything to the roof of your vehicle by
routing the rope or tiedown through any door
or window opening. If you do, the path of an
inflating side impact airbag will be blocked.
The path of an inflating airbag must be
kept clear.
In addition, your vehicle has “dual stage” frontal airbags,
which adjust the restraint according to crash severity.
Your vehicle is equipped with electronic frontal sensors,
which help the sensing system distinguish between a
moderate frontal impact and a more severe frontal
impact. For moderate frontal impacts, these airbags
inflate at a level less than full deployment. For
more severe frontal impacts, full deployment occurs. If
the front of your vehicle goes straight into a wall
that does not move or deform, the threshold level for
the reduced deployment is about 9 to 16 mph (14
to 26 km/h), and the threshold level for a full deployment
is about 18 to 25 mph (29 to 40 km/h). (The threshold
level can vary, however, with specific vehicle design, so
that it can be somewhat above or below this range.)
1-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Frontal airbags may inflate at different crash speeds.
For example:
Your vehicle may or may not have a roof-mounted
page 1-58. These “rollover capable” airbags are
intended to inflate in moderate to severe side crashes
or during a rollover. A roof-mounted airbag will inflate if
the crash severity is above the system’s designed
“threshold level.” The threshold level can vary with
specific vehicle design. Roof-mounted airbags are not
intended to inflate in frontal or near-frontal impacts,
or rear impacts. Both roof-mounted airbags will deploy
when either side of the vehicle is struck or during
a rollover.
• If the vehicle hits a stationary object, the airbags
could inflate at a different crash speed than if the
vehicle hits a moving object.
• If the vehicle hits an object that deforms, the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than
if the vehicle hits an object that does not deform.
• If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole) the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle hits a wide object (like a wall).
In any particular crash, no one can say whether an
airbag should have inflated simply because of the
damage to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs
were. For frontal airbags, inflation is determined by
what the vehicle hits, the angle of the impact, and how
quickly the vehicle slows down. For roof-mounted
airbags, inflation is determined by the location and
severity of the impact.
• If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle goes straight into the object.
The frontal airbags (driver and right front passenger) are
not intended to inflate during vehicle rollovers, rear
impacts, or in many side impacts.
Your vehicle has seat position sensors which enable the
sensing system to monitor the position of the driver’s
seat and the right front passenger’s seat. Seat position
sensors provide information that is used to determine
if the airbags should deploy at a reduced level or at full
deployment.
The airbag system is designed to work properly under a
wide range of conditions, including off-road usage.
Observe safe driving speeds, especially on rough
terrain. As always, wear your safety belt. See Off-Road
1-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
What Makes an Airbag Inflate?
How Does an Airbag Restrain?
In an impact of sufficient severity, the airbag sensing
system detects that the vehicle is in a crash. In the case
of a “rollover capable” roof-mounted side impact
airbag, the sensing system detects that the vehicle is
about to roll over. The sensing system triggers a release
of gas from the inflator, which inflates the airbag. The
inflator, airbag, and related hardware are all part of
the airbag modules inside the steering wheel and in the
instrument panel in front of the right front passenger.
For vehicles with roof-mounted side impact airbags, the
airbag modules are located in the ceiling of the
vehicle, near the side windows.
In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions,
even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel or
the instrument panel. In moderate to severe side
collisions, even belted occupants can contact the inside
of the vehicle. The airbag supplements the protection
provided by safety belts. Airbags distribute the force of
the impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper
body, stopping the occupant more gradually. But the
frontal airbags would not help you in many types
of collisions, including rollovers, rear impacts, and many
side impacts, primarily because an occupant’s motion
is not toward the airbag. Roof-mounted side impact
airbags would not help you in many types of collisions,
including many frontal or near frontal collisions, and
rear impacts, primarily because an occupant’s motion is
not toward those airbags. Airbags should never be
regarded as anything more than a supplement to safety
belts, and then only in moderate to severe frontal or
near-frontal collisions for the driver’s and right front
passenger’s frontal airbags, and only in moderate to
severe side collisions or rollovers for the roof-mounted
side impact airbags.
1-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
What Will You See After an Airbag
Inflates?
{CAUTION:
After a frontal airbag inflates, it quickly deflates, so
quickly that some people may not even realize
When an airbag inflates, there is dust in the
air. This dust could cause breathing problems
for people with a history of asthma or other
breathing trouble. To avoid this, everyone in
the vehicle should get out as soon as it is safe
to do so. If you have breathing problems but
cannot get out of the vehicle after an airbag
inflates, then get fresh air by opening a
window or a door. If you experience breathing
problems following an airbag deployment, you
should seek medical attention.
the airbag inflated. Roof-mounted side impact airbags
deflate more slowly and may still be at least partially
inflated minutes after the vehicle comes to rest. Some
components of the airbag module may be hot for a short
time. These components include the steering wheel
hub for the driver’s frontal airbag and the instrument
panel for the right front passenger’s frontal airbag. For
vehicles with side impact airbags, the ceiling of your
vehicle near the side windows may be hot. The parts of
the bag that come into contact with you may be
warm, but not too hot to touch. There will be some
smoke and dust coming from the vents in the deflated
airbags. Airbag inflation does not prevent the driver from
seeing out of the windshield or being able to steer the
vehicle, nor does it stop people from leaving the vehicle.
Your vehicle has a feature that may automatically
unlock the doors and turn the interior lamps on when
the airbags inflate (if battery power is available). You can
lock the doors again and turn the interior lamps off by
using the door lock and interior lamp controls.
1-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In many crashes severe enough to inflate an airbag,
windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.
Additional windshield breakage may also occur from the
right front passenger airbag.
Passenger Sensing System
Your vehicle has a passenger sensing system for the
right front passenger’s position. A passenger airbag
status indicator in the rearview mirror will be visible when
you turn your ignition key to START or RUN. The words
ON and OFF or the symbol for on and off, will be visible
during the system check. When the system check is
complete, either the word ON or the word OFF, or the
symbol for on or the symbol for off will be visible. See
• Airbags are designed to inflate only once. After an
airbag inflates, you will need some new parts for
your airbag system. If you do not get them,
the airbag system will not be there to help protect
you in another crash. A new system will include
airbag modules and possibly other parts. The
service manual for your vehicle covers the need to
replace other parts.
• Your vehicle is equipped with a crash sensing and
diagnostic module which records information after
a crash. See Vehicle Data Collection and Event
• Let only qualified technicians work on your airbag
system. Improper service can mean that your
airbag system will not work properly. See your
dealer for service.
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator – United States
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator – Canada
1-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The passenger sensing system will turn off the right
front passenger’s frontal airbag under certain conditions.
The driver’s airbag and the side airbags are not part
of the passenger sensing system.
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating airbag.
The passenger sensing system works with sensors that
are part of the right front passenger’s seat and safety
belt. The sensors are designed to detect the presence of
a properly-seated occupant and determine if the
passenger’s frontal airbag should be enabled (may
inflate) or not.
Even though the passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the passenger’s frontal
airbag if the system detects a rear-facing
child restraint, no system is fail-safe, and no
one can guarantee that an airbag will not
deploy under some unusual circumstance,
even though it is turned off. We recommend
that rear-facing child restraints be secured in
the rear seat, even if the airbag is off.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat. We
recommend that child restraints be secured in a rear
seat, including an infant riding in a rear-facing infant
seat, a child riding in a forward-facing child seat and an
older child riding in a booster seat.
Your vehicle has a rear seat that will accommodate a
rear-facing child restraint. A label on your sun visor says,
“Never put a rear-facing child seat in the front.” This
is because the risk to the rear-facing child is so great, if
the airbag deploys.
If you need to secure a forward-facing child
restraint in the right front seat, always move
the front passenger seat as far back as it will
go. It is better to secure the child restraint in a
rear seat.
1-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The passenger sensing system is designed to turn off
the right front passenger’s frontal airbag if:
If after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting the
vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to make
sure that the vehicle’s seatback is not pressing the child
restraint into the seat cushion. If this happens, slightly
recline the vehicle’s seatback and adjust the seat
cushion if possible. Also make sure the child restraint is
not trapped under the vehicle head restraint. If this
happens, adjust the head restraint.
• the right front passenger seat is unoccupied
• the system determines that an infant is present in a
rear-facing infant seat
• the system determines that a small child is present
in a forward-facing child restraint
If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in the child
restraint in a rear seat position in the vehicle and
check with your dealer.
• the system determines that a small child is present
in a booster seat
• a right front passenger takes his/her weight off of
the seat for a period of time
The passenger sensing system is designed to enable
(may inflate) the right front passenger’s frontal
airbag anytime the system senses that a person of adult
size is sitting properly in the right front passenger’s
seat. When the passenger sensing system has allowed
the airbag to be enabled, the on indicator will light
and stay lit to remind you that the airbag is active.
• the right front passenger seat is occupied by a
smaller person, such as a child who has outgrown
child restraints
• or if there is a critical problem with the airbag
system or the passenger sensing system.
For some children who have outgrown child restraints
and for very small adults, the passenger sensing system
may or may not turn off the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag, depending upon the person’s seating
posture and body build. Everyone in your vehicle who
has outgrown child restraints should wear a safety
belt properly — whether or not there is an airbag for
that person.
When the passenger sensing system has turned off the
passenger’s frontal airbag, the off indicator in the
rearview mirror will light and stay lit to remind you that
the airbag is off.
If a child restraint has been installed and the on
indicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove the child
restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the child restraint
following the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
and refer to Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front
1-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right front
passenger’s seat, but the off indicator is lit, it could be
because that person is not sitting properly in the seat. If
this happens, turn the vehicle off and ask the person
to place the seatback in the fully upright position, then sit
upright in the seat, centered on the seat cushion, with
the person’s legs comfortably extended. Restart the
vehicle and have the person remain in this position for
about two minutes. This will allow the system to
detect that person and then enable the passenger’s
airbag.
{CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light in the instrument
panel cluster ever comes on and stays on, it
means that something may be wrong with the
airbag system. If this ever happens, have the
vehicle serviced promptly, because an
adult-size person sitting in the right front
passenger’s seat may not have the protection
of the frontal airbag. See Airbag Readiness
important safety information.
1-70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Aftermarket equipment, such as seat covers, can affect
how well the passenger sensing system operates.
You may want to consider not using seat covers or other
aftermarket equipment if your vehicle has the passenger
sensing system. See Adding Equipment to Your
information about modifications that can affect how the
system operates.
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle
Airbags affect how your vehicle should be serviced.
There are airbag system parts in several places around
your vehicle. You do not want the system to inflate
while someone is working on your vehicle. Your dealer
and the service manual have information about
servicing your vehicle and the airbag system. To
purchase a service manual, see Service Publications
{CAUTION:
Stowing of articles under the passenger’s seat
or between the passenger’s seat cushion and
seatback may interfere with the proper
{CAUTION:
operation of the passenger sensing system.
For up to 10 seconds after the ignition key is
turned off and the battery is disconnected, an
airbag can still inflate during improper service.
You can be injured if you are close to an
airbag when it inflates. Avoid yellow
connectors. They are probably part of the
airbag system. Be sure to follow proper
service procedures, and make sure the person
performing work for you is qualified to do so.
The airbag system does not need regular maintenance.
1-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
Q: Because I have a disability, I have to get my
vehicle modified. How can I find out whether
this will affect my airbag system?
A: Changing or moving any parts of the front seats,
safety belts, the airbag sensing and diagnostic
module, or the inside rearview mirror can affect the
operation of the airbag system. If you have
questions, call Customer Assistance. The phone
numbers and addresses for Customer Assistance
are in Step Two of the Customer Satisfaction
Procedure in this manual. See Customer
Q: Is there anything I might add to the front or
sides of the vehicle that could keep the
airbags from working properly?
A: Yes. If you add things that change your vehicle’s
frame, bumper system, front end or side sheet
metal or height, they may keep the airbag system
from working properly. Also, the airbag system may
not work properly if you relocate any of the airbag
sensors. If you have any questions about this,
you should contact Customer Assistance before you
modify your vehicle. The phone numbers and
addresses for Customer Assistance are in Step Two
of the Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this
page 7-2.
1-72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Also look for any opened or broken airbag covers, and
have them repaired or replaced. (The airbag system
does not need regular maintenance.)
Restraint System Check
Checking the Restraint Systems
Notice: If you damage the covering for the driver’s
or the right front passenger’s airbag, or the side
impact airbag covering (if equipped) on the ceiling
near the side windows, the airbag may not work
properly. You may have to replace the airbag
module in the steering wheel, both the airbag
module and the instrument panel for the right front
passenger’s airbag, or side impact airbag module
and ceiling covering for roof-mounted side impact
airbags (if equipped.) Do not open or break the
airbag coverings.
Now and then, make sure the safety belt reminder light
and all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors
and anchorages are working properly. Look for any other
loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you see
anything that might keep a safety belt system from doing
its job, have it repaired.
Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a
crash. They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt
is torn or frayed, get a new one right away.
1-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If belts are cut or damaged, replace them. Collision
damage also may mean you will need to have LATCH
system, safety belt or seat parts repaired or replaced.
New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the belt
or LATCH system was not being used at the time of
the collision.
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
{CAUTION:
If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbag
system parts. See the part on the airbag system earlier
in this section.
A crash can damage the restraint systems in
your vehicle. A damaged restraint system may
not properly protect the person using it,
resulting in serious injury or even death in a
crash. To help make sure your restraint
systems are working properly after a crash,
have them inspected and any necessary
replacements made as soon as possible.
If the airbags inflate you will also need to replace the
driver and front passenger’s safety belt retractor
assembly. Be sure to do so. Then the new retractor
assembly will be there to help protect you in a collision.
After a crash you may need to replace the driver and
front passenger’s safety belt retractor assemblies, even
if the airbags have not deployed. The driver and
front passenger’s safety belt retractor assemblies
contain the safety belt pretensioners. Have your safety
belt pretensioners checked if your vehicle has been
in a collision, or if your airbag readiness light stays on
after you start your vehicle or while you are driving. See
If you have had a crash, do you need new belts or
LATCH system parts?
After a very minor collision, nothing may be necessary.
But if the belts were stretched, as they would be if
worn during a more severe crash, then you need
new parts.
If the LATCH system was being used during a more
severe crash, you may need new LATCH system parts.
1-74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 2
Features and Controls
2-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys
{CAUTION:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition
key is dangerous for many reasons. They
could operate the power windows or other
controls or even make the vehicle move. The
children or others could be badly injured or
even killed. Do not leave the keys in a vehicle
with children.
2-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This vehicle has
The key code number tells your dealer or a qualified
locksmith how to make extra keys. Keep this number in
a safe place. If you lose your keys, you’ll be able to
have new ones made easily using this number.
Your selling dealer should also have this number.
one double-sided key
for the ignition and door
lock. It will fit with
either side up.
Notice: If you ever lock your keys in your vehicle,
you may have to damage the vehicle to get in.
Be sure you have spare keys.
If you ever do get locked out of your vehicle, call the
GM Roadside Assistance Center. See Roadside
When a new vehicle is delivered, the dealer provides
the owner with a pair of identical keys and a key
code number.
2-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
At times you may notice a decrease in operating range.
This is normal for any remote keyless entry system. If the
transmitter does not work or if you have to stand closer to
your vehicle for the transmitter to work, try this:
Remote Keyless Entry System
Your keyless entry system operates on a radio
frequency subject to Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.
• Check the distance. You may be too far from your
vehicle. You may need to stand closer during rainy or
snowy weather.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
• Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may be
blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the left or
right, hold the transmitter higher, and try again.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
• Check to determine if battery replacement is
necessary. See “Battery Replacement” under
page 2-6.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
• If you are still having trouble, see your dealer or a
qualified technician for service.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
2-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q(Lock): Press lock to lock all the doors. Press lock
Remote Keyless Entry System
Operation
again within three seconds and the horn will chirp.
L(Panic): Press the horn symbol to make the horn
sound. The headlamps and taillamps will flash for up to
30 seconds. This can be turned off by pressing the
horn button again, by waiting for 30 seconds, or
by starting the vehicle.
If your vehicle has this feature, you can lock and unlock
your doors from about 3 feet (1 m) up to 30 feet
(9 m) away using the remote keyless entry transmitter
supplied with your vehicle.
K(Unlock): Press unlock
for the driver’s door to
unlock automatically, the
parking lamps to flash
and the interior lights to go
on. Press the unlock
button a second time within
three seconds to unlock
all the doors.
Matching Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle
Each remote keyless entry transmitter is coded to
prevent another transmitter from unlocking your vehicle.
If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can
be purchased through your dealer. Remember to bring
any remaining transmitters with you when you go to
your dealer. When the dealer matches the replacement
transmitter to your vehicle, any remaining transmitters
must also be matched. Once your dealer has coded the
new transmitter, the lost transmitter will not unlock
your vehicle. Each vehicle can have a maximum of
four transmitters matched to it.
You can program different feedback settings through the
Driver Information Center (DIC). For more information
2-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To replace the battery in the remote keyless entry
transmitter do the following:
Battery Replacement
Under normal use, the battery in your remote keyless
entry transmitter should last about two years.
You can tell the battery is weak if the transmitter will not
work at the normal range in any location. If you have
to get close to your vehicle before the transmitter works,
it’s probably time to change the battery.
The Driver Information Center (DIC) will display a KEY
FOB # BATTERY LOW message when the transmitter
battery is low.
Notice: When replacing the battery, use care not to
touch any of the circuitry. Static from your body
transferred to these surfaces may damage the
transmitter.
1. Insert a thin coin in the slot between the covers
of the transmitter housing. Gently pry the
transmitter apart.
2. Remove and replace the battery with a three-volt
CR2032 or equivalent battery.
3. Align the covers and snap them together.
4. Check the operation of the transmitter.
2-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle.
You can use the remote keyless entry system.
Doors and Locks
You can use your key to unlock your door from
the outside.
Door Locks
{CAUTION:
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
• Passengers — especially children — can
easily open the doors and fall out of a
moving vehicle. When a door is locked, the
handle will not open it. You increase the
chance of being thrown out of the vehicle
in a crash if the doors are not locked. So,
wear safety belts properly and lock the
doors whenever you drive.
• Young children who get into unlocked
vehicles may be unable to get out. A child
can be overcome by extreme heat and can
suffer permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Always lock your vehicle
whenever you leave it.
You can lock or unlock the door from the inside by sliding
the manual lever forward or rearward. When the door is
unlocked, you can see a red area on the lever.
The manual lever on each door works only that
door’s lock.
• Outsiders can easily enter through an
unlocked door when you slow down or
stop your vehicle. Locking your doors can
help prevent this from happening.
2-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Five seconds after the last door is closed, all the doors
will lock. You can lock the doors immediately by
using the power door lock switch or by pressing the lock
button on the optional remote keyless entry transmitter
a second time.
Power Door Locks
The power door lock
switches are located on
the driver’s and front
If the key is inserted in the ignition, this feature will not
passenger’s door armrests.
You can turn the delayed locking feature on or off. If the
feature is turned off, the doors will lock immediately
when a power door lock switch or remote keyless entry
transmitter lock button is pressed.
Programming Delayed Locking
To turn the delayed locking feature on or off, do the
following:
Press the lock symbol to lock all of the doors. To unlock
the doors, press the other side of the switch.
1. Press and hold the power door lock switch on the
driver’s door in the lock position.
Delayed Locking
This feature delays the locking of the doors and the
liftgate when using the power lock or the remote keyless
entry system.
2. Press the remote keyless entry transmitter unlock
button twice.
If the delayed locking feature was on, it will now be off.
If the feature was off, it will now be on.
The first press of the power door lock switch or lock
button on the remote keyless entry transmitter with the
driver’s door open will activate the delay locking. A
chime will sound. All doors and the liftgate can
be reopened for up to five seconds from the time the
last door is closed.
2-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To enter the program mode, do the following:
Programmable Automatic
Door Locks
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic lock/unlock
feature which enables you to program your vehicle’s
power door locks. You can program this feature through
the Driver Information Center (DIC), or by the following
method.
1. Begin with the ignition off. Then pull the turn
signal/multifunction lever toward you and hold
it there while you perform the next step.
2. Turn the key to RUN and LOCK twice. Then, with the
key in LOCK, release the turn signal/multifunction
lever. Once you do this, you will hear the lock switch
lock and unlock, the horn will chirp twice, and a
30 second program timer will begin.
Programmable Locking Feature
The following is the list of available programming options:
3. You are now ready to program the automatic door
locks. Select one of the programming options
listed above, and press the lock side of the power
door lock switch to cycle through the lock options.
You will have 30 seconds to begin programming.
If you exceed the 30 second limit, the locks will
automatically lock and unlock and the horn will chirp
twice to indicate that you have left the program
mode. If this occurs, repeat the procedure beginning
with Step 1 to re-enter the programming mode.
Mode 1: All doors lock when the transmission is shifted
into gear.
Mode 2: All doors lock when the vehicle speed is
greater than 8 mph (13 km/h).
The automatic door locks were pre-programmed at the
factory to lock all the doors when the transmission
is shifted into gear. The following instructions detail how
to program your door locks differently than the factory
setting. Choose one of the three programming
You can exit the program mode any time by turning the
ignition to RUN. The locks will automatically lock and
unlock and the horn will chirp twice to indicate that you
are leaving the program mode. If the lock/unlock switches
are not pressed while in the programming mode, the
current auto lock/unlock setting will not be modified.
options listed above before entering the program mode.
See your dealer for more information.
2-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Turn the key to RUN and LOCK twice. Then, with the
key in LOCK, release the turn signal/multifunction
lever. Once you do this, you will hear the lock switch
lock and unlock, the horn will chirp twice, and a
30 second program timer will begin.
Programmable Unlocking Feature
The following is the list of available programming options:
Mode 1: Driver’s door unlocks when the transmission is
shifted into PARK (P).
3. You are now ready to program the automatic door
locks. Select one of the four programming options
listed above, and press the unlock side of the power
door lock switch to cycle through the unlocking
options. You will have 30 seconds to begin
programming. If you exceed the 30 second limit,
the locks will automatically lock and unlock and
the horn will chirp twice to indicate that you have
left the program mode. If this occurs, repeat the
procedure beginning with Step 1 to re-enter the
programming mode.
Mode 2: All doors unlock when the transmission is
shifted into PARK (P).
Mode 3: All doors unlock when the key is removed
from the ignition.
Mode 4: No automatic door unlock.
The automatic door locks were pre-programmed at the
factory to unlock the driver’s door once the transmission
is shifted to PARK (P). The following instructions detail
how to program your door locks differently than the
factory setting. Choose one of the four programming
options listed above before entering the program mode.
You can exit the program mode any time by turning the
ignition to RUN. The locks will automatically lock and
unlock and the horn will chirp twice to indicate that you
are leaving the program mode. If the lock/unlock switches
are not pressed while in the programming mode, the
current auto lock/unlock setting will not be modified.
To enter the program mode you need to do the
following:
1. Begin with the ignition off. Then pull the turn
signal/multifunction lever toward you and hold
it there while you perform the next step.
See your dealer for more information.
2-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The rear doors of your vehicle cannot be opened from
the inside while this feature is in use. If you want to open
the rear door while the security lock is on, unlock the
door and open the door from the outside.
Rear Door Security Locks
Your vehicle may have this feature. You can lock the rear
doors so they cannot be opened from the inside by
passengers. To use one of these locks do the following:
1. Open one of the rear doors. You will find a
security lock lever located on the inside edge
of each rear door.
Lockout Protection
This feature stops the power door locks from locking
when the key is in the ignition and a door is open
to protect you from locking your key in the vehicle.
2. Move the lever down to
engage the security
lock. Move the lever up
to disengage the
If the power lock switch is pressed when a door is open
and the key is in the ignition, all the doors will lock
and then the driver’s door will unlock.
security lock.
3. Close the door.
2-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Liftgate Release
Liftgate/Liftglass
To unlock the liftgate, use the power door lock switch or
the remote keyless entry transmitter. See Remote
liftglass will also unlock when the liftgate is unlocked.
{CAUTION:
Press the button on the liftglass to open it. To open the
entire liftgate, lift the handle located in the center of
the liftgate. When the liftgate is opened, the liftglass will
lock after a short delay.
It can be dangerous to drive with the liftgate or
liftglass open because carbon monoxide (CO)
gas can come into your vehicle. You cannot
see or smell CO. It can cause
unconsciousness and even death. If you must
drive with the liftgate open or if electrical
wiring or other cable connections must pass
through the seal between the body and the
liftgate or liftglass:
Emergency Release for Opening
Liftgate
1. Remove the trim plug, located on the inside of the
liftgate in the center, to expose the access hole in
the trim panel.
• Make sure all other windows are shut.
2. Use a tool to reach through the access hole in the
trim panel.
• Turn the fan on your climate control
system to its highest speed and select the
control setting that will force outside air
into your vehicle. See “Climate Control
System” in the Index.
3. Pry the left release lever up to the unlock position.
Pry the right release lever up to unlatch the liftgate.
4. Reinstall the trim plug.
• If you have air outlets on or under the
instrument panel, open them all the way.
2-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Windows
{CAUTION:
Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets in a
vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous.
They can be overcome by the extreme heat
and suffer permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Never leave a child, a
helpless adult, or a pet alone in a vehicle,
especially with the windows closed in warm or
hot weather.
2-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Express-Down Window
Power Windows
AUTO (Express-down): The driver’s and front
passenger’s window switches have an express-down
feature that allows you to lower the window without
holding the switch down. Press down briefly on
the driver’s or front passenger’s window switch labeled
AUTO to activate the express-down feature. Lightly
tap the switch to open the window slightly. The
express-down feature can be interrupted at any time by
pressing the top of the switch.
Window Lockout
o(Lockout): Your vehicle has a lockout feature to
prevent passengers from operating the power windows.
The lockout switch is located in front of the window
switches on the driver’s door. A light in the lockout
switch will come on to show that the switch has been
activated. Press the lockout switch again to return
to normal operation.
The controls for the power windows are located on the
armrest on each of the side doors. With power
windows, the switches operate the windows when the
ignition is in RUN, ACCESSORY or when Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) is active. See Retained
also has a switch for each of the passenger’s windows.
Press down the top of the switch to lower the window
and pull up on the switch to raise the window. If you hold
the switch down for three to seven seconds after the
window has been completely lowered or raised,
the window will not operate for about 15 seconds.
2-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Power Rear Quarter Windows
Sun Visors
Your vehicle may have power rear quarter windows.
Sun Visors with Slide Rod
The switches that operate the windows are located on
the overhead console. These switches allow the
driver to open and close each third row seat window
separately.
Your vehicle may have this feature. Pull the sun visor
down to block glare. Detach the sun visor from the
center mount and slide it along the rod from side-to-side
to cover the driver or passenger side of the front
window. Swing the sun visor to the side to cover the
side window. It can also be moved along the rod from
side-to-side in this position.
) (Driver’s Quarter Glass): Press the button
downward to open or upward to close the drivers side
(left) quarter glass for the third row seat.
Sun Visors with Fixed Rod and Pull-out
Extension
Your vehicle may have this feature. Pull the sun visor
down to block glare. Pull the sun visor extender out for
additional coverage. Detach the sun visor from the center
mount and swing it to the side to cover the side window.
( (Passenger’s Quarter Glass): Press the button
downward to open or upward to close the passengers
side (right) quarter glass for the third row seat.
The ignition must be in RUN, ACCESSORY, or Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) must be active, to use the
power rear quarter windows. See Retained Accessory
Visor Vanity Mirror
Pull the sun visor down to expose the vanity mirror. You
may have to lift a cover to expose the mirror.
Lighted Visor Vanity Mirror
Your vehicle may have this feature. Pull the sun visor
down and lift the mirror cover to turn on the lamps. The
lamps will turn off when the cover is closed.
2-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If a locked door is opened without the key or the remote
keyless entry transmitter, the alarm will go off. The
headlamps and parking lamps will flash for two minutes,
and the horn will sound for 30 seconds, then will turn
off to save the battery power.
Theft-Deterrent Systems
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities.
Although your vehicle has a number of theft-deterrent
features, we know that nothing we put on it can make it
impossible to steal.
Remember, the theft-deterrent system won’t activate if
you lock the doors with a key or use the manual
door lock. It activates only if you use a power door lock
switch with the door open, or with the remote keyless
entry transmitter. You should also remember that
you can start your vehicle with the correct ignition key if
the alarm has been set off.
Content Theft-Deterrent
Your vehicle may be equipped with a content
theft-deterrent alarm system.
The security light is
located on the instrument
panel cluster.
Here’s how to avoid setting off the alarm by accident:
• If you don’t want to activate the theft-deterrent
system, the vehicle should be locked with the door
key after the doors are closed.
• Always unlock a door with a key, or use the remote
keyless entry transmitter. Unlocking a door any
other way will set off the alarm.
Here’s how to operate the system:
1. Open the door.
2. Lock the door with the power door lock switch or
the remote keyless entry transmitter. The security
light should flash.
If you set off the alarm by accident, unlock any door with
the key. You can also turn off the alarm by pressing
unlock on the remote keyless entry transmitter. The alarm
won’t stop if you try to unlock a door any other way.
3. Close all doors. The security light should turn off
after approximately 30 seconds. The alarm is not
armed until the security light turns off.
2-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Passlock®
Testing the Alarm
The alarm can be tested by following these steps:
Your vehicle is equipped with the
Passlock® theft-deterrent system.
1. From inside the vehicle, lower the driver’s window
and open the driver’s door.
Passlock® is a passive theft-deterrent system that
enables fuel if the ignition lock cylinder is turned with a
valid key. If a correct key is not used or the ignition
lock cylinder is tampered with, the fuel system is
disabled and the vehicle will not start.
2. Activate the system by locking the doors with the
power door lock switch while the door is open, or
with the remote keyless entry transmitter.
3. Get out of the vehicle, close the door and wait for
the security light to go out.
During normal operation, the security light will turn off
approximately five seconds after the key is turned
to RUN.
4. Then reach in through the window, unlock the door
with the manual door lock and open the door. This
should set off the alarm.
If the engine stalls and the security light flashes, wait
about 10 minutes until the light stops flashing before
trying to restart the engine. Remember to release
the key from START as soon as the engine starts.
When the alarm is set the power door unlock switch is
not operational.
If the alarm does not sound when it should but the
headlamps flash, check to see if the horn works. The
horn fuse may be blown. To replace the fuse, see Fuses
If the engine does not start after three tries, the vehicle
needs service.
If the engine is running and the security light comes on,
you will be able to restart the engine if you turn the engine
off. However, your Passlock® system is not working
properly and must be serviced by your dealer. Your
vehicle is not protected by Passlock® at this time. You
may also want to check the fuse. See Fuses and Circuit
If the alarm does not sound or the headlamps do not
flash, the vehicle should be serviced by your dealer.
In an emergency, call the GM Roadside Assistance
2-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ignition Positions
Starting and Operating Your
Vehicle
New Vehicle Break-In
Notice: Your vehicle does not need an elaborate
break-in. But it will perform better in the long run if
you follow these guidelines:
• Keep your speed at 55 mph (88 km/h) or less for
the first 500 miles (805 km).
• Do not drive at any one constant speed, fast or
slow, for the first 500 miles (805 km). Do not
make full-throttle starts. Avoid downshifting to
brake, or slow, the vehicle.
• Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles
(322 km) or so. During this time your new brake
linings are not yet broken in. Hard stops with new
linings can mean premature wear and earlier
replacement. Follow this breaking-in guideline
every time you get new brake linings.
Use the key to turn the ignition switch to four different
positions.
A (LOCK): This position locks the ignition and
transmission. It is a theft-deterrent feature. You will only
be able to remove the key when the ignition is turned
to LOCK.
capabilities of your vehicle and more
information.
Notice: If your key seems stuck in LOCK and you
cannot turn it, be sure you are using the correct key;
if so, is it all the way in? Turn the key only with your
hand. Using a tool to force it could break the key or
the ignition switch. If none of these works, then your
vehicle needs service.
Following break-in, engine speed and load can be
gradually increased.
2-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B (ACCESSORY): This position lets you use things
like the radio and the windshield wipers when the engine
is off.
Starting the Engine
Move your shift lever to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
Your engine will not start in any other position — that is
a safety feature. To restart when you are already
moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.
Notice: Lengthy operation of features such as the
radio in the accessory ignition position may
drain the battery and prevent your vehicle from
starting. Do not operate your vehicle in the
accessory ignition position for a long period
of time.
Notice: Do not try to shift to PARK (P) if your
vehicle is moving. If you do, you could damage the
transmission. Shift to PARK (P) only when your
vehicle is stopped.
C (RUN): This is the position for driving.
D (START): This position starts the engine.
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn the
ignition key to START. When the engine starts,
let go of the key. The idle speed will go down as
your engine gets warm.
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
Your vehicle has a Computer-Controlled Cranking
System. This feature assists in starting the
engine and protects the electrical system. If the
ignition key is turned to the START position,
and then released when the engine begins cranking,
the engine will continue cranking until the vehicle
starts or until it exceeds the maximum cranking time
allowed, approximately 15 seconds to prevent
cranking motor damage. To prevent gear damage,
this system also prevents cranking if the engine
is already running. The engine cranking can
be stopped by turning the ignition switch to the
ACCESSORY or LOCK position.
Your vehicle is equipped with a Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) feature which will allow certain features of
your vehicle to continue to work up to 20 minutes
after the ignition key is turned to LOCK.
Your radio, power windows, sunroof (option) and
overhead console will work when the ignition key is in
RUN or ACCESSORY. Once the key is turned from
RUN to LOCK, these features will continue to work for
up to 20 minutes or until a door is opened.
2-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Holding your key in START for longer than
15 seconds at a time will cause your battery to
be drained much sooner. And the excessive heat
can damage your starter motor. Wait about
15 seconds between each try to help avoid draining
your battery or damaging your starter.
2. If your engine still will not start, or starts but then
stops, it could be flooded with too much gasoline.
Try pushing your accelerator pedal all the way to the
floor and holding it there as you hold the key in
START for about three seconds. When the engine
starts, let go of the key and accelerator. If the
vehicle starts briefly but then stops again, do the
same thing, but this time keep the pedal down
for five or six seconds. This clears the extra
gasoline from the engine.
2. If it does not start within 10 seconds, push the
accelerator pedal all the way to the floor, while
you hold the ignition key in START. When
the engine starts, let go of the key and let up on the
accelerator pedal. Wait about 15 seconds between
each try.
Notice: Your engine is designed to work with the
electronics in your vehicle. If you add electrical
parts or accessories, you could change the way the
engine operates. Before adding electrical equipment,
check with your dealer. If you do not, your engine
might not perform properly. Any resulting damage
would not be covered by your vehicle’s warranty.
When starting your engine in very cold weather (below
0°F or −18°C), do this:
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn the
ignition key to START and hold it there up to
15 seconds. When the engine starts, let go of
the key.
2-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal
Engine Coolant Heater
If your vehicle has this feature, you can change the
position of the throttle and brake pedals. This feature is
designed for shorter drivers, since the pedals cannot
move farther away from the standard position, but can
move closer for better pedal reach. This feature can
be programmed to work with the memory function,
page 2-62.
Your vehicle may have an engine coolant heater. In
very cold weather, 0°F (−18°C) or colder, the engine
coolant heater can help. You will get easier starting and
better fuel economy during engine warm-up. Usually,
the coolant heater should be plugged in a minimum
of four hours prior to starting your vehicle. At
temperatures above 32°F (0°C), use of the coolant
heater is not required.
The vehicle must be in PARK (P) for this feature to
operate.
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater
1. Turn off the engine.
The switch used to adjust
the pedals is located on
the steering column.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord. The
cord is located on the driver’s side of the engine
compartment, behind the battery.
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-Volt AC outlet.
Press the switch forward or backward to move the
pedals closer or farther away from you.
2-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Displacement on Demand™ (DoD™)
{CAUTION:
Your vehicle’s V8 engine may have Displacement on
Demand™ (DoD™). This system allows the engine
to operate on either all or half of its cylinders, depending
on your driving conditions.
Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet
could cause an electrical shock. Also, the
wrong kind of extension cord could overheat
and cause a fire. You could be seriously
injured. Plug the cord into a properly grounded
three-prong 110-volt AC outlet. If the cord will
not reach, use a heavy-duty three-prong
extension cord rated for at least 15 amps.
When less power is required, such as cruising at a
constant vehicle speed, the system will operate in the
half cylinder mode, allowing your vehicle to achieve
better fuel economy. When greater power demands are
required, such as accelerating from a stop, passing,
or merging onto a freeway, the system will maintain
full-cylinder operation.
4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and
store the cord as it was before to keep it away
from moving engine parts. If you do not, it could be
damaged.
How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged
in? The answer depends on the outside temperature, the
kind of oil you have, and some other things. Instead
of trying to list everything here, we ask that you contact
your dealer in the area where you will be parking
your vehicle. The dealer can give you the best advice
for that particular area.
2-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Transmission Operation
{CAUTION:
It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the
shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
Do not leave your vehicle when the engine is
running unless you have to. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured. To
be sure your vehicle will not move, even when
you are on fairly level ground, always set your
parking brake and move the shift lever to
page 2-32. If you are pulling a trailer, see
There are several different positions for your gear
shift lever.
PARK (P): This position locks the rear wheels. It is the
best position to use when you start the engine
because your vehicle cannot move easily.
2-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.
Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your vehicle
is moving forward could damage the transmission.
The repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle is
stopped.
{CAUTION:
If you have four-wheel drive, your vehicle will
be free to roll — even if your shift lever is in
PARK (P) — if your transfer case is in
NEUTRAL. So, be sure the transfer case is in a
drive gear — not in NEUTRAL. See Four-Wheel
on page 2-32.
To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of snow,
ice, or sand without damaging your transmission,
on page 4-44.
NEUTRAL (N): In this position, the engine does not
connect with the wheels. To restart when you are
already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.
Ensure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P) before starting
the engine. Your vehicle has an automatic transmission
shift lock control system. You have to fully apply the
regular brakes before you can shift from PARK (P) when
the ignition key is in RUN. If you cannot shift out of
PARK (P), ease pressure on the shift lever, press the
button on the shift lever and push the shift lever all
the way into PARK (P) as you maintain brake
{CAUTION:
Shifting into a drive gear while your engine is
running at high speed is dangerous. Unless
your foot is firmly on the brake pedal, your
vehicle could move very rapidly. You could
lose control and hit people or objects. Do not
shift into a drive gear while your engine is
running at high speed.
application. Move the shift lever into the gear you wish.
2-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Shifting out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N)
with the engine running at high speed may damage
the transmission. The repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Be sure the engine is not
running at high speed when shifting your vehicle.
SECOND (2): This position gives you more power but
lower fuel economy than THIRD (3). You can use
SECOND (2) on hills. It can help control your speed as
you go down steep mountain roads, but then you
would also want to use the brakes off and on.
To shift to the SECOND (2) position, you must first
press the large button on the shift handle. While
the button is pressed, move the shifter in the
SECOND (2) position.
DRIVE (D): This position is for normal driving. If
you need more power for passing, and you are:
• Going less than about 35 mph (55 km/h), push the
accelerator pedal about halfway down.
You can also use SECOND (2) for starting the vehicle
from a stop on slippery road surfaces.
• Going about 35 mph (55 km/h) or more, push the
accelerator all the way down.
FIRST (1): This position gives you even more power
but lower fuel economy than SECOND (2). You can use
it on very steep hills, or in deep snow or mud. If the
selector lever is put in FIRST (1) while the vehicle
is moving forward, the transmission will not shift into
first gear until the vehicle is going slowly enough.
You will shift down to the next gear and have
more power.
DRIVE (D) can be used when towing a trailer, carrying a
heavy load, driving on steep hills, or for off-road
driving. You may want to shift the transmission to
THIRD (3) or, if necessary, a lower gear selection if the
transmission shifts too often.
To shift to the FIRST (1) position, you must first press
the large button on the shift handle. While the button is
pressed, move the shifter in the FIRST (1) position.
THIRD (3): This position is also used for normal driving.
However, it offers more power and lower fuel economy
than DRIVE (D).
Notice: Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle in
one place on a hill using only the accelerator
pedal may damage the transmission. If you are
stuck, do not spin the tires. When stopping on a hill,
use the brakes to hold the vehicle in place.
To shift to the THIRD (3) position, you must first press
the large button on the shift handle. While the button
is pressed, move the shifter in the THIRD (3) position.
2-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Transfer Case
Four-Wheel Drive
Your vehicle will have one of the following transfer
case knobs.
If your vehicle has four-wheel drive, the engine’s driving
power can be sent to all four wheels for extra traction.
To get the most satisfaction out of four-wheel drive, you
must be familiar with its operation. Read the part that
follows before using four-wheel drive. You should
use Two-Wheel High for most normal driving conditions.
Notice: Driving on clean, dry pavement in
Four-Wheel-Drive High or Four-Wheel-Drive Low for
an extended period of time may cause premature
wear on your vehicle’s powertrain. Do not drive on
clean, dry pavement in Four-Wheel-Drive High or
Four-Wheel-Drive Low for extended periods of time.
If your vehicle has four-wheel drive, the transfer case
knob is located to the right of the steering wheel on the
instrument panel. Use this knob to shift into and out
of four-wheel drive.
2-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2HI, 2 m (Two-Wheel High): This setting is for driving
in most street and highway situations. Your front axle
is not engaged in two-wheel drive. It also provides
the best fuel economy.
{CAUTION:
Shifting the transfer case to NEUTRAL can
cause your vehicle to roll even if the
transmission is in PARK (P). You or someone
else could be seriously injured. Be sure to set
the parking brake before placing the transfer
page 2-31.
A4WD, AUTO (Automatic Four-Wheel Drive): This
setting is ideal for use when road conditions are
variable. When driving your vehicle in automatic
four-wheel drive, the front axle is engaged, but the
vehicle’s power is sent to the rear wheels. When the
vehicle senses a loss of traction, the system will
automatically engage four-wheel drive. Driving in this
mode results in slightly lower fuel economy than
Two-Wheel High.
NEUTRAL: Shift the vehicle’s transfer case to
NEUTRAL only when towing your vehicle. See
information.
4HI, 4 m (Four-Wheel High): This setting should be
used when you need extra traction, such as on snowy or
icy roads or in most off-road situations. This setting
also engages your front axle to help drive your vehicle.
An indicator light in the knob will show you which
position the transfer case is in. The indicator lights will
come on briefly when you turn on the ignition and
one will stay on. If the lights do not come on, you should
take your vehicle to your dealer for service. An
indicator light will flash while shifting the transfer case. It
will stay on when the shift is complete. If for some
reason the transfer case cannot make a requested shift,
it will return to the last chosen setting.
4LO, 4 n (Four-Wheel Low): This setting also
engages your front axle and delivers extra torque. It
sends maximum power to all four wheels. You might
choose this setting if you are driving off-road in deep
sand, deep mud, and climbing or descending steep hills.
2-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the service Four-Wheel Drive Warning Light on the
instrument panel cluster stays on, you should take your
vehicle to your dealer for service. See Service
further information.
If you turn the knob to Four-Wheel Low when your
vehicle is in gear and/or moving, the Four-Wheel Low
indicator light will flash for 30 seconds and not complete
the shift unless your vehicle is moving less than
2 mph (3.2 km/h) and the transmission is in
NEUTRAL (N). After 30 seconds, the transfer case will
return to the setting last chosen.
Shifting Into Four-Wheel High or Automatic
Four-Wheel Drive
Turn the knob to Four-Wheel High or Automatic
Four-Wheel Drive. This can be done at any speed
unless you are shifting out of Four-Wheel Low. The
indicator light will flash while shifting. It will remain on
when the shift is complete.
Shifting Out of Four-Wheel Low
To shift from Four-Wheel Low to Four-Wheel High, Auto
Four-Wheel Drive, or Two-Wheel High, your vehicle
must be stopped or moving less than 2 mph (3.2 km/h)
with the transmission in NEUTRAL (N) and the
engine running. The preferred method for shifting out of
Four-Wheel Low is to have your vehicle moving
1 or 2 mph (1.6 to 3.2 km/h). Turn the knob to
Four-Wheel High, Auto Four-Wheel Drive, or Two-Wheel
High. You must wait for the Four-Wheel High, Auto
Four-Wheel Drive, or Two-Wheel High indicator light to
stop flashing and stay off before shifting your
transmission into gear.
Shifting Into Two-Wheel High
Turn the knob to Two-Wheel High. This can be done at
any speed unless you are shifting out of Four-Wheel Low.
Shifting Into Four-Wheel Low
To shift to Four-Wheel Low, the vehicle’s engine must
be running and the vehicle must be stopped or
moving less than 2 mph (3.2 km/h) with the transmission
in NEUTRAL (N). The preferred method for shifting
into Four-Wheel Low is to have your vehicle moving 1 or
2 mph (1.6 to 3.2 km/h). Turn the knob to Four-Wheel
Low. You must wait for the Four-Wheel Low indicator
light to stop flashing and stay on before shifting
the transmission into gear.
If the knob is turned to Four Wheel-High, Auto
Four-Wheel Drive, or Two-Wheel High when your
vehicle is in gear and/or moving, the Four-Wheel High,
Auto Four-Wheel Drive, or Two-Wheel High indicator
light will flash for 30 seconds. It will not complete
the shift unless your vehicle is moving less than 2 mph
(3.2 km/h) with the transmission in NEUTRAL (N).
2-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Shifting into NEUTRAL
Shifting Out of NEUTRAL
Before shifting the transfer case to NEUTRAL, first
make sure the vehicle is parked so that it will not roll.
To shift the transfer case out of NEUTRAL, do the
following:
1. Set the parking brake and apply the regular
brake pedal.
1. Set the parking brake.
2. Start the vehicle.
2. Turn the ignition to RUN with the engine off.
3. Put the transmission in NEUTRAL (N).
3. Put the transmission in NEUTRAL (N).
4. Shift the transfer case to Two-Wheel High.
4. Turn the transfer case knob to the desired position
(Two-Wheel High, Four-Wheel High, or Auto
Four-Wheel Drive).
5. Turn the transfer case knob all of the way past
Four-Wheel Low and hold it there for a minimum
of 10 seconds. The neutral indicator light will
come on.
5. After the transfer case has shifted out of NEUTRAL,
the indicator light will go out.
6. With the engine running, shift the transmission to
REVERSE (R) for one second, then shift the
transmission to DRIVE (D) for one second, to
ensure that the transfer case is in NEUTRAL.
6. Release the parking brake.
7. Start the engine and shift the transmission to the
desired position.
7. Turn the engine off, by turning the key to
ACCESSORY.
8. Place the transmission shift lever in PARK (P).
9. Turn the ignition to LOCK.
2-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To release the parking brake, hold the regular brake
pedal down. Pull the parking brake lever up until you can
press in the button at the end of the lever. Hold the
button in as you move the parking brake lever all the
way down.
Parking Brake
To set the parking brake, hold the regular brake pedal
down with your foot and pull up on the parking brake
lever located between the seats. If the ignition is on, the
brake system warning light on the instrument panel
cluster will come on. See Brake System Warning Light
on page 3-39.
Notice: Driving with the parking brake on can
overheat the brake system and cause premature
wear or damage to brake system parts. Verify that
the parking brake is fully released and the brake
warning light is off before driving.
If you are towing a trailer and you must park on a hill,
2-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To shift into PARK (P), do the following:
Shifting Into Park (P)
1. Hold the brake pedal down with your foot and set
the parking brake.
2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) by pressing the
button on the side of the shift lever and pushing the
lever all the way toward the front of the vehicle.
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if
the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll. If
you have left the engine running, the vehicle
can move suddenly. You or others could be
injured. To be sure your vehicle will not move,
even when you are on fairly level ground, use
the steps that follow. With four-wheel drive,
your vehicle will be free to roll — even if your
shift lever is in PARK (P) — if your transfer case
is in NEUTRAL. So, be sure the transfer case is
in a drive gear — not in NEUTRAL. See
3. Turn the ignition key to LOCK.
4. Remove the key and take it with you. You know
your vehicle is in PARK (P) if the key can be
removed from the ignition.
shift lever fully in PARK (P) with the parking
brake firmly set. If you are pulling a trailer, see
2-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Then, see if you can move the shift lever away from
PARK (P) without first pressing the button on the console
shift lever. If you can, it means that the shift lever was not
fully locked into PARK (P).
Leaving Your Vehicle With the
Engine Running
Torque Lock
{CAUTION:
If you are parking on a hill and you do not shift your
transmission into PARK (P) properly, the weight of the
vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl in the
transmission. You may find it difficult to pull the shift lever
out of PARK (P). This is called “torque lock.” To prevent
torque lock, set the parking brake and then shift into
PARK (P) properly before you leave the driver’s seat. To
It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle with
the engine running. Your vehicle could move
suddenly if the shift lever is not fully in
PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set.
If you have four-wheel drive, your vehicle will be
free to roll – even if your lever is in PARK (P) – if
your transfer case is in NEUTRAL. So be sure
the transfer case is in a drive gear – not
When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out of
PARK (P) before you release the parking brake.
If torque lock does occur, you may need to have another
vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of the
pressure from the parking pawl in the transmission, so
you can pull the shift lever out of PARK (P).
And, if you leave the vehicle with the engine
running, it could overheat and even catch fire.
You or others could be injured. Do not leave
your vehicle with the engine running unless you
have to.
Shifting Out of Park (P)
Your vehicle has an automatic transmission shift lock
control system. You have to fully apply the regular
brakes first and then press the shift lever button before
you can shift from PARK (P) when the ignition is in
page 2-24.
If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine running,
be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P) and your parking
brake is firmly set before you leave it. After you have
moved the shift lever into PARK (P), hold the regular
brake pedal down.
2-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Parking Over Things That Burn
Engine Exhaust
{CAUTION:
Engine exhaust can kill. It contains the gas
carbon monoxide (CO), which you cannot see or
smell. It can cause unconsciousness and death.
You might have exhaust coming in if:
• Your exhaust system sounds strange or
different.
• Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.
• Your vehicle was damaged in a collision.
• Your vehicle was damaged when driving
over high points on the road or over road
debris.
• Repairs were not done correctly.
• Your vehicle or exhaust system had been
modified improperly.
{CAUTION:
If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into your
vehicle:
Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust
parts under your vehicle and ignite. Do not
park over papers, leaves, dry grass, or other
things that can burn.
• Drive it only with all the windows down to
blow out any CO; and
• Have your vehicle fixed immediately.
2-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Running the Engine While Parked
It is better not to park with the engine running. But if you
ever have to, here are some things to know.
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if
the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
Do not leave your vehicle when the engine is
running unless you have to. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly.
You or others could be injured. To be sure your
vehicle will not move, even when you are on
fairly level ground, always set your parking
brake and move the shift lever to PARK (P).
{CAUTION:
Idling the engine with the climate control
system off could allow dangerous exhaust into
your vehicle. See the earlier caution under
Also, idling in a closed-in place can let deadly
carbon monoxide (CO) into your vehicle even if
the climate control fan is at the highest setting.
One place this can happen is a garage.
Exhaust — with CO — can come in easily.
NEVER park in a garage with the engine
running.
Another closed-in place can be a blizzard. See
2-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Mirrors
{CAUTION:
Manual Rearview Mirror
If your vehicle has four-wheel drive, it will
be free to roll — even if the shift lever is in
PARK (P) — if the transfer case is in NEUTRAL.
So be sure the transfer case is in a drive
gear — not in NEUTRAL. See Four-Wheel
Your vehicle may have this feature. While sitting in a
comfortable driving position, adjust the rearview
mirror so you can see clearly behind your vehicle. Grip
the mirror in the center to move it up or down and
side to side. The day/night control, located at the bottom
of the mirror, adjusts the mirror to reduce headlamp
glare from behind during evening or dark conditions.
Turn the control clockwise for night use; return it to the
center for daytime use.
Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle will not
page 4-56.
Manual Rearview Mirror with
OnStar®
Your vehicle may have a rearview mirror with the
OnStar® system.
Control buttons for the OnStar® system are at the
bottom of the mirror. See your GM dealer for more
information on the OnStar® system and how to
page 2-49 for more information about the services
OnStar® provides.
2-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Mirror Operation
Mirror Operation
While sitting in a comfortable driving position, adjust the
rearview mirror so you can see clearly behind your
vehicle. Grip it in the center to move it up or down and
side to side. The day/night control, located at the
bottom of the mirror, adjusts the mirror to reduce
headlamp glare from behind during evening or dark
conditions. Move the control to the right for night
conditions. Return it to the center for daytime use.
While sitting in a comfortable position, adjust the rearview
mirror so you can see clearly behind your vehicle. Grip it
in the center and move it up or down and side to side.
The day/night control, located at the bottom of the mirror,
adjusts the mirror to reduce headlamp glare from behind
during evening or dark conditions.
Temperature and Compass Display
O(On/Off): Press this button to turn the compass and
temperature display on or off. The compass display,
can show a maximum of two characters. For example,
NE is displayed for north-east.
Manual Rearview Mirror with
OnStar®, Compass, and
Temperature Display
Your vehicle may have a manual rearview mirror with
OnStar®, compass and temperature display located
in the upper right corner.
Control buttons for the OnStar® system are at the
bottom of the mirror. See your GM dealer for more
information about the OnStar® system. Also, see
about the services OnStar® provides.
When the ignition and the compass/temperature
feature are on, character boxes will appear for about
two seconds. After two seconds, the mirror will display
the direction the vehicle is facing and the outside
temperature.
To set the temperature in Fahrenheit or Celsius, do the
following:
1. Press and hold the on/off button until either a
flashing F or C appears.
When cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel or similar
material dampened with glass cleaner. Do not spray
glass cleaner directly on the mirror as that may cause
the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing.
2. Press the button again to change the display to
the desired unit of measurement. After about
four seconds of inactivity, the new unit will be locked
in and the compass/temperature display will return.
2-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To adjust for compass variance do the following:
Compass Calibration
1. Find the current location and variance zone number
on the following zone map.
When on, the compass automatically calibrates as the
vehicle is driven. If, after two seconds, the display
does not show a compass direction, N for North, for
example, there may be a strong magnetic field
interfering with the compass. Such interference may be
caused by a magnetic antenna mount, magnetic
note pad holder, or a similar magnetic item. If the
letter C should ever appear in the compass window, the
compass may need calibration.
Press and hold the on/off button for nine seconds to
activate the compass calibration mode. CAL will
be displayed in the compass window on the mirror.
The mirror can be calibrated by driving the vehicle in
circles at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less until the display shows
a direction.
Compass Variance
Compass variance is the difference between earth’s
magnetic north and true geographic north. The mirror is
set to zone eight upon leaving the factory. It will be
necessary to adjust the compass to compensate
for compass variance if you live outside zone eight.
Under certain conditions, such as during a long-distance,
cross-country trip, it will be necessary to adjust for
compass variance. If not adjusted to account for
compass variance, the compass could give false
readings.
2. Press and hold the on/off button until a zone
number appears in the display.
3. Once a zone number appears in the display, press
the on/off button quickly until the correct zone
number appears in the display. If C appears in
the compass window, the compass may need
calibration. See “Compass Calibration” explained
previously.
2-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Compass Operation
Press the on/off button once to turn the compass
on or off.
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
with OnStar® and Compass
Your vehicle may have an automatic-dimming rearview
mirror with a compass and the OnStar® system.
There is a compass display in the window in the upper
right corner of the mirror face. The compass displays
a maximum of two characters. For example, “NE”
is displayed for north-east.
There are three additional buttons for the OnStar®
system. See your dealer for more information on the
services OnStar® provides.
Compass Calibration
Press and hold the on/off button down for nine seconds
to activate the compass calibration mode. CAL will
be displayed in the compass window on the mirror.
Mirror Operation
When turned on, this mirror automatically dims to the
proper level to minimize glare from any headlamps
behind you after dark.
The compass can be calibrated by driving the vehicle in
circles at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less until the display
reads a direction.
O(On/Off): This is the on/off button for the automatic
dimming feature and compass. Press the far left
button, located below the mirror face, for up to
three seconds to turn the feature on and off. A light on
the mirror will be lit while the feature is turned on.
Compass Variance
Compass variance is the difference between earth’s
magnetic north and true geographic north. The mirror is
set to zone eight upon leaving the factory. It will be
necessary to adjust the compass to compensate for
compass variance if you live outside zone eight. Under
certain circumstances, such as during a long distance
cross-country trip, it will be necessary to adjust for
compass variance. If not adjusted to account for compass
variance, your compass could give false readings.
2-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To adjust for compass variance, do the following:
1. Find your current location and variance zone
number on the map.
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
with OnStar®, Compass and
Temperature Display
Your vehicle may have this feature. When on, an
automatic dimming mirror automatically dims to the
proper level to minimize glare from lights behind
you after dark.
The mirror also includes a dual display in the upper
right corner of the mirror face. The compass reading and
the outside temperature will both appear in the display
at the same time.
P(On/Off): This is the on/off button.
2. Press and hold the on/off button for six seconds.
Release the button when ZONE is displayed. The
number shown is the current zone number.
3. Scroll through the zone numbers that appear in the
compass/temperature window on the mirror by
pressing the on/off button. Once you find your
zone number, release the button. After about
four seconds, the mirror will return to the compass
display, and the new zone number will be set.
2-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Temperature and Compass Display
Automatic Dimming Mirror Operation
Press the on/off button, located to the far left, briefly to
turn the compass/temperature display on or off.
The automatic dimming mirror function is turned
on automatically each time the ignition is started. To
operate the automatic dimming mirror, do the following:
If the display reads CAL, you will need to calibrate the
compass. For more information on calibration,
see below.
1. Make sure the green indicator light, located to the left
of the on/off button, is lit. If it’s not, press and hold the
on/off button for approximately six seconds until the
green light comes on, indicating that the mirror is in
automatic dimming mode.
To adjust between Fahrenheit and Celsius do the
following:
1. Press and hold the on/off button for approximately
four seconds until either a flashing F or C appears.
2. Turn off the automatic dimming mirror function by
pressing and holding the on/off button for
approximately six seconds, until the green indicator
light turns off.
2. Press the button again to change the display to the
desired unit of measurement. After approximately
four seconds of inactivity, the new unit will be locked
in and the compass/temperature display will return.
Compass Variance
If an abnormal temperature reading is displayed for an
extended period of time, please consult your dealer.
Under certain circumstances, a delay in updating
the temperature is normal.
The mirror is set in zone eight upon leaving the factory. It
will be necessary to adjust the compass to compensate
for compass variance if you live outside of zone eight.
Under certain circumstances, as during a long distance
cross-country trip, it will be necessary to adjust for
compass variance. Compass variance is the difference
between earth’s magnetic north and true geographic
north. If not adjusted to account for compass variance,
your compass could give false readings.
2-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To adjust for compass variance do the following:
1. Find your current location and variance zone
number on the following zone map.
Compass Calibration
The compass may need calibration if one of the
following occurs:
• After approximately five seconds, the display does
not show a compass heading (N for North, for
example), there may be a strong magnetic field
interfering with the compass. Such interference may
be caused by a magnetic antenna mount, magnetic
note pad holder or a similar magnetic item.
• The compass does not display the correct heading
and the compass zone variance is set correctly.
In order to calibrate, CAL must be displayed in the
mirror compass windows. If CAL is not displayed, push
the on/off button for approximately 12 seconds or
until CAL is displayed.
The compass can be calibrated by driving the vehicle in
circles at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less until the display
reads a direction.
2. Press and hold the on/off button until a Z and a
zone number appear in the display. The compass
is now in zone mode.
3. Keep pressing the on/off button until the desired
zone number appears in the display. Release the
button. After approximately four seconds of
inactivity, the new zone number will be locked in
and the compass/temperature display will return.
4. Calibrate the compass as described below.
Passenger Airbag Indicator
The vehicle may be equipped with a passenger airbag
indicator, on the mirror glass, just above the buttons.
If the vehicle has this feature, the mirror will display the
word ON, or an airbag symbol in Canada, when the
passenger airbag is enabled. For more information, see
2-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cleaning the Mirror
Compass Operation
When cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel or similar
material dampened with glass cleaner. Do not spray
glass cleaner directly on the mirror as that may cause
the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing.
Press the on/off button once to turn the compass
on or off.
There is a compass display in the window in the upper
right corner of the mirror face. The compass displays
a maximum of two characters. For example, “NE”
is displayed for north-east.
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
with Compass
Compass Calibration
Your vehicle may have an automatic-dimming rearview
mirror with a compass.
Press and hold the on/off button down for nine seconds
to activate the compass calibration mode. CAL will
be displayed in the compass window on the mirror.
Mirror Operation
When turned on, this mirror automatically dims to the
proper level to minimize glare from any headlamps
behind you after dark.
The compass can be calibrated by driving the vehicle in
circles at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less until the display
reads a direction.
Compass Variance
O(On/Off): This is the on/off button for the automatic
dimming feature and compass. Press the far left button,
located below the mirror face, for up to three seconds
to turn the feature on and off. A light on the mirror will be
lit while the feature is turned on.
Compass variance is the difference between earth’s
magnetic north and true geographic north. The mirror is
set to zone eight upon leaving the factory. It will be
necessary to adjust the compass to compensate for
compass variance if you live outside zone eight. Under
certain circumstances, such as during a long distance
cross-country trip, it will be necessary to adjust for
compass variance. If not adjusted to account for compass
variance, your compass could give false readings.
2-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To adjust for compass variance, do the following:
1. Find your current location and variance zone
number on the map.
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
with Compass and Temperature
Display
If the vehicle is equipped with an automatic mirror, it
will, when on, automatically dim to the proper level
to minimize glare from lights behind you after dark.
The mirror also includes a display in the upper
right corner of the mirror face. The compass reading
and the outside temperature will both appear in
the display at the same time. The dual display can be
turned on or off by briefly pressing either the TEMP
or the COMP button.
2. Press and hold the on/off button for six seconds.
Release the button when ZONE is displayed. The
number shown is the current zone number.
3. Scroll through the zone numbers that appear in the
compass/temperature window on the mirror by
pressing the on/off button. Once you find your
zone number, release the button. After about
four seconds, the mirror will return to the compass
display, and the new zone number will be set.
2-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Temperature Display
Compass Operation
The temperature can be displayed by pressing the
TEMP button. Pressing the TEMP button once briefly,
will toggle the temperature reading on and off. To
alternate the temperature reading between Fahrenheit
and Celsius, press and hold the TEMP button for
approximately four seconds until the display blinks
F and C. Press and release the TEMP button to toggle
between the Fahrenheit and Celsius readings. After
approximately four seconds of inactivity, the display will
stop blinking and display the last selection made.
Press the COMP button once briefly to turn the compass
on or off.
When the ignition and the compass feature are on, the
compass will show two character boxes for approximately
two seconds. After two seconds, the mirror will display
the compass heading.
Compass Calibration
The compass may need calibration if one of the
following occurs:
If an abnormal reading is displayed, for an extended
period of time, please consult your dealer. Under certain
circumstances, a delay in updating the temperature is
normal.
• If CAL is displayed while driving in the vehicle.
• After approximately five seconds, the display does
not show a compass heading (N for North, for
example), there may be a strong magnetic field
interfering with the compass. Such interference may
be caused by a magnetic antenna mount, magnetic
note pad holder or a similar magnetic item.
Automatic Dimming Mirror Operation
The time period you need to press and hold the TEMP
button to turn the automatic dimming feature on or off is
approximately eight seconds. The indicator light to the left
of the TEMP button will still turn on or off to show you
when the automatic dimming feature is activated. Once
the mirror is turned off, it will remain off until it is turned
back on, or until the vehicle is restarted.
• The compass does not display the correct heading
and the compass zone variance is set correctly.
2-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In order to calibrate, CAL must be displayed in the
mirror compass windows. If CAL is not displayed, push
in the COMP button for approximately eight seconds
or until CAL is displayed.
To adjust for compass variance:
1. Find your current location and variance zone
number on the following zone map.
2. Press and hold the COMP button for five seconds
until a zone number appears in the display.
The compass can be calibrated by driving the vehicle in
circles at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less until the display
reads a direction.
Compass Variance
The mirror is set in zone eight upon leaving the factory.
It will be necessary to adjust the compass to
compensate for compass variance if you live outside
zone eight. Under certain circumstances, as during
a long distance cross-country trip, it will be necessary to
adjust for compass variance. Compass variance is
the difference between earth’s magnetic north and true
geographic north. If not adjusted to account for
compass variance, your compass could give
false readings.
3. Press the COMP button on the bottom of the mirror
until the new zone number appears in the display.
After you stop pressing the button, the display
will show a compass direction within a few seconds.
2-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Passenger Airbag Indicator
Outside Power Mirrors
The mirror may be equipped with a passenger airbag
indicator on the mirror glass, just above the buttons.
If the vehicle has this feature the mirror will display the
word ON, or an airbag symbol in Canada, when the
passenger airbag is enabled. For more information see
Passenger Sensing System on page 1-67
Your vehicle may have this feature. The power mirror
control is located on the driver’s door.
Turn the knob counterclockwise or clockwise to adjust
the driver’s or passenger’s mirror so that you can see a
little of the side of your vehicle. After adjusting the
position of the mirrors, turn the knob to the center
position so that the mirrors cannot move.
Cleaning the Mirror
If the travel position in any direction of the mirror is
reached, it will enter a ratcheting mode. This action is
harmless. It is a warning that the mirror can go no
further. To stop this action, back the mirror up by moving
the knob in the opposite direction.
When cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel or similar
material dampened with glass cleaner. Do not spray
glass cleaner directly on the mirror as that may cause
the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing.
The mirrors can be manually folded inward to prevent
damage when going through an automatic car wash. To
fold, push the mirror toward the vehicle. To return the
mirror to its original position, push outward. Be sure
to return both mirrors to their original unfolded position
before driving.
Outside Manual Mirrors
If the vehicle has the manual outside mirrors, adjust
each outside mirror so that a little of the vehicle and the
area behind it can be seen while sitting in a comfortable,
driving position.
Both mirrors can be manually folded inward by pulling
them towards the vehicle. Push the mirrors away
from the vehicle, to the normal position, before driving.
2-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Outside Curb View Assist Mirror
Outside Convex Mirror
If the vehicle has this feature, the passenger’s outside
mirror will adjust to a preset tilt position while the vehicle
is in REVERSE (R) gear. Curb view assist may be
useful when you are parallel parking. The mirror
will return to normal position when the vehicle is shifted
out of REVERSE (R) gear. Automatic mirror movement
in either direction will follow a short delay.
{CAUTION:
A convex mirror can make things (like other
vehicles) look farther away than they really are.
If you cut too sharply into the right or left lane,
you could hit a vehicle. Check your inside
mirror or glance over your shoulder before
changing lanes.
You may be able to turn this feature on or off through
the Driver Information Center (DIC). See DIC Vehicle
The passenger’s outside mirror is convex. A convex
mirror’s surface is curved so more can be seen from the
driver’s seat.
Outside Heated Mirrors
Your vehicle may have this feature. When you operate
the rear window defogger, the defogger also warms
the heated driver’s and passenger’s outside rearview
mirrors to help clear them of ice, snow and
condensation.
2-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OnStar® Services
OnStar® System
For new vehicles equipped with OnStar®, the Safe &
Sound Plan is included for one year from the date
of purchase. You can extend this plan beyond the first
year, or upgrade to the Directions & Connections Plan to
meet your needs. For more information, press the
OnStar® button to speak with an advisor.
Safe & Sound Plan
OnStar® uses several innovative technologies and live
advisors to provide you with a wide range of safety,
security, information, and convenience services. If your
airbags deploy, the system is designed to make an
automatic call to OnStar® Emergency where we can
request emergency services be sent to your location. If
you lock your keys in the car, call OnStar® at
1-888-4-ONSTAR and they can send a signal to unlock
your doors. If you need roadside assistance, press the
OnStar® button and they can contact Roadside Service
for you.
• Advanced Automatic Crash Notification
• Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment
• Emergency Services
• Roadside Assistance
• Stolen Vehicle Tracking
• AccidentAssist
• Remote Door Unlock/Vehicle Alert
• OnStar® Vehicle Diagnostics
• OnStar® Hands-Free Calling
• OnStar® Virtual Advisor
A complete OnStar® Owner’s Guide and the Terms and
Conditions of the OnStar® Subscription Service
Agreement are included in the vehicle’s OnStar®
Subscriber Information packet located in your vehicle. For
more information, visit www.onstar.com or
www.onstar.ca, contact OnStar® at 1-888-4-ONSTAR
(1-888-466-7827), or press the OnStar® button to speak
with an OnStar® advisor 24 hours a day, 7 days a week.
2-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Directions & Connections® Plan
• All Safe & Sound Plan Services
• Driving Directions
OnStar® Virtual Advisor
Your vehicle may have Virtual Advisor. It is a feature of
OnStar® Hands-Free Calling that uses your minutes
to access weather, local traffic reports, and stock quotes.
By pressing the phone button and giving a few simple
voice commands, you can browse through the
various topics. Customize your information profile at
www.myonstar.com. See the OnStar® Owner’s Guide for
more information.
• RideAssist
• Information and Convenience Services
OnStar® Hands-Free Calling
OnStar® Hands-Free Calling allows OnStar® subscribers
to make and receive calls using voice commands at
the touch of a button. Hands-Free Calling is fully
integrated into the vehicle, and may be used with
Pre-Paid Packages or linked to a cell phone through
OnStar® Shared Minutes Plan. To find out more, refer to
the OnStar® Owner’s Guide in the vehicle’s glove
box, visit www.onstar.com or www.onstar.ca, or speak
with an OnStar® advisor by pressing the OnStar® button
or calling 1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827).
OnStar® Steering Wheel Controls
Your vehicle may be
equipped with a Talk/Mute
button that can be used
to interact with OnStar®.
Controls on page 3-139
for more information.
When calling into voice-mail systems, or to dial directory
numbers, press this button once, wait for the response,
say the number(s) to be dialed, wait for the number(s)
to be repeated and then say “dial”. See the OnStar®
User’s Guide for more information.
2-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If your vehicle has the Universal Home Remote
Transmitter, it complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
Universal Home Remote
System
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes and modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization
to use this equipment.
The Universal Home Remote System, a combined
universal transmitter and receiver, provides a way to
replace up to three hand-held transmitters used to
activate devices such as gate operators, garage door
openers, entry door locks, security systems, and
home lighting.
2-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keep the original hand-held transmitter for use in other
vehicles as well as for future Universal Home Remote
programming. It is also recommended that upon the sale
of the vehicle, the programmed Universal Home
Remote buttons should be erased for security purposes.
See “Erasing Universal Home Remote Buttons” later
in this section or, for assistance, see Customer
Universal Home Remote System
Operation
Do not use the Universal Home Remote with any
garage door opener that does not have the stop and
reverse feature. This includes any garage door opener
model manufactured before April 1, 1982. If you
have a newer garage door opener with rolling codes,
please be sure to follow Steps 6 through 8 to complete
the programming of your Universal Home Remote
Transmitter.
Be sure that people and objects are clear of the garage
door or gate operator you are programming. When
programming a garage door, it is advised to park outside
of the garage.
Read the instructions completely before attempting to
program the Universal Home Remote. Because of
the steps involved, it may be helpful to have another
person available to assist you in the programming steps.
It is recommended that a new battery be installed in
your hand-held transmitter for quicker and more
accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal.
2-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. The indicator light will flash slowly at first and then
rapidly after Universal Home Remote successfully
receives the frequency signal from the hand-held
transmitter. Release both buttons.
Programming Universal Home Remote
Follow these steps to program up to three channels:
1. Press and hold down the two outside Universal
Home Remote buttons, releasing only when the
Universal Home Remote indicator light begins
to flash, after 20 seconds. Do not hold down the
buttons for longer than 30 seconds and do not
repeat this step to program a second and/or third
hand-held transmitter to the remaining two Universal
Home Remote buttons.
5. Press and hold the newly-trained Universal Home
Remote button and observe the indicator light.
If the indicator light stays on constantly,
programming is complete and your device should
activate when the Universal Home Remote button is
pressed and released.
To program the remaining two Universal Home
Remote buttons, begin with Step 2 under
“Programming Universal Home Remote.” Do not
repeat Step 1 as this will erase all of the
programmed channels.
2. Position the end of your hand-held transmitter
about 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the
Universal Home Remote buttons while keeping the
indicator light in view.
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the desired
Universal Home Remote button and the hand-held
transmitter button. Do not release the buttons
until Step 4 has been completed.
If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds
and then turns to a constant light, continue with
Steps 6 through 8 following to complete the
programming of a rolling-code equipped device,
most commonly, a garage door opener.
Some entry gates and garage door openers may
require you to substitute Step 3 with the procedure
noted in “Gate Operator and Canadian
6. Locate in the garage, the garage door opener
receiver (motor-head unit). Locate the “Learn”
or “Smart” button. This can usually be found where
the hanging antenna wire is attached to the
motor-head unit.
Programming” later in this section.
2-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Firmly press and release the “Learn” or “Smart”
button. The name and color of the button may
vary by manufacturer.
Gate Operator and Canadian
Programming
Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter
signals to time out or quit after several seconds of
transmission. This may not be long enough for Universal
Home Remote to pick up the signal during programming.
Similarly, some U.S. gate operators are manufactured
to time out in the same manner.
You will have 30 seconds to start Step 8.
8. Return to the vehicle. Firmly press and hold the
programmed Universal Home Remote button for
two seconds, then release. Repeat the
press/hold/release sequence a second time, and
depending on the brand of the garage door opener,
or other rolling code device, repeat this sequence
a third time to complete the programming.
If you live in Canada, or you are having difficulty
programming a gate operator or garage door opener by
using the “Programming Universal Home Remote”
procedures, regardless of where you live, replace
Step 3 under “Programming Universal Home Remote”
with the following:
The Universal Home Remote should now activate
your rolling-code equipped device.
To program the remaining two Universal Home Remote
buttons, begin with Step 2 of “Programming Universal
Home Remote.” You do not want to repeat Step 1,
as this will erase all previous programming from
the Universal Home Remote buttons.
Continue to press and hold the Universal Home Remote
button while you press and release every two seconds
(cycle) the hand-held transmitter button until the
frequency signal has been successfully accepted by the
Universal Home Remote. The Universal Home Remote
indicator light will flash slowly at first and then rapidly.
Proceed with Step 4 under “Programming Universal
Home Remote” to complete.
2-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Universal Home Remote
Press and hold the appropriate Universal Home Remote
button for at least half of a second. The indicator light
will come on while the signal is being transmitted.
Reprogramming a Single Universal
Home Remote Button
To program a device to Universal Home Remote using
a Universal Home Remote button previously trained,
follow these steps:
Erasing Universal Home
Remote Buttons
1. Press and hold the desired Universal Home
Remote button. Do not release the button.
To erase programming from the three Universal Home
Remote buttons do the following:
2. The indicator light will begin to flash after
20 seconds. While still holding the Universal Home
Remote button, proceed with Step 2 under
“Programming Universal Home Remote” shown
earlier in this section.
1. Press and hold down the two outside buttons until
the indicator light begins to flash, after 20 seconds.
Do not hold the two outside buttons for longer
than 30 seconds.
For additional information on Universal Home Remote,
2. Release both buttons.
The Universal Home Remote is now in the training
(learning) mode and can be programmed at any time
beginning with Step 2 under “Programming Universal
Home Remote” shown earlier in this section.
Individual buttons cannot be erased, but they can be
reprogrammed. See “Reprogramming a Single Universal
Home Remote Button” following this section.
2-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Center Console Storage Area
If equipped, squeeze the front lever while lifting the top
to open it.
Storage Areas
Glove Box
Open the glove box by pulling up on the handle.
Your vehicle’s console will be equipped with cupholders
located on the front and rear of the storage compartment.
The console may also contain one or more of the
following components:
Overhead Console
Your vehicle may have this feature. The overhead
console may include reading lamps, a Universal Home
page 2-51 for more information.
• Rear Seat Audio Controls
• Rear Seat Accessory Power Outlets
• Rear Climate Control
If your vehicle has the center armrest compartment, lift
the cover by pulling up on the latch handle located
underneath the front edge of the armrest.
If your vehicle has a third row seat, and has a power
operated rear quarter glass, the switches for operating
the rear quarter glass are also located in the overhead
console. These switches allow the driver to open
and close each third row seat window separately. See
more information.
2-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To slide the crossrails to where you want them, pull up
on the lever on each side of the crossrail. This will
release the crossrail and allow you to slide it. When the
crossrail is where you want it, press down on the
levers to lock it into place.
Luggage Carrier
{CAUTION:
Notice: Loading cargo on the luggage carrier that
weighs more than 220 lbs (100 kg) or hangs over the
rear or sides of the vehicle may damage your
vehicle. Load cargo so that it rests on the slats as
far forward as possible and against the side
rails, making sure to fasten it securely.
If you try to carry something on top of your
vehicle that is longer or wider than the luggage
carrier — like paneling, plywood, a mattress
and so forth — the wind can catch it as you
drive along. This can cause you to lose
control. What you are carrying could be
violently torn off, and this could cause you or
other drivers to have a collision, and of course
damage your vehicle. You may be able to carry
something like this inside. But, never carry
something longer or wider than the luggage
carrier on top of your vehicle.
Don’t exceed the maximum vehicle capacity when
loading your vehicle. For more information on vehicle
page 4-45.
To prevent damage or loss of cargo as you are driving,
check now and then to make sure the luggage carrier
is locked and cargo is still securely fastened.
When the luggage carrier is not in use, place the
crossrails at the following positions for wind noise
reduction. Place one crossrail at the rear most point of
the vehicle and the other crossrail above the opening
of the rear door.
A luggage carrier, if equipped, allows you to load things
on top of your vehicle. The luggage carrier has side rails
attached to the roof, sliding crossrails, if equipped, and
places to use for tying things down. These let you load
some other things on top of your vehicle, as long as they
are not wider or longer than the luggage carrier.
2-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rear Compartment Storage
Panel/Cover
{CAUTION:
If you were to carry things on the adjustable
panel when it is in the upper (cargo cover)
position, during a sudden vehicle movement or
a crash, those things could be thrown around in
the vehicle. You or others could be injured.
When it is in the upper position, always secure
any cargo on the floor beneath the panel/cover.
Upper Position
Your vehicle may have this feature. This upper panel
position can be used as a cargo shade. Insert the front
corners of the panel into the top guides and slide
the panel forward. Press down on the back of the panel
to lock it in place.
2-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lower Position
Vertical Position
The panel can be stored in the lower position with either
side up. Insert the front corners of the panel into the
lower guides and slide the panel forward. Press down on
the back of the panel to lock it in place.
Plastic grocery bags can be attached to the hooks on
the panel. Insert the front corners of the panel into
the vertical guides behind the seatbacks and slide the
panel down.
Notice: Loading objects that weigh over
200 lbs (90 kg) onto the panel may cause damage.
Repairs would not be covered by your warranty. Do
not load heavy objects on the panel.
Notice: If you use the panel as a barrier for large
objects in the cargo area while the seatbacks
are folded down, the panel may be damaged. Do not
use the panel as a barrier between large objects
in the rear cargo area and the seating area.
2-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rear Floor Storage Lid
Convenience Net
Your vehicle may have this feature. A convenience net
in the rear of your vehicle helps keep small items in
place during sharp turns or quick stops and starts. The
net is not designed to retain these items during
off-road use. The net is not for larger, heavier items.
{CAUTION:
If any removable convenience item is not
secured properly, it can move around in a
collision or sudden stop. People in the vehicle
could be injured. Be sure to secure any such
item properly.
To use the convenience net, do the following:
1. Attach the upper loops to the retainers on both
sides of the liftgate opening. The label should be
in the upper passenger’s side corner, visible
from the rear of the vehicle.
2. Attach the lower hooks to the rear cargo tie downs
on the floor.
Your vehicle has a rear cargo area with a removable
storage lid.
To remove the rear floor storage lid, do the following:
1. Press the latch release and lift up the latch handle.
2. Raise the lid slightly to unhook it.
3. Pull the lid toward you to release it from the forward
mounting tabs.
To reinstall the rear floor storage lid, reverse the
previous steps. Make sure the lid is secure by applying
slight pressure to the latch until you hear it click.
2-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cargo Cover
If your vehicle has a cargo cover, you can use it to
cover items in the cargo area of your vehicle.
{CAUTION:
An improperly stored cargo cover could be
thrown about the vehicle during a collision or
sudden maneuver. You or others could be
injured. If you remove the cover, always store
it in the proper storage location. When you put
it back, always be sure that it is securely
reattached.
To install the cargo cover, do the following:
1. Align the endcap with the pocket in the trim panel
located behind the rear seat.
2. Squeeze the opposite endcap, align it with the
pocket located on the opposite side of the trim
panel and release.
3. Grasp the handle and unroll the cover. Latch the
posts into the sockets on the inside of the vehicle
to secure it.
Cargo Tie Downs
To remove the cargo cover, do the following:
1. Release the cover from the latch posts and carefully
roll it back up.
There may be cargo tie
downs in the rear of your
vehicle that allow you
to strap cargo in and keep
it from moving.
2. Squeeze one endcap and remove it from the
pocket in the trim panel.
3. Remove the cargo cover from the other endcap so
that you can remove the shade from the vehicle.
2-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sunroof
Vehicle Personalization
In addition to the following features, your vehicle may
also have features that can be programmed through the
Driver Information Center (DIC). See DIC Vehicle
The vehicle may be equipped with a power sliding
sunroof. To open or close the sunroof, the ignition must
be on or accessory, or Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
page 2-20.
Memory Seat
Press and release the
back of the control in the
overhead console to
open the sunroof. Press
the front of the control
to close the sunroof.
If your vehicle has this
feature, the controls for the
memory function are
located on the driver’s door.
Once the sunroof is closed, press the forward side of
the control to open the sunroof to the vent position.
These buttons are used to program and recall memory
settings for the driver’s seating position, both outside
mirror positions, and the adjustable pedals, if equipped.
The settings for these features can be saved for up
to two drivers.
The sunroof has a sunshade which can be pulled
forward to block sun rays. If it is in the closed position, it
will open when the sunroof is opened.
2-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To store the memory settings, do the following:
• If programmed to do so through the Driver
Information Center (DIC), pressing the unlock button
on the remote keyless entry transmitter will recall
the preset driver’s memory seat, mirrors, and
adjustable pedals position. The numbers on the
back of the transmitters, 1 or 2, correspond to the
numbers on the memory controls.
1. Adjust the driver’s seat, including the seatback
recliner and lumbar, both of the outside mirrors,
and the adjustable pedals, if equipped, to the
desired position.
page 2-22 for more information.
• If programmed to do so through the DIC, placing
the key in the ignition will recall the driver’s
memory seat, mirrors, and adjustable pedals
positions.
2. Press and hold the 1 or 2 button of the memory
control for three seconds. A double chime will
sound to let you know that the position has
been stored.
page 3-60 for more information.
To repeat the procedure for a second driver, follow the
preceding steps, but press the other numbered
memory control button.
To stop recall movement of the memory seat feature at
any time, press one of the memory buttons or power
seat controls.
To recall the memory settings, do one of the following:
• Press and release button 1 or 2 while the vehicle
is in PARK (P). A single chime will sound and
the memory position will be recalled.
2-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To repeat the procedure for a second driver, follow the
preceding steps, but press the other numbered
memory control button.
Easy Exit Seat
The control for the easy exit seat function is located on
the driver’s door below the memory buttons 1 and 2.
The easy exit seat button is used to program and recall
the desired driver’s seat position when exiting or
entering the vehicle. The mirrors, power lumbar, recline,
and adjustable pedals, if equipped, positions will not
be stored or recalled when using the easy exit seat
function. The seat position can be saved for up to
two drivers.
To recall the easy exit seat position, do one of the
following:
• Press the easy exit seat button on the memory
control while the vehicle is in PARK (P). The
seat will move to the stored exit position.
• Or, if the easy exit seat feature is activated in the
Driver Information Center (DIC), removing the key
from the ignition will move the seat to the exit
position. See “Easy Exit Seat” under DIC Vehicle
activating this feature in the DIC.
To store the easy exit seat position, do the following:
1. Press and release the 1 or 2 button of the memory
control for less than three seconds. The seat will
move to the stored memory position.
2. Adjust the seat to the desired exit position.
If an easy exit seat position has not been stored, the
default position is all the way rearward.
3. Press and hold the easy exit seat button for more
than three seconds. A double chime will sound to
let you know that the position has been stored
for the selected button 1 or 2.
2-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 3
Instrument Panel
3-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
3-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The main components of your instrument panel are the following:
Brightness Control. See Instrument Panel Brightness
on page 3-17. Fog Lamp Button (If Equipped).
K. Driver Information Center (DIC) Steering Wheel
Controls. See Driver Information Center (DIC)
on page 3-50.
L. Transfer Case Controls. See “Automatic Transfer
M. Shift Lever and StabiliTrak® (If Equipped) Button.
page 3-20.
D. OnStar and Audio Steering Wheel Controls. See
Q. Rear Window Washer/Wiper. See “Rear Window
page 3-10.
R. Rear Window Defogger. See “Rear Window
3-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hazard Warning Flashers
Horn
The hazard warning flashers warn others. They also let
police know you have a problem. Your front and rear
turn signal lamps will flash on and off.
To sound the horn, press the horn symbols on the
steering wheel pad.
Tilt Wheel
The hazard warning
flasher button is located
on top of the steering
column.
You should adjust the
steering wheel before you
drive. The tilt lever is
located to the left of the
steering column, under the
turn signal lever.
The hazard warning flashers work no matter what
ignition position the key is in, and even if the key is not
in the ignition.
Press the button to make the front and rear turn signal
lamps flash on and off. Press the button again to
turn the flashers off.
You can raise it to the highest level to give your legs
more room when you enter and exit the vehicle.
When the hazard warning flashers are on, your turn
signals will not work.
To tilt the wheel, hold the steering wheel and pull the
lever toward you. Move the steering wheel to a
comfortable level, then release the lever to lock the
wheel in place.
Other Warning Devices
If you carry reflective triangles, you can set them up at
the side of the road about 300 feet (100 m) behind
your vehicle.
3-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
Turn and Lane-Change Signals
The turn signal has two upward (for right) and
two downward (for left) positions. These positions
allow you to signal a turn or a lane change.
To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up
or down. When the turn is finished, the lever will
return automatically.
An arrow on the instrument
panel cluster will flash in
the direction of the
turn or lane change.
The lever on the left side of the steering column
includes the following:
• G Turn and Lane Change Signals
• 2 3 Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
• Flash-to-Pass Feature
To signal a lane change, just raise or lower the lever
until the arrow starts to flash. Hold it there until you
complete your lane change. The lever will return by
itself when you release it. The bottom of the outside
rearview mirrors may also be equipped with lane
change indicators.
• N Windshield Wipers
• J Windshield Washer
• I Cruise Control
As you signal a turn or a lane change, if the arrows
flash more quickly than normal, a signal bulb may
be burned out and other drivers won’t see your
turn signal.
3-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help avoid an
accident. If the arrows don’t go on at all when you signal
a turn, check the fuse. See Fuses and Circuit Breakers
on page 5-103 and check for burned-out bulbs.
When the high beams are
on, this indicator light on
the instrument panel
cluster will also be on.
If you have a trailer towing option with added wiring for
the trailer lamps, a turn signal flasher is used. With
this flasher installed, the signal indicator will flash even
if a turn signal bulb is burned out. Check the front
and rear turn signal lamps regularly to make sure they
are working.
Flash-to-Pass
This feature lets you use your high-beam headlamps to
signal a driver in front of you that you want to pass.
It works even if your headlamps are in the automatic
position.
Turn Signal On Chime
If your turn signal is left on for more than 3/4 of a mile
(1.2 km), a chime will sound at each flash of the
turn signal. To turn off the chime, move the turn signal
lever to the off position.
To use it, pull the turn signal lever toward you, then
release it.
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
If your headlamps are in the automatic position or on
low beam, your high-beam headlamps will turn on.
They’ll stay on as long as you hold the lever toward you.
The high-beam indicator on the instrument panel
cluster will come on. Release the lever to return to
normal operation.
To change the headlamps from low to high beam,
push the lever toward the instrument panel. To return to
low-beam headlamps, pull the multifunction lever
toward you. Then release it.
3-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Windshield Wipers
Rainsense™ Wipers
Your vehicle may be equipped with
8(Mist): For a single wiping cycle, turn the band to
mist. Hold it there until the wipers start. Then let go. The
wipers will stop after one wipe. If you want more
wipes, hold the band on mist longer.
Rainsense™ windshield wipers. When active, these
wipers are able to detect moisture on the windshield and
automatically turn on the wipers.
The moisture sensor is located next to the inside
rearview mirror and is mounted on the windshield.
9(Off): To stop the wipers, move the band to off.
To turn on the Rainsense™ feature, the wipers must be
set to one of the five delay settings on the multifunction
lever. Each of the five settings adjusts the sensitivity
of the rainsensor. For more wipes, select the higher
settings; for fewer wipes, select the lower settings
located closer to off on the multifunction lever.
N(Windshield Wipers): Turn the band to control the
windshield wipers.
You can set the wiper speed for a long or short delay
between wipes. This can be very useful in light rain
or snow. Turn the band to choose the delay time. The
closer to the top of the lever, the shorter the delay.
The rainsensor will automatically control the frequency
of the wipes from off to high speed according to the
weather conditions. The wipers can be left in a
rainsense mode even when it is not raining.
For steady wiping at low speed, turn the band away from
you to the first solid band past the delay settings. For
high-speed wiping, turn the band further, to the second
solid band past the delay settings. To stop the wipers,
move the band to off.
Notice: If you do not turn off the windshield wipers
when driving through an automatic car wash, you
could damage the wipers. Always turn off the
windshield wipers before entering an automatic
car wash.
Be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper blades
before using them. If they’re frozen to the windshield,
carefully loosen or thaw them. If your blades do become
worn or damaged, get new blades or blade inserts.
3-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This control is located
to the right of the
Windshield Washer
steering wheel on the
instrument panel.
L(Windshield Washer): To spray washer fluid on
the windshield, press the windshield washer paddle. The
wipers will clear the window and then either stop or
return to your preset speed.
{CAUTION:
In freezing weather, do not use your washer
until the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the
washer fluid can form ice on the windshield,
blocking your vision.
To turn the rear wiper on, turn the control to either 1, 2,
or 3. For delayed wiping, turn the control to 1 or 2.
For steady wiping, turn the control to 3. To turn the wiper
off, turn the control to 0.
To wash the rear window, press the washer symbol
located in the center of the control.
Rear Window Wiper/Washer
The rear window washer uses the same fluid bottle as
the windshield washer. However, the rear window
washer will run out of fluid before the windshield washer.
If you can wash your windshield but not your rear
window, check the fluid level.
{CAUTION:
In freezing weather, do not use your washer
until the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the
washer fluid can form ice on the windshield,
blocking your vision.
3-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Headlamp Washer
Cruise Control
Your vehicle may be
equipped with a headlamp
washer system. The
button to operate this
feature is located on the
instrument panel and
functions separately from
your other washer
Your vehicle has
cruise control. The
controls are located
on the end of the turn
signal/multifunction lever.
systems.
To wash your headlamps, press the headlamp washer
button briefly and release to activate the system.
R(On): Move the switch to this position to turn the
cruise control system on.
S(Resume/Accelerate): Move the switch to this
position to resume a set speed or to accelerate.
T(Set): Press this button, located at the end of the
lever, to set a speed.
9(Off): This position turns the cruise control system
off and cancels memory of a set speed.
3-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
With cruise control, you can maintain a speed of about
25 mph (40 km/h) or more without keeping your foot
on the accelerator. This can really help on long
trips. Cruise control does not work at speeds below
about 25 mph (40 km/h).
{CAUTION:
If you leave your cruise control on when you
are not using cruise, you might hit a button
and go into cruise when you do not want to.
You could be startled and even lose control.
Keep the cruise control switch off until you
want to use cruise control.
If you apply your brakes, the cruise control will shut off.
{CAUTION:
Cruise control can be dangerous where you
cannot drive safely at a steady speed. So, do
not use your cruise control on winding roads
or in heavy traffic.
Setting Cruise Control
1. Move the cruise control switch to on.
2. Get up to the speed you want.
Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery
roads. On such roads, fast changes in tire
traction can cause excessive wheel slip, and
you could lose control. Do not use cruise
control on slippery roads.
3. Press the set button at the end of the lever and
release it.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal. The
accelerator pedal will not go down.
3-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Some vehicles have a
cruise light on the
instrument panel cluster
that will come on when the
cruise control is engaged.
Increasing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
There are two ways to go to a higher speed:
• Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higher
speed. Press the button at the end of the lever, then
release the button and the accelerator pedal.
You’ll now cruise at the higher speed.
• Move the cruise switch from on to
Resuming a Set Speed
resume/accelerate. Hold it there until you get up to
the speed you want, and then release the switch.
To increase your speed in very small amounts,
move the switch briefly to resume/accelerate. Each
time you do this, your vehicle will go about
1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.
Suppose you set your cruise control at a desired speed
and then you apply the brake. This, of course, shuts
off the cruise control. But you don’t need to reset it.
Once you’re going about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more, you
can move the cruise control switch briefly from on to
resume/accelerate.
Reducing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
You’ll go right back up to your chosen speed and
stay there.
Press in the set button at the end of the lever until you
reach the lower speed you want, then release it. Each
time you do this, you’ll go about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.
If you hold the switch at resume/accelerate, the vehicle
will keep going faster until you release the switch or
apply the brake. So unless you want to go faster, don’t
hold the switch at resume/accelerate.
Passing Another Vehicle While Using
Cruise Control
Use the accelerator pedal to increase your speed.
When you take your foot off the pedal, your vehicle will
slow down to the cruise control speed you set earlier.
3-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Cruise Control on Hills
Headlamps
How well your cruise control will work on hills depends
upon your speed, load and the steepness of the
hills. When going up steep hills, you may want to step
on the accelerator pedal to maintain your speed.
When going downhill, you may have to brake or shift to
a lower gear to keep your speed down. Of course,
applying the brake takes you out of cruise control. Many
drivers find this to be too much trouble and don’t use
cruise control on steep hills.
Your exterior lamps knob
is located on your
instrument panel to the left
of the steering wheel.
Ending Cruise Control
There are three ways to turn off the cruise control:
• Step lightly on the brake pedal.
c(Off): Turn the knob to this symbol and release it to
turn off the Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) and the
Automatic Headlamps (AHS). An indicator will illuminate
when the position is selected. This position is not
available for vehicles first sold in Canada.
• Move the cruise switch to off, or
• Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL (N).
Erasing Speed Memory
When you turn off the cruise control or the ignition, your
cruise control set speed memory is erased.
i(Automatic DRL/AHS): Turning the knob to this
symbol puts the system into automatic headlamp mode.
An indicator will illuminate when the position is
selected.
3-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
;(Parking Lamps): Turn the knob to this symbol to
manually turn on the following:
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for
others to see the front of your vehicle during the
day. DRL can be helpful in many different driving
conditions, but they can be especially helpful in the short
periods after dawn and before sunset. Fully functional
daytime running lamps are required on all vehicles
first sold in Canada.
• Parking Lamps
• Sidemarker Lamps
• Taillamps
• License Plate Lamps
• Instrument Panel Lights
The DRL system will make your headlamps come on
at reduced brightness when the following conditions
are met:
2(Headlamps): Turn the knob to this symbol to turn
on all the lamps listed as well as the headlamps.
• The ignition is on.
Headlamps on Reminder
• The exterior lamps knob is in automatic headlamp
mode.
A reminder tone will sound when your headlamps or
parking lamps are manually turned on, the driver’s door
is open and your ignition is in LOCK or ACCESSORY.
To turn the tone off, turn the knob all the way
• The light sensor detects daytime light.
• The transmission is not in PARK (P).
counterclockwise. In the automatic mode, the headlamps
turn off once the ignition key is in LOCK.
When the DRL are on, only your headlamps will be on.
The taillamps, sidemarker and other lamps won’t be
on. The instrument panel won’t be lit up either.
When it begins to get dark, the headlamps will
automatically switch from DRL to the regular headlamps.
3-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you start your vehicle in a dark garage, the automatic
headlamp system will come on immediately. Once
you leave the garage, it will take about one minute for
the automatic headlamp system to change to DRL if it is
light outside. During that delay, your instrument panel
cluster may not be as bright as usual. Make sure
your instrument panel brightness control is in the full
bright position.
Automatic Headlamp System
When it is dark enough outside, your Automatic
Headlamp System will turn on your headlamps at the
normal brightness along with other lamps such as
the taillamps, sidemarker, parking lamps and the
instrument panel lights. The radio lights will also be on.
Your vehicle is equipped with a light sensor on the
top of the instrument panel. Be sure it is not covered or
the system will be on whenever the ignition is on.
Only vehicles first sold in the United States can idle with
the automatic headlamp system off. To idle with the
automatic headlamp system off, set the parking brake
while the ignition is off. Then start your vehicle. The
automatic headlamp system will stay off until you release
the parking brake, shift out of park or turn the exterior
lamp control to the off position (US vehicles only)
as described previously.
The system may also turn on your lights when driving
through a parking garage, heavy overcast weather
or a tunnel. This is normal.
There is a delay in the transition between the daytime
and nighttime operation of the Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL) and the automatic headlamp systems, so
that driving under bridges or bright overhead street
lights does not affect the system. The DRL and
automatic headlamp system will only be affected when
the light sensor sees a change in lighting lasting
longer than the delay.
3-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fog Lamps
Instrument Panel Brightness
Your vehicle may have this feature. Use your fog lamps
for better vision in foggy or misty conditions. Your
ignition must be in RUN for your fog lamps to work.
Press the knob located
next to the exterior lamps
knob to extend it.
The fog lamp button is
located on the instrument
panel to the right of
the exterior lamps knob.
Turn the knob to adjust the instrument panel lights. Turn
the knob all the way up to turn on the interior lamps.
Press the knob back into its stored position when you’re
not using it.
Press the button to turn the fog lamps on. Press the
button again to turn them off. A light will glow near the
button while the fog lamps are on. Fog lamps will
turn off whenever your high-beam headlamps are on.
Dome Lamps
The dome lamps will come on when you open a door
unless the dome lamp override is pressed in.
Some localities have laws that require the headlamps to
be on along with the fog lamps.
3-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dome Lamp Override
Entry Lighting
Your vehicle is equipped with entry lighting.
The dome override button
is located below the
exterior lamps knob.
When any door is opened, the dome lamps will come
on as long as the dome override lamp override button is
not pressed in. When all the doors are closed, the
lamps will stay on for a short period of time and will then
turn off automatically. If you use your remote keyless
entry transmitter to unlock the vehicle, the interior lights
will come on for a short time whether or not the dome
lamp override is on.
Exit Lighting
With exit lighting, the interior lamps will come on when
you remove the key from the ignition. If the dome
override is on, these lights will stay on for a short period
of time and then will go out.
To turn the dome lamps off, press the button. The dome
lamps will remain off when a door is open. This will
override the illuminated entry feature unless you
use your keyless entry transmitter to unlock the vehicle.
To return the lamps to automatic operation, press the
button again. The dome lamps will come on when
you open a door.
Reading Lamps
The reading lamps are located in the console for front
passengers and on the headliner for rear passengers.
Press the lens on the lamps to turn the reading lamps on
and press the lens again to turn the lamps off.
3-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remove the cover from the outlet to use the outlet. Be
sure to put the cover back on when not using the
accessory power outlet.
Battery Run-Down Protection
This feature shuts off the dome, courtesy and vanity if
they are left on for more than 20 minutes when the
ignition is off. This will keep your battery from
running down.
Certain electrical accessories may not be compatible
with the accessory power outlet and could result
in blown vehicle or adaptor fuses. If you experience a
problem, see your dealer for additional information
on the accessory power outlets.
If the battery run-down protection shuts off the interior
lamps, it may be necessary to do one of the following to
return to normal operation:
Notice: Adding any electrical equipment to your
vehicle may damage it or keep other components
from working as they should. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Do not use equipment
exceeding maximum amperage rating. Check
• Shut off all lamps and close all doors.
• Turn the ignition key to RUN.
This feature will also turn off the parking lamps and
headlamps under most circumstances, if they are left on.
If you would like to turn them back on, turn the exterior
lamps knob.
with your dealer before adding electrical equipment.
When adding electrical equipment, be sure to follow
the proper installation instructions included with
the equipment.
Accessory Power Outlet(s)
Notice: Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by your warranty. Do not
hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket
from the plug because the power outlets are
designed for accessory power plugs only.
Your vehicle may have accessory power outlets.
With the accessory power outlets, you can plug in
auxiliary electrical equipment such as a cellular
telephone or CB radio.
An outlet is located below the cigarette lighter and the
rear wiper switch on the instrument panel. Another outlet
is located on the rear of the center console.
3-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter
Your vehicle may have this feature. The ashtray is
removable and fits into the front cupholder.
Climate Controls
Dual Climate Control System
Notice: If you put papers, pins, or other flammable
items in the ashtray, hot cigarettes or other
smoking materials could ignite them and possibly
damage your vehicle. Never put flammable items in
the ashtray.
With this system you can control the heating, cooling
and ventilation for your vehicle.
To remove the ashtray, pull the covered bin out of the
cupholder.
To use the lighter, press it in all the way, and let go.
When it’s ready, it will pop back out by itself.
Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter in while it is
heating will not allow the lighter to back away from
the heating element when it is hot. Damage from
overheating may occur to the lighter or heating
element, or a fuse could be blown. Do not hold a
cigarette lighter in while it is heating.
9(Fan): Turn the left knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the fan speed.
If the knob is in off mode, outside air will still enter the
vehicle, and will be directed based on the position of the
mode knob. The temperature can still be adjusted
using the temperature knob.
Turn the right knob clockwise or counterclockwise to
direct the airflow inside of your vehicle.
3-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To change the current mode, select one of the following:
Driver’s Side Temperature Knob: The lever on the left
side of the climate control panel is used to raise or
lower the temperature on the driver’s side of the vehicle.
Slide the lever up or down to adjust the temperature.
H(Vent): This mode directs air to the instrument
panel outlets.
Passenger’s Side Temperature Knob: The lever
on the right side of the climate control panel is used to
raise or lower the temperature on the passenger’s
side of the vehicle. Slide the lever up or down to adjust
the temperature. This lever also adjusts the temperature
to the rear seat outlets.
)(Bi-Level): This mode directs about half of the air
to the instrument panel outlets; then directs most of
the remaining air to the floor outlets. A little air is
directed toward the windshield and the side window
outlets. Cooler air is directed to the upper vents
and warmer air to the floor outlets.
When the temperature outside is 0°F (-18°C) or lower,
use the engine coolant heater, if equipped, to provide
warmer air, faster to your vehicle.
6(Floor): This mode directs most of the air to the
floor outlets with a little air directed to the windshield and
the side window outlets. The recirculation button
cannot be selected while in floor mode.
#(Air Conditioning): Press this button to turn the
air-conditioning system on or off. When the button is
pressed, an indicator light will come on and the system
will begin to cool and dehumidify the air inside of your
vehicle. You may notice a slight change in engine
performance when the air conditioning compressor
shuts off and turns on again. This is normal.
@ (Recirculation): Recirculation mode is used to
recirculate the air inside of your vehicle. When this button
is pressed, an indicator light in the button will come on to
let you know that it is active. Use this mode to help
prevent outside odors and/or dust from entering your
vehicle or to help cool the air inside of your vehicle more
quickly. The air conditioning compressor will also come
on when this mode is activated. While in recirculation
mode, the windows may fog when the weather is cold and
damp. To clear the fog, select either the defog or defrost
mode and increase fan speed.
Defog and defrost modes are described later in
this section.
3-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Defogging and Defrosting
Rear Window Defogger
Fog on the inside of windows is a result of high humidity
(moisture) condensing on the cool window glass. This
can be minimized if the climate control system is
used properly. There are two modes to choose from to
clear fog or frost from your windshield. Use the
defog mode to clear the windows of fog or moisture and
warm the passengers. Use the defrost mode to
The lines you see on the rear window warm the glass.
<(Rear): Press this button to turn the rear window
defogger on or off. An indicator light in the button
will come on to let you know that the rear window
defogger is active. The rear window defogger will
automatically turn off approximately ten minutes after
the button is pressed.
remove fog or frost from the windshield more quickly.
Turn the right knob clockwise or counterclockwise
to select one of the following modes:
If your vehicle is equipped with heated mirrors, this
button will activate them.
Notice: Do not use anything sharp on the inside of
the rear window. If you do, you could cut or
damage the warming grid, and the repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Do not attach a
temporary vehicle license, tape, a decal or anything
similar to the defogger grid.
-(Defog): This mode directs the air to the floor outlets,
windshield and side window outlets. The recirculation
button cannot be selected while in defog mode.
1(Defrost): This mode directs most of the air to the
windshield and the side window outlets, with only a
little air directed to the floor outlets. The air conditioning
compressor may run to dehumidify the air to prevent
window fogging. The recirculation button cannot
be selected while in defrost mode. Do not drive the
vehicle until all the windows are clear.
3-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Outside Air Temperature Display
Dual Automatic Climate Control
System
Your vehicle may have the dual automatic climate
control system. With this system you can control the
heating, cooling and ventilation for your vehicle.
A new outside temperature reading will be displayed if
the vehicle has been off for more than three hours. If the
vehicle has been off for less than three hours, the old
temperature reading may be displayed because
underhood heat is affecting the true outside temperature.
Since underhood heat can also affect the outside
temperature while the engine is running, it may take
several minutes of driving before the display updates to
the actual outside temperature.
9(Off): Press this button to turn off the entire climate
control system. Outside air will still enter the vehicle,
and will be directed to the floor. Press the AUTO button,
the mode button, the fan arrows, or either temperature
knob to turn the system on.
C(Mode): Press this button to manually select the air
delivery mode to the floor, instrument panel, or
windshield outlets. The system will stay in the selected
mode until the mode button is pressed again or the
AUTO button is pressed.
When your vehicle is first started and the climate control
system is on, or if the climate control system has
been turned on, the display will show the driver’s
temperature setting for five seconds. Then it will show
the outside temperature.
3-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver’s Side Temperature Knob: Turn this knob
clockwise or counterclockwise to manually raise or lower
the temperature on the driver’s side of the vehicle.
The display will show the temperature setting decreasing
or increasing and an arrow pointing toward the driver.
This knob can also adjust the passenger’s side
temperature setting simultaneously if the two zones
are linked.
Automatic Operation
AUTO (Automatic): When automatic operation is
active, the system will control the inside temperature,
the air delivery mode, and the fan speed.
Use the steps below to place the entire system in
automatic mode:
1. Press the AUTO button.
Passenger’s Side Temperature Knob: Turn this knob
clockwise or counterclockwise to manually raise or
lower the temperature on the passenger’s side of the
vehicle. The display will show the temperature
setting decreasing or increasing and an arrow pointing
toward the passenger. The passenger’s temperature
setting can be set to match and link to the driver’s
temperature setting by pressing and holding the AUTO
button for three seconds. Now, by adjusting the
driver’s side temperature setting, the passenger’s side
temperature setting will follow and both arrows will
appear on the display. The passenger’s side
When AUTO is selected, the air conditioning
operation and air inlet mode will be automatically
controlled. The air conditioning compressor will run
when the outside temperature is over approximately
40°F (4°C). The air inlet will normally be set to
outside air. If it’s hot outside, the air inlet will
automatically switch to recirculate inside air to help
quickly cool down your vehicle.
2. Set the driver’s and passenger’s temperature.
To find your comfort setting, start with a 72°F (22°C)
temperature setting and allow about 20 minutes
for the system to regulate. Turn the driver’s or
passenger’s side temperature knob to adjust the
temperature setting as necessary. If you choose the
temperature setting of 60°F (15°C), the system
will remain at the maximum cooling setting. If you
choose the temperature setting of 90°F (32°C),
the system will remain at the maximum heat setting.
Choosing either maximum setting may not cause
the vehicle to heat or cool any faster.
temperature setting also resets and relinks to the
driver’s side temperature setting if the vehicle has been
off for more than three hours.
3-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Manual Operation
To change the current setting, select one of the
following:
6(Floor): This mode directs most of the air to the
floor outlets. Some air also comes out of the defroster
and side window outlets. The recirculation button
cannot be selected in floor mode.
w9x(Fan): This button allows you to manually
adjust the fan speed. Press the up arrow to increase fan
speed and the down arrow to decrease fan speed.
The display will change to show you the selected fan
speed and the driver’s side temperature setting for
five seconds.
@ (Recirculation): Press this button to turn
recirculation mode on or off. When this button is
pressed, an indicator light in the button will also come
on to let you know that it is activated. Recirculation
mode is used to recirculate the air inside of your vehicle.
Use this mode to help prevent outside odors and/or
dust from entering your vehicle or to help cool the air
inside of your vehicle more quickly. Recirculation
mode can be used with vent and bi-level modes, but it
cannot be used with floor, defog or defrost modes.
See “Defogging and Defrosting” later in this section.
C(Mode): Press this button to manually change the
direction of the airflow in your vehicle. Keep pressing the
button until the desired mode appears on the display.
The display will change to show you the selected
air delivery mode and the driver’s temperature setting
for five seconds.
You may also notice that the air conditioning compressor
will run while in recirculation mode. This is normal
and will help to prevent fogging.
H(Vent): This mode directs air to the instrument
panel outlets.
If the weather is cold and damp, the system may cause
the windows to fog while using recirculation mode. If the
windows do start to fog, select defog or defrost mode.
)(Bi-Level): This mode directs approximately half of
the air to the instrument panel outlets, then directs
the remaining air to the floor outlets. A little air is
directed toward the windshield and the side window
outlets. Cooler air is directed to the upper outlets and
warmer air to the floor outlets.
Recirculation mode, if selected, will be cleared when the
engine is turned off.
3-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
#A/C (Air Conditioning): Press this button to
manually turn the air conditioning system on or off.
When the system is on, the system will automatically
begin to cool and dehumidify the air inside of your
vehicle. The air conditioning symbol will appear on the
display when the air conditioning is on and will turn
off when the air conditioning is off.
Defogging and Defrosting
Fog on the inside of windows is a result of high humidity
(moisture) condensing on the cool window glass. This
can be minimized if the climate control system is
used properly. You can use either defog or front defrost
to clear fog or frost from your windshield.
-(Defog): Use this setting to clear the windows of
fog or moisture. This setting will deliver air to the
floor and windshield outlets.
If you select turn the air conditioning off while in front
defrost or defog mode, the air conditioning symbol
will turn off, however, the A/C compressor will remain
on to help de-humidify the air inside the vehicle. If one of
the other modes is selected the compressor will then
turn the A/C off until it is selected again or the
AUTO button is pressed.
0(Defrost): Press the front defrost button to clear
the windshield and side windows of frost or fog quickly.
The system will automatically control the fan speed if
you select defrost from AUTO mode. If the outside
temperature is 40°F (4°C) or warmer, your air
conditioning compressor will automatically run to help
dehumidify the air and dry the windshield. Do not
drive the vehicle until all the windows are clear.
You may notice a slight change in engine performance
when the air conditioning compressor shuts off and
turns on again. This is normal.
3-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rear Window Defogger
Outlet Adjustment
The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to
remove fog from the rear window.
Use the air outlets located in the center and on the side
of your instrument panel to direct the airflow.
<(Rear): Press this button to turn the rear window
Operation Tips
defogger on or off.
• Keep the hood and front air inlets free of ice, snow,
or any other obstruction (such as leaves). The
heater and defroster will work better, reducing the
chance of fogging the inside of your windows.
An indicator light in the button will come on to let you
know that the rear window defogger is activated.
The rear window defogger will turn off approximately 10
minutes after the button is pressed. If you need
additional warming time, press the button again.
• When you enter a vehicle in cold weather, turn the
fan knob all the way to the right for a few moments
before driving. This helps clear the intake ducts
of snow and moisture, and reduces the chance of
fogging the inside of your window.
If equipped, your heated mirrors will also come on when
you press this button.
Notice: Do not use a razor blade or sharp object to
clear the inside rear window. Do not adhere
anything to the defogger grid lines in the rear glass.
These actions may damage the rear defogger.
Repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
• Keep the air path under the front seats clear of
objects. This helps air to circulate throughout
your vehicle.
• Adding outside equipment to the front of your
vehicle, such as hood-air deflectors, may affect the
performance of the heating and air conditioning
system. Check with your dealer before adding
equipment to the outside of your vehicle.
3-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The temperature of the air coming through the rear
outlets is determined by the front passenger’s
temperature setting. Press the PWR button to turn the
rear climate controls on and off. Use the mode knob
to change the direction of airflow (upper, bi-level or floor)
to the rear seat area.
Rear Climate Control System
Regular Wheelbase
Your vehicle has one of the following rear climate
control systems. With either of these systems, the rear
climate controls will be disabled when the front
climate control system is in defrost. This occurs to
provide maximum airflow to clear the windshield.
H (Panel): When panel mode is selected, the rear
system will distribute air from the four headliner outlets.
) (Bi-level): When bi-level mode is selected, the
rear system will distribute air from the four headliner
outlets, the second seat side floor outlets, and the third
seat floor outlet.
6 (Floor): When floor mode is selected, the rear
system will distribute air from the second seat side floor
outlets and the third seat floor outlet.
3-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Extended Wheelbase
To operate the rear air conditioning system, the front air
conditioning system must be on. With the front air
conditioning system off, the rear system controls can
only be used to circulate air in the rear of the vehicle.
To adjust the airflow
speed, turn the fan knob
(driver override switch),
located on the floor
console to 1, 2, or 3.
The rear mode and
temperature position will
now mimic the front control
system mode and
If your vehicle has the rear seat audio system, the lower
buttons are used to adjust the rear seat climate
control system. The temperature of the air coming
through the rear outlets is determined by the front
passenger’s temperature setting.
passenger side
temperature.
P (On/Off): Press this button to turn the rear climate
controls on or off.
z 9 y (Fan): Press this button to adjust the
To activate the second row seat controls in the following
systems, set the fan knob, located on the front
console, to R.
fan speed.
z \ y (Mode): Press this button to change the
direction of airflow (panel, bi-level or floor) to the
rear seat area.
The rear control will only turn on if the front is on and
not in defrost mode.
3-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turn the knobs on the control panel to choose a fan
speed, temperature and direction of airflow.
If your vehicle has the rear seat audio system, press the
buttons at the bottom of the audio control panel to adjust
the fan speed, mode and temperature for the rear
H (Panel): Selecting panel mode will deliver air to the
passengers. The selections will be shown on the display.
four headliner outlets.
z 9 y (Fan): Press the rear fan control button with
the arrow pointing right to turn the rear climate control
on. Toggle this button to adjust the air flow speed.
To turn the rear system off, toggle the left arrow until
the display turns off.
) (Bi-level): Selecting bi-level mode will deliver
warmer air to the second seat side floor outlets, the third
seat floor outlet, and cooler air to the headliner outlets.
6 (Floor): Selecting floor mode will deliver air to
the floor outlet located in the third seat area and the side
outlets located in the second seat areas.
3-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Warning lights come on when there may be or is a
problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. As you will
see in the details on the next few pages, some
warning lights come on briefly when you start the
engine just to let you know they’re working. If you are
familiar with this section, you should not be alarmed
when this happens.
z \ y (Mode): Press this button to change the
direction of airflow (panel, bi-level or floor) to the
rear seat area.
z b y (Temperature): Press this button to increase
and decrease the temperature setting.
Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem
with one of your vehicle’s functions. Often gages
and warning lights work together to let you know when
there’s a problem with your vehicle.
Warning Lights, Gages, and
Indicators
This part describes the warning lights and gages that
may be on your vehicle. The pictures will help you
locate them.
When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on
when you are driving, or when one of the gages
shows there may be a problem, check the section that
tells you what to do about it. Please follow this
manual’s advice.
Warning lights and gages can signal that something is
wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause
an expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to
your warning lights and gages could also save you
or others from injury.
Waiting to do repairs can be costly—and even
dangerous. So please get to know your warning lights
and gages. They’re a big help.
Your vehicle may also have a Driver Information Center
(DIC) that works along with the warning lights and
page 3-50.
3-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel Cluster
Your instrument panel cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. You will know how
fast you are going, about how much fuel you have used, and many other things you will need to know to drive
safely and economically.
United States Uplevel version shown, Canada and Base similar
3-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The odometer mileage can be checked without the
vehicle running. Simply press the trip stem on the
instrument panel cluster.
Speedometer and Odometer
Your speedometer lets you see your speed in both
miles per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h).
If your vehicle ever needs a new odometer installed, the
new one will be set to the correct mileage total of the
old odometer.
Your odometer shows how far your vehicle has
been driven, in either miles (used in the United States)
or kilometers (used in Canada).
Tachometer
The odometer mileage can be checked without the
vehicle running. Simply press the trip stem located on
the instrument panel cluster.
The tachometer displays
the engine speed in
revolutions per
You may wonder what happens if your vehicle needs a
new odometer installed. The new one will be set to
the correct mileage total of the old odometer.
minute (rpm).
Trip Odometer
The trip odometer can tell you how far your vehicle has
been driven since you last set the trip odometer to zero.
Your vehicle’s odometer works together with the Driver
Information Center (DIC). You can set a Trip A and
Trip B odometer. See “Trip Information” under DIC
3-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Belt Reminder Light
Passenger Safety Belt
Reminder Light
When the key is turned to RUN or START, a chime will
sound for several seconds to remind you and your
passengers to buckle your safety belts. The driver safety
belt light will also come on and stay on for several
seconds, then it will flash for several more. You should
buckle your seat belt.
Several seconds after the key is turned to RUN or
START, a chime will sound for several seconds
to remind the front passenger to buckle their safety belt.
This would only occur if the passenger airbag is
for more information. The passenger safety belt light
will also come on and stay on for several seconds, then
it will flash for several more.
This chime and light will be
repeated if the driver
remains unbuckled and the
vehicle is in motion.
This chime and light will be
repeated if the passenger
remains unbuckled and
the vehicle is in motion.
If the driver’s belt is buckled, neither the chime nor the
light will come on.
If the passenger’s safety belt is buckled, neither the
chime nor the light will come on.
3-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Airbag Readiness Light
{CAUTION:
There is an airbag readiness light on the instrument
panel, which shows the airbag symbol. The system
checks the airbag’s electrical system for malfunctions.
The light tells you if there is an electrical problem.
The system check includes the airbag sensors, the
airbag modules, the wiring and the crash sensing and
diagnostic module. For more information on the
If the airbag readiness light stays on after you
start your vehicle, it means the airbag system
may not be working properly. The airbags in
your vehicle may not inflate in a crash, or they
could even inflate without a crash. To help
avoid injury to yourself or others, have your
vehicle serviced right away if the airbag
readiness light stays on after you start
your vehicle.
This light will come on
when you start your
vehicle, and it will flash for
a few seconds. Then
the light should go out.
This means the system
is ready.
The airbag readiness light should flash for a few
seconds when you turn the ignition key to RUN. If the
light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it will
be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
If the airbag readiness light stays on after you start the
vehicle or comes on when you are driving, your
airbag system may not work properly. Have your vehicle
serviced right away.
3-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Then, after several more seconds, the status indicator
will light either ON or OFF, or either the on or off symbol
to let you know the status of the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag.
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
Your vehicle has the passenger sensing system,
Your rearview mirror has a passenger airbag status
indicator.
If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on the passenger
airbag status indicator, it means that the right front
passenger’s frontal airbag is enabled (may inflate).
{CAUTION:
If the on indicator comes on when you have a
rear-facing child restraint installed in the right
front passenger’s seat, it means that the
passenger sensing system has not turned off
the passenger’s frontal airbag. A child in a
rear-facing child restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right front passenger’s
airbag inflates. This is because the back of the
rear-facing child restraint would be very close
to the inflating airbag. Do not use a rear-facing
child restraint in the right front passenger’s
seat if the airbag is turned on.
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator – United States
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator – Canada
When the ignition key is turned to RUN or START, the
passenger airbag status indicator will light ON and
OFF, or the symbol for on and off, for several seconds
as a system check.
3-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your vehicle has a rear seat that will accommodate a
rear-facing child restraint. A label on your sun visor says,
“Never put a rear-facing child seat in the front.” This
is because the risk to the rear-facing child is so great, if
the airbag deploys.
If, after several seconds, all status indicator lights
remain on, or if there are no lights at all, there may be a
problem with the lights or the passenger sensing
system. See your dealer for service.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
If the off indicator and the airbag readiness light
ever come on together, it means that something
may be wrong with the airbag system. If this
ever happens, have the vehicle serviced
promptly, because an adult-size person sitting
in the right front passenger seat may not have
the protection of the frontal airbag. See Airbag
Even though the passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the passenger’s frontal
airbag if the system detects a rear-facing child
restraint, no system is failsafe, and no one can
guarantee that an airbag will not deploy under
some unusual circumstance, even though it is
turned off. We recommend that rear-facing
child restraints be secured in the rear seat,
even if the airbag is off.
If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on the airbag
status indicator, it means that the passenger sensing
system has turned off the right front passenger’s frontal
for more on this, including important safety information.
3-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Charging System Light
Voltmeter Gage
The charging system light
When your engine is not
running, but the ignition is
in RUN, this gage
shows your battery’s state
of charge in DC volts.
will come on briefly when
you turn on the ignition,
but the engine is not
running, as a check to
show you it is working.
It should go out once the engine is running. If it stays
on, or comes on while you are driving, you may have a
problem with the charging system. It could indicate
that you have problems with a generator drive belt,
or another electrical problem. Have it checked
right away. Driving while this light is on could drain
your battery.
When the engine is running, the gage shows the
condition of the charging system. Readings between the
low and high warning zones indicate the normal
operating range.
If you must drive a short distance with the light on, be
certain to turn off all your accessories, such as the
radio and air conditioner.
Readings in the low warning zone may occur when a
large number of electrical accessories are operating in
the vehicle and the engine is left idling for an
extended period. This condition is normal since the
charging system is not able to provide full power
at engine idle. As engine speeds are increased, this
condition should correct itself as higher engine speeds
allow the charging system to create maximum power.
3-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
You can only drive for a short time with the reading in
either warning zone. If you must drive, turn off all
unnecessary accessories.
Readings in either warning zone indicate a possible
problem in the electrical system. Have the vehicle
serviced as soon as possible.
Brake System Warning Light
United States
Canada
This light should come on briefly when you turn the
ignition key to RUN. If it doesn’t come on then, have it
fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there’s a problem.
If the light comes on while you are driving, pull off the
road and stop carefully. You may notice that the pedal is
harder to push. Or, the pedal may go closer to the
floor. It may take longer to stop. If the light is still on,
have the vehicle towed for service. See Towing
When the ignition is on, the brake system warning light
will come on when you set your parking brake. The
light will stay on if your parking brake doesn’t release
fully. If it stays on after your parking brake is fully
released, it means you have a brake problem. A chime
may also sound when the light comes on.
Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into
two parts. If one part isn’t working, the other part can still
work and stop you. For good braking, though, you
need both parts working well.
{CAUTION:
If the warning light comes on, there could be a brake
problem. Have your brake system inspected right away.
Your brake system may not be working properly
if the brake system warning light is on. Driving
with the brake system warning light on can lead
to an accident. If the light is still on after you
have pulled off the road and stopped carefully,
have the vehicle towed for service.
3-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Anti-Lock Brake System
Warning Light
StabiliTrak® Service Light
This light will come on
briefly when the engine
is started.
With the anti-lock brake
system, this light will come
on when you start your
engine and may stay on for
several seconds, that is
normal. A chime may also
sound when the light
comes on.
This light will come on if a problem is detected in the
StabiliTrak® system.
If the light stays on, or comes on when you are driving,
your vehicle needs service. If the regular brake
system warning light is not on, you still have brakes, but
you do not have anti-lock brakes. If the regular brake
system warning light is also on, you do not have
anti-lock brakes and there is a problem with your regular
earlier in this section.
page 4-9.
The anti-lock brake system warning light should come
on briefly when you turn the ignition key to RUN. If
the light does not come on then, have it fixed so it will
be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
3-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
StabiliTrak® Indicator Light
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage
This warning light should
come on briefly when the
engine is started.
During most driving conditions, this light will not come
on. If the StabiliTrak® System is actively controlling
the stability and/or traction of the vehicle, this light will
blink. This is normal.
United States
Canada
This gage shows the engine coolant temperature. If the
gage pointer moves into the red area, it means that
your engine coolant has overheated. If you have been
operating your vehicle under normal driving conditions,
you should pull off the road, stop your vehicle and
turn off the engine as soon as possible.
This light will come on if any portion of the system has
been manually turned off or a problem is detected
in the system.
If your vehicle is equipped with a Driver Information
Center, a message will appear also, see DIC Warnings
on page 4-9 for more information.
information.
3-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Modifications made to the engine,
transmission, exhaust, intake, or fuel system of
your vehicle or the replacement of the original tires
with other than those of the same Tire Performance
Criteria (TPC) can affect your vehicle’s emission
controls and may cause this light to come on.
Modifications to these systems could lead to costly
repairs not covered by your warranty. This may
also result in a failure to pass a required Emission
Inspection/Maintenance test. See Accessories
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Check Engine Light
Your vehicle has a
computer which monitors
operation of the fuel,
ignition, and emission
control systems.
This light should come on, as a check to show you it is
working, when the ignition is on and the engine is
not running. If the light does not come on, have it
repaired. This light will also come on during a
malfunction in one of two ways:
This system is called OBD II (On-Board
Diagnostics-Second Generation) and is intended to
assure that emissions are at acceptable levels for the
life of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner
environment. The check engine light comes on to
indicate that there is a problem and service is required.
Malfunctions often will be indicated by the system
before any problem is apparent. This may prevent more
serious damage to your vehicle. This system is also
designed to assist your service technician in correctly
diagnosing any malfunction.
• Light Flashing — A misfire condition has been
detected. A misfire increases vehicle emissions
and may damage the emission control system on
your vehicle. Diagnosis and service may be
required.
• Light On Steady — An emission control system
malfunction has been detected on your vehicle.
Diagnosis and service may be required.
Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle with this
light on, after awhile, your emission controls
may not work as well, your fuel economy may not
be as good, and your engine may not run as
smoothly. This could lead to costly repairs that may
not be covered by your warranty.
3-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the Light is Flashing
If the Light Is On Steady
The following may prevent more serious damage to
your vehicle:
You may be able to correct the emission system
malfunction by considering the following:
• Reducing vehicle speed
Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?
If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully install
diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has
been left off or improperly installed. A loose or missing
fuel cap will allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere.
A few driving trips with the cap properly installed
should turn the light off.
• Avoiding hard accelerations
• Avoiding steep uphill grades
• If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amount of
cargo being hauled as soon as it is possible
If the light stops flashing and remains on steady, see “If
the Light Is On Steady” following.
Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so,
stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park your vehicle.
Turn the key off, wait at least 10 seconds and restart
the engine. If the light remains on steady, see “If
the Light Is On Steady” following. If the light is still
flashing, follow the previous steps, and see your dealer
for service as soon as possible.
If so, your electrical system may be wet. The condition
will usually be corrected when the electrical system
dries out. A few driving trips should turn the light off.
3-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Have you recently changed brands of fuel?
Emissions Inspection and
Maintenance Programs
Some state/provincial and local governments have or
may begin programs to inspect the emission control
equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass this
inspection could prevent you from getting a vehicle
registration.
If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel. See
cause your engine not to run as efficiently as designed.
You may notice this as stalling after start-up, stalling
when you put the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation
on acceleration, or stumbling on acceleration. (These
conditions may go away once the engine is warmed up.)
This will be detected by the system and cause the
light to turn on.
Here are some things you need to know to help your
vehicle pass an inspection:
If you experience one or more of these conditions,
change the fuel brand you use. It will require at least
one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off.
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the check
engine light is on or not working properly.
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the OBD
(on-board diagnostic) system determines that critical
emission control systems have not been completely
diagnosed by the system. The vehicle would be
considered not ready for inspection. This can happen if
you have recently replaced your battery or if your
battery has run down. The diagnostic system is
designed to evaluate critical emission control systems
during normal driving. This may take several days
of routine driving. If you have done this and your vehicle
still does not pass the inspection for lack of OBD
system readiness, your GM dealer can prepare the
vehicle for inspection.
If none of the above steps have made the light turn off,
your dealer can check the vehicle. Your dealer has
the proper test equipment and diagnostic tools to fix
any mechanical or electrical problems that may
have developed.
3-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Oil Pressure Gage
{CAUTION:
Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low. If
you do, your engine can become so hot that it
catches fire. You or others could be burned.
Check your oil as soon as possible and have
your vehicle serviced.
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance may
damage the engine. The repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Always follow the
maintenance schedule in this manual for changing
engine oil.
United States
Canada
The oil pressure gage shows the engine oil pressure in
psi (pounds per square inch) when the engine is
running. Canadian vehicles indicate pressure in
kPa (kilopascals).
Oil pressure may vary with engine speed, outside
temperature and oil viscosity, but readings above the
low pressure zone indicate the normal operating range.
A reading in the low pressure zone may be caused
by a dangerously low oil level or other problems causing
low oil pressure.
3-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Change Engine Oil Light
Security Light
If equipped and this light
comes on, it means that
an oil change and
This light will come on
briefly when you turn the
key toward START.
other maintenance
procedures are required
for your vehicle.
The light will stay on until the engine starts. If the light
flashes, the Passlock® system has entered a tamper
on page 2-18.
Once the engine oil has been changed, the change
engine oil light must be reset. Until it is reset, the light
will be displayed when the engine is on.
If the light comes on continuously while driving and
stays on, there may be a problem with the Passlock®
system. Your vehicle will not be protected by Passlock®,
and you should see your dealer.
additional information regarding the security light.
3-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If this light stays on, see your dealer as soon as
possible for diagnosis and repair.
Cruise Control Light
This light may also come on if there is a problem with
the Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If this
happens, take the vehicle in for service as soon
as possible.
If equipped, the cruise
control light appears
whenever you set your
cruise control.
Highbeam On Light
This light will come on
when the high-beam
headlamps are in use.
Reduced Engine Power Light
This light is displayed
when a noticeable
reduction in the vehicle’s
performance may occur.
The vehicle may be driven at a reduced speed when
the reduced engine power light is on but acceleration
and speed may be reduced. The performance may
be reduced until the next time you drive your vehicle.
3-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service Four-Wheel Drive
Warning Light
Check Gages Warning Light
The check gages light will
come on briefly when you
are starting the engine.
This light should come on
briefly when you turn on
the ignition, as a check to
show you it is working.
If the light comes on and stays on while you are driving,
check your coolant temperature and engine oil
pressure gages to see if they are in the warning zones.
The service four-wheel drive light comes on to indicate
that there may be a problem with the drive system
and service is required. Malfunctions can be indicated
by the system before any problem is apparent,
which may prevent serious damage to the vehicle. This
system is also designed to assist your GM dealer in
correctly diagnosing a malfunction.
Gate Ajar Light
If this light comes on, your
liftgate or liftglass is not
completely shut.
Close the liftgate or liftglass. Never drive with the liftgate
or liftglass even partially open.
3-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuel Gage
Low Fuel Warning Light
The light next to the fuel gage will come on briefly when
you are starting the engine.
This light comes on when the fuel tank is low on fuel.
page 5-5.
Check Gas Cap Light
If equipped, this light will
come on if your gas cap is
not securely fastened.
United States
Canada
When the ignition is on, the fuel gage tells you about
how much fuel you have remaining.
Here are four things that some owners ask about. None
of these show a problem with your fuel gage:
• At the gas station, the gas pump shuts off before
the gage reads full.
• It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the
gage indicated. For example, the gage may have
indicated the tank was half full, but it actually took a
little more or less than half the tank’s capacity to
fill the tank.
more information.
• The gage moves a little when you turn a corner or
speed up.
• The gage doesn’t go back to empty when you turn
off the ignition.
3-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Information Center (DIC)
Your vehicle may have this feature. The Driver
Information Center (DIC) display is located on the
instrument panel cluster, below the speedometer. If your
vehicle has DIC buttons, they are located on the
steering wheel. The DIC can display information such
as the trip odometer, fuel economy, customization
features, and warning/status messages.
If your vehicle does not have DIC steering wheel
buttons, you will not have all of the features listed. Scroll
through the odometer and trip odometer by pressing
the trip odometer reset stem located on the instrument
panel cluster. Turn off, or acknowledge, DIC messages
by pressing the trip odometer reset stem. See
3 (Trip Information): Press this button to display
the odometer, trip odometers, and timer.
information on features for vehicles without DIC buttons.
t (Fuel Information): Press this button to display the
current range, fuel used, average fuel economy, and
engine oil life.
4 (Customization): Press this button to access the
vehicle settings menu and customize the personal
settings on your vehicle.
r (Select): Press this button to reset certain
DIC functions and set your customization settings.
Pressing any of the DIC buttons will acknowledge
DIC messages and clear them from the DIC display.
3-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Trip Information Button
DIC Operation and Displays
The DIC comes on when the ignition is on. After a short
delay the DIC will display the information that was
last displayed before the engine was turned off.
3 (Trip Information): Press the trip information
button to scroll through the ODOMETER, TRIP A,
TRIP B, and TIMER.
If a problem is detected, a warning message will appear
on the display. Pressing the trip stem will acknowledge
any warning or service messages. Pressing any of
the DIC steering wheel buttons — trip information, fuel
information, customization, or select button — will
also acknowledge any warnings or service messages.
Odometer: Press the trip information button until
ODOMETER appears on the display. This mode shows
the total distance the vehicle has been driven in
either miles or kilometers. Pressing the reset stem
located on the instrument cluster with the vehicle off will
also display the odometer.
You should take any message that appears on the
display seriously and remember that clearing the
message will only make the message disappear, not
correct the problem.
Trip A: Press the trip information button until TRIP A
appears on the display. This mode shows the current
distance traveled since the last reset for TRIP A in either
miles or kilometers.
The DIC has different modes which can be accessed by
pressing the four DIC buttons located on the steering
wheel. These buttons are trip information, fuel
information, customization, and select. The button
functions are detailed in the following pages.
Trip B: Press the trip information button until TRIP B
appears on the display. This mode shows the current
distance traveled since the last reset for TRIP B in either
miles or kilometers.
To reset TRIP A or TRIP B information, press and hold
the select button for one second while in one of the
trip modes. This will reset the information for TRIP A
or TRIP B.
3-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
You can also reset the TRIP A or TRIP B while they are
displayed by pressing the reset stem on the cluster. If
you press and hold the reset stem or the select
button for four seconds, the display will show the
distance traveled since the last ignition cycle for TRIP A
or TRIP B.
Fuel Information Button
t (Fuel Information): Press the fuel information
button to scroll through the range, fuel used, average
fuel economy, and the engine oil life system.
Fuel Range: Press the fuel information button until
RANGE appears on the display. This mode shows the
remaining distance you can drive without refueling.
It is based on fuel economy and the fuel remaining in
the fuel tank. The display will show LOW if the fuel
level is low.
Timer: The DIC can be used as a timer. Press the
select button while TIMER is displayed to start the timer.
The display will show the amount of time that has
passed since the timer was last reset, not including time
the ignition is off. Time will continue to be counted as
long as the ignition is on, even if another display is being
shown on the DIC. The timer will record up to 99 hours,
59 minutes and 59 seconds (99:59:59) after which
the display will roll back to zero.
The fuel economy data used to determine fuel range is
an average of recent driving conditions. As your
driving conditions change, this data is gradually updated.
Fuel range cannot be reset.
To stop the counting of time, press the select button
briefly while TIMER is displayed.
Fuel Used: Press the fuel information button until
FUEL USED appears on the display. This mode shows
the number of gallons or liters of fuel used since the
last reset of this menu item. To reset the fuel used
information, press and hold the select button for
one second while FUEL USED is displayed.
To reset the timer to zero, press and hold the select
button while TIMER is displayed.
3-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Average Fuel Economy: Press the fuel information
button until AVG. ECON appears on the display.
This mode shows how many miles per gallon (MPG),
liters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km), or kilometers
per liter (km/L) your vehicle is getting based on current
and past driving conditions.
Customization Button
4 (Customization): Press the customization button to
access the VEHICLE SETTINGS menu and customize
the settings to your vehicle. See DIC Vehicle
Press and hold the select button for one second while
AVG. ECON is displayed to reset the average fuel
economy. Average fuel economy will then be calculated
starting from that point. If the average fuel economy
is not reset, it will be continually updated each time
you drive.
Select Button
r (Select): Press the select button to reset certain
DIC functions, turn off or acknowledge messages
on the DIC display, and set your customization settings.
For example, this button will allow you to reset the
trip odometers, turn off the FUEL LEVEL LOW message,
and enables you to scroll through and select the
language in which the DIC information will appear.
Engine Oil Life System: Press the fuel information
button until ENGINE OIL LIFE appears on the display.
The engine oil life system shows an estimate of the
oil’s remaining useful life. It will show 100% when the
system is reset after an oil change. It will alert you
to change your oil on a schedule consistent with your
driving conditions.
Always reset the engine oil life system after an oil
change. To reset the engine oil life system, see Engine
In addition to the engine oil life system monitoring the
oil life, additional maintenance is recommended in
the Maintenance Schedule in this manual. See Engine
page 6-4.
3-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
BATTERY NOT CHARGING
DIC Warnings and Messages
If the battery is not charging during operation, this
message will appear on the DIC. Driving with this
problem could drain your battery. Have the electrical
system checked by your GM dealer as soon as possible.
button to acknowledge this message and clear it from
the DIC display.
Messages are displayed on the DIC to notify the driver
that the status of the vehicle has changed and that
some action may be needed by the driver to correct the
condition. More than one message may appear at
one time. They will appear one after the other. Some
messages may not require immediate action, but
you should press the trip stem on the instrument panel
cluster to acknowledge that you received the message
and to clear it from the display. Pressing any of the DIC
steering wheel buttons — trip information, fuel
information, customization, or select button — will also
acknowledge any warnings or service messages.
Some messages cannot be cleared from the display
because they are more urgent. These messages require
action before they can be removed from the DIC
display. The following are the possible messages that
can be displayed and some information about them.
CHANGE ENGINE OIL
This message is displayed when the engine oil needs to
be changed and service is required for your vehicle.
to reset the message. This message will clear itself after
10 seconds until the next ignition cycle.
3-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHECK WASHER FLUID
ENGINE COOLANT HOT/ENGINE
OVERHEATED
If the washer fluid level is low, this message will appear
on the DIC. Adding washer fluid to the windshield
washer fluid reservoir will clear the message. See
button to acknowledge this message and clear it from
the DIC display.
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine is
overheating, severe engine damage may occur. If
an overheat warning appears on the instrument
panel cluster and/or DIC, stop the vehicle as soon
as possible. Do not increase the engine speed above
page 5-28 for more information.
CURB VIEW ACTIVATED
The CURB VIEW ACTIVATED message is displayed
when the passenger outside rearview mirror moves into
the curb view position. See Outside Curb View Assist
If the cooling system temperature gets hot, this message
will appear in the DIC and you will hear a chime. See
of action. This message will clear when the coolant
temperature drops to a safe operating temperature.
DRIVER DOOR AJAR
FUEL LEVEL LOW
If the driver’s door is not fully closed, this message will
appear on the display and you will hear a chime.
Stop and turn off the vehicle, check the door for
obstacles, and close the door again. Check to see if the
message still appears on the DIC. Press the select
button to acknowledge this message and clear it from
the DIC display.
If the fuel level is low in the vehicle’s gas tank this
message will appear on the DIC and you will hear a
chime. Refuel as soon as possible. Press the select
button to acknowledge this message and clear it from
page 5-5 for more information.
3-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ICE POSSIBLE
OIL PRESSURE LOW/STOP ENGINE
If the outside temperature reaches a level where ice
could form on the roadway, this message may appear
on the DIC. If the temperature rises to a safe level,
the message will clear. Press the select button to
acknowledge this message and clear it from the
DIC display.
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine
oil pressure is low, severe engine damage may
occur. If a low oil pressure warning appears on the
Driver Information Center (DIC), stop the vehicle
as soon as possible. Do not drive the vehicle until
the cause of the low oil pressure is corrected.
KEY FOB # BATTERY LOW
If low oil pressure levels occur, this message will
be displayed on the DIC. Stop the vehicle as soon as
safely possible and do not operate it until the cause
of the low oil pressure has been corrected. Check your
oil as soon as possible and have your vehicle serviced
If a remote keyless entry transmitter battery is low, this
message will appear on the DIC. The battery needs
to be replaced in the transmitter. See “Battery
Replacement” under Remote Keyless Entry System
acknowledge this message and clear it from the
DIC display.
PASSENGER DOOR AJAR
If the passenger’s door is not fully closed, this message
will appear on the display and you will hear a chime.
Stop and turn off the vehicle, check the door for
obstacles, and close the door again. Check to see if the
message still appears on the DIC. Press the select
button to acknowledge this message and clear it from
the DIC display.
LEFT REAR DOOR AJAR
If the driver’s side rear door is not fully closed this
message will appear on the display and you will hear a
chime. Stop and turn off the vehicle, check the door
for obstacles, and close the door again. Check to see if
the message still appears on the DIC. Press the
select button to acknowledge this message and
clear it from the DIC display.
3-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
REAR ACCESS OPEN
SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM
If the liftgate or liftglass is open while the ignition is in
RUN, this message will appear on the DIC and you will
hear a chime. Turn off the vehicle and check the
Restart the vehicle and check for the message on the
DIC display. Press the select button to acknowledge this
message and clear it from the DIC display.
If a problem occurs with the brake system this message
will appear on the DIC. If this message appears, stop
as soon as possible and turn off the vehicle. Restart the
vehicle and check for the message on the DIC display.
If the message is still displayed, or appears again when
you begin driving, the brake system needs service.
See your GM dealer.
RIGHT REAR DOOR AJAR
SERVICE STABILITRAK
If the passenger’s side rear door is not fully closed this
message will appear on the display and you will
hear a chime. Stop and turn off the vehicle, check the
door for obstacles, and close the door again. Check
to see if the message still appears on the DIC. Press the
select button to acknowledge this message and clear
it from the DIC display.
If you ever see the SERVICE STABILITRAK message,
it means there may be a problem with your StabiliTrak®
system. If you see this message, try to reset the
system by performing the following: stop; turn off the
engine; then start the engine again. If the SERVICE
STABILITRAK message still comes on, it means there
is a problem. You should see your GM dealer for
service. The vehicle is safe to drive, however, you do
not have the benefit of StabiliTrak®, so reduce your
speed and drive accordingly. Press the select button
to acknowledge this message and clear it from the
DIC display.
SERVICE AIR BAG
If there is a problem with the airbag system this
message will be displayed on the DIC. Have your
GM dealer inspect the system for problems. See Airbag
page 1-58 for more information. Press the select button
to acknowledge this message and clear it from the
DIC display.
3-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To limit wheel spin and realize the full benefits of the
stability enhancement system, you should normally
leave StabiliTrak® on. However, you should turn
StabiliTrak® off if your vehicle gets stuck in sand, mud,
ice, or snow and you want to rock your vehicle to
attempt to free it, or if you are driving in extreme off-road
conditions and require more wheel spin. See If Your
page 4-44. To turn the StabiliTrak® system back on,
press the StabiliTrak® button again.
STABILITRAK ACTIVE
The STABILITRAK ACTIVE message will be displayed
anytime the system activates to maintain vehicle
stability. Any combination of engine speed management,
brake traction control, and stability control will display
the STABILITRAK ACTIVE message on the DIC.
STABILITRAK NOT READY
The STABILITRAK NOT READY message may be
displayed if driving conditions delay system initialization.
This is normal. Once the system initializes, the
STABILITRAK NOT READY message will no longer be
displayed on the DIC.
There are several conditions that can cause this
message to appear.
• The message may be displayed if the brake system
warning light is on. See Brake System Warning
STABILITRAK OFF
• The message will be displayed if the vehicle is
shifted into 4LO.
The STABILITRAK OFF message will be displayed
when you press the StabiliTrak® button for more than
five seconds or when stability control has been
automatically disabled. The StabiliTrak® button is
located on the transmission shift handle.
The message will turn off as soon as the conditions that
caused the message to be displayed are no longer
present.
3-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TIGHTEN FUEL CAP
TRACTION CONTROL OFF
If the vehicle’s fuel cap is not tightened properly, this
message may appear on the DIC and a chime will
sound. Fully reinstall the fuel cap. See Filling the Tank
on page 5-8. The diagnostic system can determine
if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed. A
loose or missing fuel cap will allow fuel to evaporate
into the atmosphere. The DIC message will remain on
until the message is cancelled with the return button
on the steering wheel. The DIC message will also
be cancelled if the ignition is turned off.
The TRACTION CONTROL OFF message will be
displayed when you momentarily press the StabiliTrak®
button located on the transmission shift handle. In
this mode, stability control and the brake-traction control
are functional. Engine speed management will be
modified and the driven wheels can spin more freely.
on page 4-9.
TURN SIGNAL ON
The DIC message and the Service Engine Soon light
may come on again during a second trip if the fuel cap is
still not tightened properly. See Malfunction Indicator
If a turn signal is left on for 3/4 of a mile (1.2 km), this
message will appear on the display and you will hear a
chime. Move the turn signal/multifunction lever to the
off position. Press the select button to acknowledge this
message and clear it from the DIC display.
3-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lock Doors
DIC Vehicle Customization
Press the customization button until LOCK DOORS: IN
GEAR appears in the display. To select your
preference for automatic locking, press the select button
while LOCK DOORS: IN GEAR is displayed on the
DIC. Pressing the select button will scroll through the
following choices:
Your vehicle may have customization capabilities that
allow you to program some features to one setting
based on your preference. All of the customizable
options listed may not be available on your vehicle. Only
the options available will be displayed on your Driver
Information Center (DIC).
LOCK DOORS: IN GEAR (default): The doors will lock
The default settings for the customization features were
set when your vehicle left the factory, but may have
been changed from their default state since then.
when the vehicle is shifted out of PARK (P).
LOCK DOORS: WITH SPEED: The doors will lock
when the vehicle speed is above 8 mph (13 km/h) for
three seconds.
To change feature preferences, make sure the ignition
is on and the vehicle is in PARK (P).
Press the customization button to scroll through the
available customizable options.
Choose one of the available options and press the
customization button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it and move on to the next feature. For more
information on automatic door locks, see Programmable
After pressing the customization button, VEHICLE
SETTINGS will momentarily display before going to a
customization option.
3-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Unlock Doors
Lock Feedback
Press the customization button until UNLOCK DOORS:
IN PARK appears in the display. To select your
preference for automatic unlocking, press the select
button while UNLOCK DOORS: IN PARK is displayed
on the DIC. Pressing the select button will scroll through
the following choices:
Press the customization button until LOCK FEEDBACK:
BOTH appears in the display. To select your preference
for the feedback you receive when locking the vehicle
with the remote keyless entry transmitter, press the
select button while LOCK FEEDBACK: BOTH is
displayed on the DIC. Pressing the select button will
scroll through the following choices:
UNLOCK DOORS: IN PARK (default): All of the doors
will unlock when the vehicle is shifted into PARK (P).
LOCK FEEDBACK: BOTH (default): The parking
lamps will flash each time you press the button with the
lock symbol on the remote keyless entry transmitter
and the horn will chirp the second time you press the
lock button.
UNLOCK DRIVER: IN PARK: The driver’s door will be
unlocked when the vehicle is shifted into PARK (P).
UNLOCK DOORS: KEY OUT: All of the doors
will unlock when the key is taken out of the ignition.
LOCK FEEDBACK: OFF: There will be no feedback
when locking the vehicle.
UNLOCK DOORS: MANUALLY: The doors will not be
unlocked automatically.
LOCK FEEDBACK: LAMPS: The parking lamps will
flash each time you press the button with the lock
symbol on the remote keyless entry transmitter.
Choose one of the available options and press the
customization button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it and move on to the next feature. For more
information on automatic door locks, see Programmable
LOCK FEEDBACK: HORN: The horn will chirp the
second time you press the button with the lock symbol
on the remote keyless entry transmitter.
Choose one of the available options and press the
customization button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it and move on to the next feature.
3-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Unlock Feedback
Headlamp Delay
Press the customization button until UNLOCK
FEEDBACK: LAMPS appears in the display. To select
your preference for the feedback you will receive
when unlocking the vehicle with the remote keyless
entry transmitter, press the select button while UNLOCK
FEEDBACK: LAMPS is displayed on the DIC. Pressing
the select button will scroll through the following
choices:
Press the customization button until HEADLAMP
DELAY: 10 SEC appears in the display. To select your
preference for how long the headlamps will stay on
when you turn off the vehicle, press the select button
while HEADLAMP DELAY: 10 SEC is displayed on
the DIC. Pressing the select button will scroll through
the following choices:
• HEADLAMP DELAY: 10 SEC (default)
• HEADLAMP DELAY: 20 SEC
• HEADLAMP DELAY: 40 SEC
• HEADLAMP DELAY: 1 MIN
• HEADLAMP DELAY: 2 MIN
• HEADLAMP DELAY: 3 MIN
• HEADLAMP DELAY: OFF
UNLOCK FEEDBACK: LAMPS (default): The parking
lamps will flash each time you press the button with the
unlock symbol on the remote keyless entry transmitter.
UNLOCK FEEDBACK: HORN: The horn will chirp the
second time you press the button with the unlock
symbol on the remote keyless entry transmitter.
UNLOCK FEEDBACK: BOTH: The parking lamps will
flash each time you press the button with the unlock
symbol on the remote keyless entry transmitter and the
horn will chirp the second time you press the unlock
button.
The amount of time you choose will be the amount of
time that the headlamps stay on after you turn off
the vehicle. If you choose OFF, the headlamps will turn
off as soon as you turn off the vehicle.
UNLOCK FEEDBACK: OFF: There will be no feedback
when unlocking the vehicle.
Choose one of the available options and press the
customization button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it and move on to the next feature.
Choose one of the available options and press the
customization button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it and move on to the next feature.
3-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Perimeter Lights
Easy Exit Seat
Press the customization button until PERIMETER
LIGHTS: ON appears in the display. To select your
preference for perimeter lighting, press the select button
while PERIMETER LIGHTS: ON is displayed on the
DIC. Pressing the select button will scroll through
the following choices:
Press the customization button until EASY EXIT SEAT:
OFF appears in the display. To select your preference
for seat position exit, press the select button while EASY
EXIT SEAT: OFF is displayed on the DIC. Pressing
the select button will scroll through the following choices:
EASY EXIT SEAT: OFF (default): No seat exit recall
will occur.
PERIMETER LIGHTS: ON (default): The headlamps
and back-up lamps will come on for 40 seconds, if
it is dark enough outside, when you unlock the vehicle
with the remote keyless entry transmitter.
EASY EXIT SEAT: ON: The driver’s seat will move to
the exit position when the key is removed from the
ignition.
PERIMETER LIGHTS: OFF: The perimeter lights will
not come on when you unlock the vehicle with the
remote keyless entry transmitter.
Choose one of the available options and press the
customization button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it and move on to the next feature. For more
information on seat position exit, see “Easy Exit Seat”
Choose one of the available options and press the
customization button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it and move on to the next feature.
3-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seat Recall
Curb View
Press the customization button until SEAT RECALL:OFF
appears in the display. To select your preference for
recall of the driver’s memory seat, mirrors, and
adjustable pedals, if equipped, press the select button
while SEAT RECALL:OFF is displayed on the DIC.
Pressing the select button will scroll through the
following choices:
Press the customization button until CURB VIEW: OFF
appears in the display. To select your preference for
curb view, press the select button while CURB VIEW:
OFF is displayed on the DIC. Pressing the select button
will scroll through the following choices:
CURB VIEW: OFF (default): The passenger’s outside
mirror will not be tilted down when the vehicle is
shifted into REVERSE (R).
SEAT RECALL: OFF (default): The driver’s memory
seat, mirrors, and adjustable pedals position you
saved will only be recalled when the memory
button 1 or 2 is pressed.
CURB VIEW: PASSENGER: The passenger’s outside
mirror will be tilted down when the vehicle is shifted
into REVERSE (R).
SEAT RECALL: AT KEY IN: The driver’s memory
seat, mirrors, and adjustable pedals position you saved
will be recalled when you put the key in the ignition.
When the vehicle is placed in PARK (P) or in any
forward gear, the mirror will return to the normal driving
position, following a short delay.
SEAT RECALL: ON REMOTE: The driver’s memory
seat, mirrors, and adjustable pedals position you saved
will be recalled when you unlock the vehicle with the
remote keyless entry transmitter.
Choose one of the available options and press the
customization button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it and move on to the next feature. For more
information on tilt mirror in reverse, see Outside Curb
Choose one of the available options and press the
customization button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it and move on to the next feature. For more
information on the memory seat feature, see Memory
3-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alarm Warning
Language
Press the customization button until ALARM WARNING:
BOTH appears in the display. To select your preference
for alarm warning, press the select button while
ALARM WARNING: BOTH is displayed on the DIC.
Pressing the select button will scroll through the
following choices:
Press the customization button until LANGUAGE:
ENGLISH appears in the display. To select your
preference for display language, press the select button
while LANGUAGE: ENGLISH is displayed on the
DIC. Pressing the select button will scroll through the
following languages:
• ENGLISH (default)
• FRANCAIS (French)
• ESPANOL (Spanish)
ALARM WARNING: BOTH (default): The headlamps
will flash and the horn will chirp when the alarm is
active.
ALARM WARNING: HORN: The horn will chirp when
the alarm is active.
Choose one of the available options and press the
customization button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it and move on to the next feature.
ALARM WARNING: LAMPS: The headlamps will flash
when the alarm is active.
If you accidentally choose a language that you do not
want or understand, press and hold the customization
button and the trip information button at the same
time. The DIC will begin scrolling through the languages
in their particular language. English will be in English,
Francais will be in French, and Espanol will be in
Spanish. When you see the language that you would
like, release both buttons. The DIC will then display the
information in the language you chose.
ALARM WARNING: OFF: There will be no alarm
warning on activation.
Choose one of the available options and press the
customization button while your choice is displayed on
the DIC to select it and move on to the next feature.
For more information on alarm warning type, see
You can also scroll through the different languages
by pressing and holding the trip reset stem for
four seconds, as long as you are in the odometer mode.
3-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Units
Audio System(s)
Determine which radio your vehicle has and then read the
pages following to familiarize yourself with its features.
Press the customization button until UNITS: U.S.
(ENGLISH) appears in the display. To select English or
metric, press the select button while UNITS: U.S.
(ENGLISH) is displayed on the DIC. Pressing the select
button will scroll through the following choices:
Driving without distraction is a necessity for a safer
By taking a few moments to read this manual and
get familiar with your vehicle’s audio system, you can
use it with less effort, as well as take advantage of
its features. While your vehicle is parked, set up your
audio system by presetting your favorite radio stations,
setting the tone, and adjusting the speakers. Then,
when driving conditions permit, you can tune to
your favorite stations using the presets and steering
wheel controls if the vehicle has them.
• UNITS: U.S. (ENGLISH) (default)
• UNITS: METRIC (km/L)
• UNITS: METRIC (L/100 km)
If U.S. (ENGLISH) is chosen, all information will be
displayed in English units. For example, distance will be
displayed in miles (mi) and fuel economy in miles per
gallon (MPG). If METRIC (km/L) is chosen, all
information will be displayed in metric units. For
example, distance will be displayed in kilometers (km)
and fuel economy in kilometers per liter (km/L). If
METRIC (L/100 km) is chosen, all information will be
displayed in metric units. For example, distance will be
displayed in kilometers (km) and fuel economy in
liters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km).
{CAUTION:
This system provides you with a far greater
access to audio stations and song listings.
Giving extended attention to entertainment
tasks while driving can cause a crash and you
or others can be injured or killed. Always keep
your eyes on the road and your mind on the
drive — avoid engaging in extended searching
while driving.
Choose one of the available options and press the
customization button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it and exit out of the customizable options.
3-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keeping your mind on the drive is important for safe
page 4-2.
Notice: The chime signals related to safety belts,
parking brake, and other functions of your vehicle
operate through the radio/entertainment system.
If that equipment is replaced or additional equipment
is added to your vehicle, the chimes may not
work. Make sure that replacement or additional
equipment is compatible with your vehicle before
installing it. See Accessories and Modifications
on page 5-3.
Here are some ways in which you can help avoid
distraction while driving.
While your vehicle is parked:
• Familiarize yourself with all of its controls.
• Familiarize yourself with its operation.
Your vehicle has a feature called Retained Accessory
Power (RAP). With RAP, the audio system can be
played even after the ignition is turned off. See Retained
information.
• Set up your audio system by presetting your
favorite radio stations, setting the tone, and
adjusting the speakers. Then, when driving
conditions permit, you can tune to your favorite
radio stations using the presets and steering wheel
controls if the vehicle has them.
Notice: Before adding any sound equipment to
your vehicle, such as an audio system, CD player,
CB radio, mobile telephone, or two-way radio, make
sure that it can be added by checking with your
dealer. Also, check federal rules covering mobile
radio and telephone units. If sound equipment can
be added, it is very important to do it properly.
Added sound equipment may interfere with
the operation of your vehicle’s engine, radio, or
other systems, and even damage them. Your
vehicle’s systems may interfere with the operation
of sound equipment that has been added.
3-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting the Time
Radio with CD (Base)
The radio may have a button marked with an H or HR to
represent hours and an M or MN to represent minutes.
Press and hold the hour button until the correct hour
appears on the display. AM or PM will appear on
the display for morning or evening hours. Press and
hold the minute button until the correct minute appears
on the display. The time can be set with the ignition
on or off.
To synchronize the time with an FM station broadcasting
Radio Data System (RDS) information, press and
hold the hour and minute buttons at the same time until
UPDATED and the clock symbol appear on the
display. If the time is not available from the station, NO
UPDAT will appear on the display.
Base Radio Shown, Bose® Similar
RDS time is broadcast once a minute. After tuning to an
RDS broadcast station, it may take a few minutes for
the time to update.
If your vehicle has the Bose® audio system, your
vehicle will have six Bose® amplified speakers.
3-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Radio Data System (RDS)
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
The audio system has a Radio Data System (RDS).
RDS features are available for use only on FM stations
that broadcast RDS information.
XM™ is a satellite radio service that is based in the 48
contiguous Untied States and in Canada (if available).
XM™ offers over 100 coast to coast channels including
music, news, sports, talk, and children’s programming.
XM™ provides digital quality audio and text information
that includes song title and artist name. A service
fee is required in order to receive the XM™ service. For
more information, contact XM™ at www.xmradio.com
or call 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
With RDS, the radio can do the following:
• Seek to stations broadcasting the selected type of
programming
• Receive announcements concerning local and
national emergencies
Playing the Radio
• Display messages from radio stations
This system relies upon receiving specific information
from these stations and will only work when the
information is available. In rare cases, a radio station
may broadcast incorrect information that will cause
the radio features to work improperly. If this happens,
contact the radio station.
PWR (Power): Press this knob to turn the system on
and off.
o VOL p(Volume): Turn this knob to increase or to
decrease the volume.
INFO (Information): When the ignition is off, press this
knob to display the time.
While the radio is tuned to an RDS station, the station
name or call letters will appear on the display instead of
the frequency. RDS stations may also provide the
time of day, a program type (PTY) for current
programming, and the name of the program
being broadcast.
For RDS, press the INFO knob to change what appears
on the display while using RDS. The display options
are station name, RDS station frequency, PTY, and the
name of the program (if available).
3-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For XM™ (if equipped), press the INFO knob while in
XM™ mode to retrieve four different categories of
information related to the current song or channel:
Artist, Song Title, Category or PTY, Channel
Number/Channel Name.
Finding a Station
BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1, FM2,
AM, or XM1 or XM2 (if equipped). The display will
show the selection.
To change the default on the display, press the INFO
knob until you see the display you want, then press and
hold the knob until you hear a beep. The selected
display will now be the default.
TUNE: Turn this knob to select radio stations.
©SEEK ¨: Press either the SEEK or the TYPE
arrows to go to the next or to the previous station and
stay there.
AUTO VOL (Automatic Volume): With automatic
volume, the audio system will adjust automatically to
make up for road and wind noise as you drive by
increasing the volume as vehicle speed increases.
The radio will only seek stations with a strong signal
that are in the selected band.
©SCAN ¨: Press and hold either the SCAN or the
TYPE arrows for two seconds until SCAN appears
on the display and you hear a beep. The radio will go to
a station, play for a few seconds, then go on to the
next station. Press either the SCAN or the TYPE arrows
again to stop scanning.
Set the volume at the desired level. Press this button to
select LOW, MEDIUM, or HIGH. AVOL will appear
on the display. Each higher setting will provide more
volume compensation at faster vehicle speeds. To turn
automatic volume off, press this button until AVOL
OFF appears on the display.
To scan preset stations, press and hold either the
SCAN or the TYPE arrows for more than four seconds.
PSCN will appear on the display and you will hear a
double beep. The radio will go to a preset station, play
for a few seconds, then go on to the next preset
station. Press either the SCAN or the TYPE arrows
again to stop scanning presets.
The radio will only scan stations with a strong signal
that are in the selected band.
3-70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Preset Stations
Setting the Tone
(Bass/Midrange/Treble)
Up to 30 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM,
six XM1 and six XM2 (if equipped), can be programed
on the six numbered pushbuttons, by performing
the following steps:
AUDIO: Push and release the AUDIO knob until BASS,
MID (without Bose®), or TREB appears on the display.
Turn the knob to increase or to decrease. The
display will show the bass, midrange (without Bose®),
or treble level. If a station is weak or noisy, decrease
the treble.
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, AM, or XM1
or XM2.
To adjust the bass, midrange (without Bose®), or treble
to the middle position while it is displayed, push and
hold the AUDIO knob. The radio will produce one beep
and adjust the display level to the middle position.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever that
numbered pushbutton is pressed, the station
that was set will return for that pushbutton.
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle
position, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone
or speaker control is displayed. ALL CENTERED will
appear on the display, you will hear a beep, and
the display level will be adjusted to the middle position.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
To store an equalization setting to a preset station
perform the following:
1. Tune to the preset station.
AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press this
button to select customized equalization settings
designed for country/western, jazz, talk, pop, rock, and
classical. Selecting CUSTOM or adjusting the tone
controls, returns the EQ to the manual mode.
2. Press and release the AUTO EQ button to select
the equalization setting.
Once the equalization no longer appears on
the display, the equalization will be set for that
preset station.
The radio will save separate AUTO EQ settings for each
preset and source.
If the radio is equipped with the Bose® audio system,
the AUTO EQ settings are either CUSTOM or TALK.
3-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
Finding a Program Type (PTY) Station
(RDS and XM™)
AUDIO: To adjust the balance between the right
and the left speakers, push and release the AUDIO
knob until BAL appears on the display. Turn the knob to
move the sound toward the right or the left speakers.
To select and find a desired PTY perform the following:
1. Press the TYPE button to activate program type
select mode. TYPE and a PTY will appear on the
display.
To adjust the fade between the front and the rear
speakers, push and release the AUDIO knob until FADE
appears on the display. Turn the knob to move the
sound toward the front or the rear speakers.
2. Turn the TYPE knob or press and release the
TYPE button to select a PTY.
3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press and
release either the TYPE or the SEEK arrows to
select and to take you to the PTY’s first station.
To adjust the balance or fade to the middle position
while it is displayed, push the AUDIO knob and hold it
until the radio produces one beep. The balance or
fade will be adjusted to the middle position.
4. To go to another station within that PTY, press the
TYPE button then, press either the TYPE or the
SEEK arrows once.
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle
position, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone
or speaker control is displayed. ALL CENTERED will
appear on the display, you will hear a beep, and
the display level will be adjusted to the middle position.
5. Press either the TYPE or the SEEK arrows twice to
exit program type select mode.
If the radio cannot find the desired program type, NONE
will appear on the display and the radio will return to
the last station you were listening to.
3-72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SCAN: Scan the stations within a PTY by performing
the following:
Setting Preset PTYs (RDS Only)
These buttons have factory PTY presets. Up to 12 PTYs
(six FM1 and six FM2), can be programmed on the
six numbered pushbuttons, by performing the
following steps:
1. Press the TYPE button to activate program type
select mode. TYPE and the last selected PTY will
appear on the display.
2. Turn the TYPE knob or press and release the
TYPE button to select a PTY.
1. Press BAND to select FM1 or FM2.
2. Press the TYPE button to activate program type
select mode. TYPE and the last selected PTY will
appear on the display.
3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press and
hold either the TYPE or the SCAN arrows for
two seconds, and the radio will begin scanning the
stations in the PTY.
3. Turn the TYPE knob or press and release the
TYPE button to select a PTY.
4. Press either the TYPE or the SCAN arrows to
stop scanning.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever that
numbered pushbutton is pressed (while in
program type mode), the PTY that was set will
return.
BAND (Alternate Frequency): Alternate frequency
allows the radio to switch to a stronger station with the
same program type. To turn alternate frequency on,
press and hold BAND for two seconds. AF ON will
appear on the display. The radio may switch to stations
with a stronger frequency.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
To turn alternate frequency off, press and hold BAND
again for two seconds. AF OFF will appear on the
display. The radio will not switch to other stations.
This function does not apply for XM™ Satellite Radio
Service.
3-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RDS Messages
Radio Messages
INFO (Information): If the current station has a
message, the information symbol will appear on the
display. Press this button to see the message. The
message may display the artist, song title, call in phone
numbers, etc.
CAL ERR (Calibration Error): The audio system has
been calibrated for your vehicle from the factory. If
CAL ERR appears on the display, it means that the radio
has not been configured properly for the vehicle and
must be returned to your GM dealer for service.
If the entire message is not displayed, parts of the
message will appear every three seconds. To scroll
through the message, press and release the INFO
button. A new group of words will appear on the display
after every press of the button. Once the complete
message has been displayed, the information symbol
will disappear from the display until another new
message is received. The last message can be
displayed by pressing the INFO button. You can view
the last message until a new message is received
or a different station is tuned to.
LOCKED: This message is displayed when the
THEFTLOCK® system has locked up. Take the vehicle
to your GM dealer for service.
If any error occurs repeatedly, or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your GM dealer.
3-74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
XM™ Radio Messages
Radio Display
Message
Condition
Action Required
XL (Explicit Language
Channels)
XL on the radio display,
after the channel name,
indicates content with
explicit language.
These channels, or any others, can be blocked at a
customer’s request, by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
Updating
Updating
encryption code
The encryption code in the receiver is being updated, and
no action is required. This process should take no longer
than 30 seconds.
No Signal
Loading XM
Loss of signal
The system is functioning correctly, but the vehicle is in a
location that is blocking the XM signal. When you move
into an open area, the signal should return.
Acquiring channel audio
(after 4 second delay)
The audio system is acquiring and processing audio and
text data. No action is needed. This message should
disappear shortly.
CH Off Air
Channel not in service
This channel is not currently in service. Tune to
another channel.
CH Unavail
Channel no
longer available
This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned.
Tune to another station. If this station was one of the
presets, choose another station for that preset button.
No Info
No Info
Artist Name/Feature
not available
No artist information is available at this time on this
channel. The system is working properly.
Song/Program Title
not available
No song title information is available at this time on this
channel. The system is working properly.
3-75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
XM™ Radio Messages (cont’d)
Radio Display
Message
Condition
Action Required
No Info
Category Name not
available
No category information is available at this time on this
channel. The system is working properly.
No Info
No Text/Informational
message available
No text or informational messages are available at this
time on this channel. The system is working properly.
Not Found
XM Locked
No channel available for
the chosen category
There are no channels available for the selected category.
The system is working properly.
Theft lock active
The XM receiver in the vehicle may have previously been
in another vehicle. For security purposes, XM receivers
cannot be swapped between vehicles. If this message is
received after having your vehicle serviced, check with
your GM dealer.
Radio ID
Radio ID label
(channel 0)
If tuned to channel 0, this message will alternate with the
XM Radio 8 digit radio ID label. This label is needed to
activate the service.
Unknown
Radio ID not known
(should only be if
hardware failure)
If this message is received when tuned to channel 0, there
may be a receiver fault. Consult with your GM dealer.
Chk XMRcvr
Hardware failure
If this message does not clear within a short period of time,
the receiver may have a fault. Consult with your GM dealer.
3-76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If there is no apparent damage, try a known good CD.
Playing a CD
Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught in the
CD player. If a CD is recorded on a personal computer
and a description label is needed, try labeling the top of
the recorded CD with a marking pen instead.
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. The
player will pull it in and the CD should begin playing. If
you want to insert a CD with the ignition off, first
press the eject button or the INFO knob.
Notice: If you add any label to a CD, insert more
than one CD into the slot at a time, or attempt
to play scratched or damaged CDs, you could
damage the CD player. When using the CD player,
use only CDs in good condition without any
label, load one CD at a time, and keep the CD player
and the loading slot free of foreign materials,
liquids, and debris.
If the ignition or radio is turned off with the CD in the
player, it will stay in the player. When the ignition
or radio is turned on, the CD will start playing where it
stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.
When a CD is inserted, the CD symbol will appear on
the display. As each new track starts to play, the
track number will appear on the display.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm) single
CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the
smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
later in this section.
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality may be reduced
due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality
of the music that has been recorded, and the way the
CD-R has been handled. There may be an increase
in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in
loading and ejecting. If these problems occur, check
the bottom surface of the CD. If the surface of the CD is
damaged, such as cracked, broken, or scratched, the
CD will not play properly. If the surface of the CD
page 3-142 for more information.
3-77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1 PREV (Previous): Press this pushbutton to go to
the beginning of the current track (if more than
eight seconds have played), or to the beginning of the
previous track (if less than eight seconds have played).
TRACK and the track number will appear on the
display. If this pushbutton is held or pressed more than
once, the player will continue moving backward
through the CD.
4 FWD (Forward): Press and hold this pushbutton to
quickly advance within a track. Press and hold this
pushbutton for less than two seconds to advance at
six times the normal playing speed. Press and hold it for
more than two seconds to advance at 17 times the
normal playing speed. ET and the elapsed time of the
track will appear on the display. Release this pushbutton
to play the passage.
2 NEXT: Press this pushbutton to go to the next track.
TRACK and the track number will appear on the
display. If this pushbutton is held or pressed more than
once, the player will continue moving forward through
the CD.
6 RDM (Random): Press this pushbutton to hear the
tracks in random, rather than sequential, order. RDM ON
will appear on the display. RDM T and the track
number will appear on the display when each track
starts to play. Press this pushbutton again to turn
off random play. RDM OFF will appear on the display.
3 REV (Reverse): Press and hold this pushbutton to
quickly reverse within a track. Press and hold this
pushbutton for less than two seconds to reverse at
six times the normal playing speed. Press and hold it for
more than two seconds to reverse at 17 times the
normal playing speed. ET and the elapsed time of the
track will appear on the display. Release this pushbutton
to play the passage.
©SEEK ¨: Press the left arrow to go to the start
of the current or to the previous track. Press the
right arrow to go to the start of the next track. If either
arrow is pressed more than once, the player will
continue moving backward or forward through the CD.
3-78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
©SCAN ¨: Press and hold either the SCAN or the
TYPE arrows for more than two seconds until SCAN
appears on the display and you hear a beep. The radio
will go to the next track, play for 10 seconds, then go
on to the next track. Press either the SCAN or the TYPE
arrows again, to stop scanning.
CD Messages
If the CD comes out, it could be for one of the following
reasons:
• It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the CD should play.
• You are driving on a very rough road. When the
road becomes smoother, the CD should play.
INFO (Information): Press this knob to see how long
the current track has been playing. ET and the elapsed
time will appear on the display. To change the default
on the display, track or elapsed time, press the
knob until you see the display you want, then press and
hold the knob for two seconds. The radio will produce
one beep and the selected display will now be the
default.
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and
try again.
• There may have been a problem while burning
the CD.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when a
CD is playing. The inactive CD will remain safely
inside the radio for future listening.
• The label may be caught in the CD player.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.
CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to play a CD
when listening to the radio, or to listen to an auxiliary
source (such as rear seat entertainment, if equipped).
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your GM dealer. If the radio displays
an error message, write it down and provide it to
your GM dealer when reporting the problem.
Z(Eject): Press this button to eject a CD. Eject may
be activated with either the ignition or radio off. CDs
may be loaded with the radio and ignition off if this
button is pressed first.
3-79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Radio Data System (RDS)
Radio with CD (MP3)
The audio system has a Radio Data System (RDS).
RDS features are available for use only on FM stations
that broadcast RDS information.
With RDS, the radio can do the following:
• Seek to stations broadcasting the selected type of
programming
• Receive announcements concerning local and
national emergencies
• Display messages from radio stations
• Seek to stations with traffic announcements
This system relies upon receiving specific information
from these stations and will only work when the
information is available. In rare cases, a radio station
may broadcast incorrect information that will cause
the radio features to work improperly. If this happens,
contact the radio station.
Base Radio Shown, Bose® Similar
If your vehicle has the Bose® audio system, your
vehicle will have six Bose® amplified speakers.
While the radio is tuned to an RDS station, the station
name or call letters will appear on the display instead of
the frequency. RDS stations may also provide the
time of day, a program type (PTY) for current
programming, and the name of the program being
broadcast.
3-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For XM™ (if equipped), press the DISPL knob while in
XM™ mode to retrieve four different categories of
information related to the current song or channel:
Artist, Song Title, Category or PTY, Channel
Number/Channel Name.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
XM™ is a satellite radio service that is based in the 48
contiguous United States and in Canada (if available).
XM™ offers over 100 coast-to-coast channels including
music, news, sports, talk, and children’s programming.
XM™ provides digital quality audio and text information
that includes song title and artist name. A service
fee is required in order to receive the XM™ service. For
more information, contact XM™ at www.xmradio.com
or call 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
To change the default on the display, press the DISPL
knob until you see the display you want, then press
and hold this knob for two seconds. The radio will
produce one beep and the selected display will now be
the default.
AUTO VOL (Automatic Volume): With automatic
volume, the audio system adjusts automatically to make
up for road and wind noise as you drive.
Playing the Radio
PWR (Power): Press this knob to turn the system on
and off.
Set the volume at the desired level. Press this button to
select LOW, MEDIUM, or HIGH. AVOL will appear
on the display. Each higher setting will allow for more
volume compensation at faster vehicle speeds. Then as
you drive, automatic volume increases the volume,
as necessary, to overcome noise at any speed.
The volume level should always sound the same to you
as you drive. NONE will appear on the display if the
radio cannot determine the vehicle speed. To turn
automatic volume off, press this button until OFF
appears on the display.
o VOL p (Volume): Turn this knob to increase or to
decrease the volume.
DISPL (Display): When the ignition is turned off, press
this knob to display the time.
For RDS, press the DISPL knob to change what
appears on the display while using RDS. The display
options are station name, RDS station frequency, PTY,
and the name of the program (if available).
3-81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Finding a Station
Setting Preset Stations
Up to 30 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM,
six XM1 and six XM2 (if equipped)), can be programmed
on the six numbered pushbuttons, by performing the
following steps:
BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1, FM2,
AM, or XM1 or XM2 (if equipped). The display will
show the selection.
o TUNE p: Turn this knob to select radio stations.
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, AM, or XM1
or XM2.
o SEEK p: Press the right or the left arrow to
go to the next or to the previous station and stay there.
3. Tune in the desired station.
The radio will only seek stations with a strong signal
that are in the selected band.
4. Press AUTO EQ to select the equalization.
5. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever that
numbered pushbutton is pressed, the station
that was set will return and the equalization that
was selected will be stored for that pushbutton.
o SCAN p: Press and hold either arrow for more
than two seconds. SCAN will appear on the display and
the radio will produce one beep. The radio will go to
a station, play for a few seconds, then go on to the next
station. Press either arrow again or one of the
pushbuttons to stop scanning presets.
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
To scan preset stations, press and hold either arrow for
more than four seconds. PSCN will appear on the
display and the radio will produce two beeps. The radio
will go to a preset station, play for a few seconds,
then go on to the next preset station. Press either arrow
again or one of the pushbuttons to stop scanning
presets.
The radio will only scan stations with a strong signal
that are in the selected band.
3-82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting the Tone
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
(Bass/Midrange/Treble)
AUDIO: To adjust the balance between the right
and the left speakers, push and release the AUDIO
knob until BAL appears on the display. Turn the knob to
move the sound toward the right or the left speakers.
AUDIO: Push and release the AUDIO knob until BASS,
MID (without Bose®), or TREB appears on the display.
Turn the knob to increase or to decrease. The
display will show the bass, midrange (without Bose®), or
the treble level. If a station is weak or noisy, decrease
the treble.
To adjust the bass, midrange (without Bose®), or the
treble to the middle position while it is displayed,
push and hold the AUDIO knob. The radio will produce
one beep.
To adjust the fade between the front and the rear
speakers, push and release the AUDIO knob until FADE
appears on the display. Turn the knob to move the
sound toward the front or the rear speakers.
To adjust the balance or the fade to the middle position
while it is displayed, push the AUDIO knob, then
push it again and hold it until you hear one beep.
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle
position, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone
or speaker control is displayed. ALL CENTERED will
appear on the display and you will hear a beep.
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle
position, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone
or speaker control is displayed. ALL CENTERED will
appear on the display and you will hear a beep.
AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press this button
to select customized equalization settings designed
for country/western, jazz, talk, pop, rock, and classical.
To return the bass and treble to the manual mode,
push and release the AUTO EQ button until CUSTOM
appears on the display.
If the radio is equipped with the Bose audio system, the
equalization settings are either CUSTOM or TALK.
3-83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
BAND (Alternate Frequency): Alternate frequency
allows the radio to switch to a stronger station with the
same program type. To turn alternate frequency on,
press and hold BAND for two seconds. AF ON will
appear on the display. The radio may switch to stations
with a stronger frequency.
Finding a Program Type (PTY) Station
(RDS and XM™)
To select and find a desired PTY perform the following:
1. Turn the P-TYPE knob to select a PTY.
2. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press the
SEEK TYPE button to select and to take you to the
PTY’s first station.
To turn alternate frequency off, press and hold BAND
again for two seconds. AF OFF will appear on the
display. The radio will not switch to other stations.
3. To go to another station within that PTY, press the
SEEK TYPE button twice to display the PTY and
then to go to another station.
This function does not apply for XM™ Satellite
Radio Service.
4. Press P-TYPE knob to exit program type
select mode.
RDS Messages
ALERT!: Alert warns of local or national emergencies.
When an alert announcement comes on the current
radio station, ALERT! will appear on the display. You will
hear the announcement, even if the volume is low or
a CD is playing. If a CD is playing, play will stop during
the announcement. Alert announcements cannot be
turned off.
IF PTY times out and is no longer on the display,
go back to Step 1.
If both PTY and TRAF are on, the radio will search for
stations with the selected PTY and traffic
announcements.
If the radio cannot find the desired program type, NONE
will appear on the display and the radio will return to
the last station you were listening to.
ALERT! will not be affected by tests of the emergency
broadcast system. This feature is not supported by
all RDS stations.
3-84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INFO (Information): If the current station has a
message, the information symbol will appear on the
display. Press this button to see the message. The
message may display the artist, song title, call in phone
numbers, etc.
announcements is found, the radio will stop seeking and
TRAF will appear on the display. If no station is found
that broadcasts traffic announcements, No Traf will
appear on the display.
If TRAF is on the display, press the TRAF button to turn
off the traffic announcements.
If the entire message is not displayed, parts of the
message will appear every three seconds. To scroll
through the message, press and release the INFO
button. A new group of words will appear on the display
after every press of this button. Once the complete
message has been displayed, the information symbol
will disappear from the display until another new
message is received. The last message can be
displayed by pressing the INFO button. You can view
the last message until a new message is received
or a different station is tuned to.
The radio will play the traffic announcement if the
volume is low. The radio will interrupt the play of a CD if
the last tuned station broadcasts traffic announcements.
This function does not apply to XM™ Satellite
Radio Service.
Radio Messages
CAL ERR (Calibration Error): The audio system has
been calibrated for your vehicle from the factory. If
CAL ERR appears on the display it means that the radio
has not been configured properly for your vehicle and
it must be returned to your GM dealer for service.
When a message is not available from a station, No Info
will appear on the display.
TRAF (Traffic): If TRAF appears on the display, the
tuned station broadcasts traffic announcements
and when a traffic announcement comes on the tuned
radio station you will hear it.
LOCKED: This message is displayed when the
THEFTLOCK® system has locked up. Take your vehicle
to your GM dealer for service.
If the station does not broadcast traffic announcements,
press the TRAF button and the radio will seek to a
station that does. When a station that broadcasts traffic
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your GM dealer.
3-85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
XM™ Radio Messages
Radio Display
Message
Condition
Action Required
XL (Explicit Language
Channels)
XL on the radio display,
after the channel name,
indicates content with
explicit language.
These channels, or any others, can be blocked at a
customer’s request, by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
Updating
No Signl
Loading
Updating
encryption code
The encryption code in the receiver is being updated, and no
action is required. This process should take no longer than
30 seconds.
Loss of signal
The system is functioning correctly, but the vehicle is in a
location that is blocking the XM™ signal. When the vehicle is
moved into an open area, the signal should return.
Acquiring channel audio
(after 4 second delay)
The radio system is acquiring and processing audio and
text data. No action is needed. This message should
disappear shortly.
Off Air
Channel not in service
This channel is not currently in service. Tune to
another channel.
CH Unavl
Channel no
longer available
This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned.
Tune to another station. If this station was one of the
presets, choose another station for that preset button.
No Info
No Info
Artist Name/Feature
not available
No artist information is available at this time on this channel.
The system is working properly.
Song/Program Title
not available
No song title information is available at this time on this
channel. The system is working properly.
3-86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
XM™ Radio Messages (cont’d)
Radio Display
Message
Condition
Action Required
No Info
Category Name
not available
No category information is available at this time on this
channel. The system is working properly.
No Info
No Text/Informational
message available
No text or informational messages are available at this
time on this channel. The system is working properly.
Not Found
XM Lock
No channel available for
the chosen category
There are no channels available for the selected category.
The system is working properly.
Theft lock active
The XM™ receiver in your vehicle may have previously
been in another vehicle. For security purposes, XM™
receivers cannot be swapped between vehicles. If this
message is received after having your vehicle serviced,
check with your GM dealer.
Radio ID
Unknown
Check XM
Radio ID label
(channel 0)
If tuned to channel 0, this message will alternate with the
XM™ Radio eight digit radio ID label. This label is needed
to activate the service.
Radio ID not known
(should only be if
hardware failure)
If this message is received when tuned to channel 0, there
may be a receiver fault. Consult with your GM dealer.
Hardware failure
If this message does not clear within a short period of time,
the receiver may have a fault. Consult with your GM dealer.
3-87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If there is no apparent damage, try a known good CD.
Playing a CD
Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught in the
CD player. If a CD is recorded on a personal computer
and a description label is needed, try labeling the top of
the recorded CD with a marking pen instead.
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. The
player will pull it in, and READING will appear on
the display. The CD should begin playing. If you want to
insert a CD with the ignition off, first press the eject
button or the DISPL knob.
Notice: If you add any label to a CD, insert more
than one CD into the slot at a time, or attempt
to play scratched or damaged CDs, you could
damage the CD player. When using the CD player,
use only CDs in good condition without any
label, load one CD at a time, and keep the CD player
and the loading slot free of foreign materials,
liquids, and debris.
If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in the
player it will stay in the player. When the ignition or radio
is turned on, the CD will start to play where it stopped,
if it was the last selected audio source.
When the CD is inserted, the CD symbol will appear on
the display. As each new track starts to play, the
track number will appear on the display.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
later in this section.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm) single
CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the
smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.
1 FLD x (Previous): This pushbutton is inoperable
when using a non-MP3 CD.
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality may be reduced
due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality
of the music that has been recorded, and the way the
CD-R has been handled. There may be an increase
in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in
loading and ejecting. If these problems occur, check
the bottom surface of the CD. If the surface of the CD is
damaged, such as cracked, broken, or scratched, the
CD will not play properly. If the surface of the CD
page 3-142 for more information.
2 FLD w (Next): This pushbutton is inoperable when
using a non-MP3 CD.
3 REV (Reverse): Press and hold this pushbutton to
reverse quickly within a track. Press and hold this
pushbutton for less than two seconds to reverse at 10
times the normal playing speed. Press and hold it
for more than two seconds to reverse at 20 times the
normal playing speed. Release this pushbutton to
play the passage. ET and the elapsed time of the track
will appear on the display.
3-88
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 FWD (Forward): Press and hold this pushbutton to
advance quickly within a track. Press and hold this
pushbutton for less than two seconds to advance at
six times the normal playing speed. Press and hold it for
more than two seconds to advance at 17 times the
normal playing speed. Release this pushbutton to play
the passage. ET and the elapsed time of the track
will appear on the display.
o TUNE p: Turning the TUNE knob will fast track
reverse or advance through tracks. The track number
will appear on the display for each track.
DISPL (Display): Press this knob to see how long the
current track has been playing. ET and the elapsed
time of the track will appear on the display. To change
the default on the display, track or elapsed time,
press this knob until you see the display you want, then
press and hold the knob for two seconds. The radio
will produce one beep and the selected display will now
be the default.
6 RDM (Random): Press this pushbutton to hear the
tracks in random, rather than sequential, order. RDM ON
will appear on the display. RDM and the track number
will appear on the display when each track starts to play.
Press RDM again to turn off random play. RDM OFF
will appear on the display.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when a
CD is playing. The inactive CD will remain safely
inside the radio for future listening.
o SEEK p: Press the left arrow to go to the start of
the current or the previous track. Press the right
arrow to go to the start of the next track. Pressing either
arrow for more than two seconds will scan the previous
or next tracks at five to eight seconds per track.
SCAN and the track number will appear on the display.
Press either arrow to stop scanning.
CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to play a CD
when listening to the radio. The CD symbol will appear
on the display when a CD is loaded.
Z (Eject): Press this button to eject a CD. Eject may
be activated with either the ignition or radio off. CDs
may be loaded with the ignition and radio off if this
button is pressed first.
3-89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The player will be able to read and play a maximum of
50 folders, 50 playlists, 10 sessions, and 255 files.
Long file names, folder names, or playlist names may
use more disc memory space than necessary. To
conserve space on the disc, minimize the length of the
file, folder or playlist names. You can also play an
MP3 CD that was recorded using no file folders. The
system can support up to 11 folders in depth, though,
keep the depth of the folders to a minimum in order
to keep down the complexity and confusion in trying to
locate a particular folder during playback. If a CD
contains more than the maximum of 50 folders,
50 playlists, 10 sessions, and 255 files the player will let
you access and navigate up to the maximum, but all
items over the maximum will be ignored.
Using an MP3 CD
MP3 Format
If you burn your own MP3 disc on a personal computer:
• Make sure the MP3 files are recorded on a
CD-R disc.
• Do not mix standard audio and MP3 files on
one disc.
• Make sure playlists have a.m3u or .wpl extension,
other file extensions may not work.
• Files can be recorded with a variety of fixed or
variable bit rates. Song title, artist name, and album
will be available for display by the radio when
recorded using ID3 tags version 1 and 2.
Root Directory
• Create a folder structure that makes it easy to find
songs while driving. Organize songs by albums
using one folder for each album. Each folder
or album should contain 18 songs or less.
The root directory will be treated as a folder. If the root
directory has compressed audio files, the directory
will be displayed as F1 ROOT. All files contained directly
under the root directory will be accessed prior to any
root directory folders. However, playlists (Px) will always
be accessed before root folders or files.
• Make sure to finalize the disc when burning an MP3
disc, using multiple sessions. It is usually better to
burn the disc all at once.
3-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Empty Directory or Folder
Order of Play
If a root directory or a folder exists somewhere in the
file structure that contains only folders/subfolders and no
compressed files directly beneath them, the player will
advance to the next folder in the file structure that
contains compressed audio files and the empty folder
will not be displayed or numbered.
Tracks will be played in the following order:
• Play will begin from the first track in the first playlist
and will continue sequentially through all tracks in
each playlist. When the last track of the last playlist
has been played, play will continue from the first
track of the first playlist.
No Folder
• If the CD does not contain any playlists, then play
will begin from the first track under the root
directory. When all tracks from the root directory
have been played, play will continue from files
according to their numerical listing. After playing the
last track from the last folder, play will begin
again at the first track of the first folder or root
directory.
When the CD contains only compressed files, the files
will be located under the root folder. The next and
previous folder functions will have no function on a CD
that was recorded without folders or playlists. When
displaying the name of the folder the radio will
display ROOT.
When the CD contains only playlists and compressed
audio files, but no folders, all files will be located under
the root folder. The folder down and the folder up
buttons will search playlists (Px) first and then go to the
root folder. When the radio displays the name of the
folder the radio will display ROOT.
When play enters a new folder, the display will not
automatically show the new folder name unless
you have chosen the folder mode as the default display.
See DISPL later in this section for more information.
The new track name will appear on the display.
3-91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in the
player it will stay in the player. When the ignition or radio
is turned on, the CD will start to play where it stopped,
if it was the last selected audio source.
File System and Naming
The song name that will be displayed will be the song
name that is contained in the ID3 tag. If the song name
is not present in the ID3 tag, then the radio will
display the file name without the extension (such as
.mp3) as the track name.
As each new track starts to play, the track number will
appear on the display.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm) single
CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the
smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.
Track names longer than 32 characters or four pages
will be shortened. The display will not show parts
of words on the last page of text and the extension of
the filename will not be displayed.
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality may be reduced
due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality
of the music that has been recorded, and the way the
CD-R has been handled. There may be an increase
in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in
loading and ejecting. If these problems occur, check
the bottom surface of the CD. If the surface of the CD is
damaged, such as cracked, broken, or scratched, the
CD will not play properly. If the surface of the CD
page 3-142 for more information.
Preprogrammed Playlists
You can access preprogrammed playlists which were
created by WinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or Real
Jukebox™ software, however, you will not have editing
capability. These playlists will be treated as special
folders containing compressed audio song files.
Playing an MP3
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. The
player will pull it in, and READING will appear on
the display. The CD should begin playing and the CD
symbol will appear on the display. If you want to insert a
CD with the ignition off, first press the eject button or
the DISPL knob.
If there is no apparent damage, try a known good CD.
3-92
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught in the
CD player. If a CD is recorded on a personal computer
and a description label is needed, try labeling the top of
the recorded CD with a marking pen instead.
3 REV (Reverse): Press and hold this pushbutton to
reverse quickly within a track. Press and hold this
pushbutton for less than two seconds to reverse at
10 times the normal playing speed. Press and hold it for
more than two seconds to reverse at 20 times the
normal playing speed. Release this pushbutton to play
the passage. REV and the elapsed time of the track
will appear on the display.
Notice: If you add any label to a CD, insert more
than one CD into the slot at a time, or attempt
to play scratched or damaged CDs, you could
damage the CD player. When using the CD player,
use only CDs in good condition without any
label, load one CD at a time, and keep the CD player
and the loading slot free of foreign materials,
liquids, and debris.
4 FWD (Forward): Press and hold this pushbutton to
advance quickly within a track. Press and hold this
pushbutton for less than two seconds to advance at
10 times the normal playing speed. Press and hold it for
more than two seconds to advance at 20 times the
normal playing speed. Release this pushbutton to play
the passage. FWD and the elapsed time of the track
will appear on the display.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
later in this section.
1 FLD x (Previous Folder): Press this pushbutton to
go to the first track in the previous folder. Pressing
this button while in folder random mode will take you to
the first track in the previous folder and random the
tracks in that folder.
6 RDM (Random): To random the tracks in the current
folder or playlist, press and release this pushbutton.
FLDR RDM will appear on the display. Once all of the
tracks in the current folder or playlist have been
played the system will move on to the next folder or
playlist and play all of the tracks in random order.
2 FLD w (Next Folder): Press this pushbutton to go
to the first track in the next folder. Pressing this
button while in folder random mode will take you to the
first track in the next folder and random the tracks in
that folder.
3-93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To random all the tracks on the CD, press and hold this
pushbutton for two seconds. You will hear a beep
and DISC RDM will appear on the display. This feature
will not work with playlists.
DISPL (Display): Press this knob to switch between
track mode, folder/playlist mode, and time of day mode.
The display will show only eight characters, but there
can be up to four pages of text. If there are more
than eight characters in the song, folder, or playlist
name, they will be displayed if the knob is not pressed
again, pressing this knob within two seconds will
take you to the next display mode.
When in random, pressing and releasing either SEEK
arrow will take you to the next or previous random track.
Press and release this pushbutton again to turn off
random play. NO RDM will appear on the display.
• Track mode will display the current track number
and the ID3 tag song name.
o SEEK p: Press the left arrow to go to the start of
the previous track. Press the right arrow to go to the
start of the next track. Pressing either arrow for
more than two seconds will search the previous or next
tracks at two tracks per second. Release the button
to stop searching and to play the track.
• Folder/playlist mode will display the current folder or
playlist number and the folder/playlist name.
• Time of day mode will display the time of day and
the ID3 tag song name.
To change the default on the display, press the DISPL
knob until you see the display you want, then press
and hold this knob for two seconds. The radio will
produce one beep and the selected display will now be
the default.
o TUNE p: Turning the TUNE knob will fast track
reverse or advance through the tracks in all folders
or playlists. The track number and file name will appear
on the display for each track. Turning this knob while
in random will fast track reverse or advance the tracks in
sequential order.
3-94
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INFO (Information): INFO will appear on the display
whenever a current track has ID3 tag information. Press
this button to display the artist name and album
contained in the tag. INFO will disappear from the
display when the information in the ID3 tag has finished.
CD Messages
CHECK CD: If this message appears on the display
and/or the CD comes out, it could be for one of the
following reasons:
• It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the CD should play.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when a
CD is playing. The inactive CD will remain safely
inside the radio for future listening.
• You are driving on a very rough road. When the
road becomes smoother, the CD should play.
CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to play a CD
when listening to the radio. The CD symbol will appear
on the display when a CD is loaded.
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and
try again.
Z (Eject): Press this button to eject a CD. Eject may
be activated with either the ignition or radio off. CDs
may be loaded with the ignition and radio off if this
button is pressed first.
• The format of the CD may not be compatible. See
“MP3 Format” earlier in this section.
• There may have been a problem while burning
the CD.
• The label may be caught in the CD player.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your GM dealer. If the radio displays
an error message, write it down and provide it to
your GM dealer when reporting the problem.
3-95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Radio Data System (RDS)
Radio with Cassette and CD
The audio system has a Radio Data System (RDS).
RDS features are available for use only on FM stations
that broadcast RDS information.
With RDS, the radio can do the following:
• Seek to stations broadcasting the selected type of
programming
• Receive announcements concerning local and
national emergencies
• Display messages from radio stations
This system relies upon receiving specific information
from these stations and will only work when the
information is available. In rare cases, a radio station
may broadcast incorrect information that will cause
the radio features to work improperly. If this happens,
contact the radio station.
Base Radio Shown, Bose® Similar
If your vehicle has the Bose® audio system, your
vehicle will have six Bose® amplified speakers.
While the radio is tuned to an RDS station, the station
name or call letters will appear on the display instead of
the frequency. RDS stations may also provide the
time of day, a program type (PTY) for current
programming, and the name of the program being
broadcast.
3-96
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For XM™ (if equipped), press the INFO knob while in
XM™ mode to retrieve four different categories of
information related to the current song or channel:
Artist, Song Title, Category or PTY, Channel
Number/Channel Name.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
XM™ is a satellite radio service that is based in the 48
contiguous United States and in Canada (if available).
XM™ offers over 100 coast-to-coast channels including
music, news, sports, talk, and children’s programming.
XM™ provides digital quality audio and text information
that includes song title and artist name. A service
fee is required in order to receive the XM™ service. For
more information, contact XM™ at www.xmradio.com
or call 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
To change the default on the display, press the INFO
knob until you see the display you want, then press and
hold the knob until the display flashes. The selected
display will now be the default.
AUTO VOL (Automatic Volume): With automatic
volume, the audio system will adjust automatically to
make up for road and wind noise as you drive by
increasing the volume as vehicle speed increases.
Playing the Radio
PWR (Power): Press this knob to turn the system on
and off.
Set the volume at the desired level. Press this button to
select LOW, MEDIUM, or HIGH. AVOL will appear
on the display. Each higher setting will provide more
volume compensation at faster vehicle speeds. To turn
automatic volume off, press this button until AVOL
OFF appears on the display.
o VOL p(Volume): Turn this knob to increase or to
decrease the volume.
INFO (Information): When the ignition is off, press this
knob to display the time.
For RDS, press the INFO knob to change what appears
on the display while using RDS. The display options
are station name, RDS station frequency, PTY, and the
name of the program (if available).
3-97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Finding a Station
Setting Preset Stations
Up to 30 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM,
six XM1 and six XM2 (if equipped)), can be programed
on the six numbered pushbuttons, by performing the
following steps:
BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1, FM2,
AM, or XM1 or XM2 (if equipped). The display will
show the selection.
oTUNE p: Turn this knob to select radio stations.
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, AM, or XM1
or XM2.
©SEEK ¨: Press either the SEEK or the TYPE
arrows to go to the next or to the previous station and
stay there.
3. Tune in the desired station.
The radio will only seek stations with a strong signal
that are in the selected band.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever that
numbered pushbutton is pressed, the station
that was set will return for that pushbutton.
©SCAN ¨: Press and hold either the SCAN or the
TYPE arrows for two seconds until SCAN appears
on the display and you hear a beep. The radio will go to
a station, play for a few seconds, then go on to the
next station. Press either the SCAN or the TYPE arrows
again to stop scanning.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
To store an equalization setting to a preset station
perform the following:
1. Tune to the preset station.
To scan preset stations, press and hold either the
SCAN or the TYPE arrows for more than four seconds.
PSCN will appear on the display and you will hear a
double beep. The radio will go to a preset station, play
for a few seconds, then go on to the next preset
station. Press either the SCAN or the TYPE arrows
again to stop scanning presets.
2. Press and release the AUTO EQ button to select
the equalization setting.
Once the equalization no longer appears on the
display, the equalization will be set for that
preset station.
The radio will only scan stations with a strong signal
that are in the selected band.
3-98
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting the Tone
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
(Bass/Midrange/Treble)
AUDIO: To adjust the balance between the right
and the left speakers, push and release the AUDIO
knob until BAL appears on the display. Turn the knob to
move the sound toward the right or the left speakers.
AUDIO: Push and release the AUDIO knob until BASS,
MID (without Bose®), or TREB appears on the display.
Turn the knob to increase or to decrease. The
display will show the bass, midrange (without Bose®),
or treble level. If a station is weak or noisy, decrease
the treble.
To adjust the bass, midrange (without Bose®), or treble
to the middle position while it is displayed, push and
hold the AUDIO knob. The radio will produce one beep
and adjust the display level to the middle position.
To adjust the fade between the front and the rear
speakers, push and release the AUDIO knob until FADE
appears on the display. Turn the knob to move the
sound toward the front or the rear speakers.
To adjust the balance or fade to the middle position
while it is displayed, push the AUDIO knob and hold it
until the radio produces one beep. The balance or
fade will be adjusted to the middle position.
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle
position, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone
or speaker control is displayed. ALL CENTERED will
appear on the display, you will hear a beep, and
the display level will be adjusted to the middle position.
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle
position, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone
or speaker control is displayed. ALL CENTERED will
appear on the display, you will hear a beep, and
the display level will be adjusted to the middle position.
AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press this
button to select customized equalization settings
designed for country/western, jazz, talk, pop, rock, and
classical. Selecting CUSTOM or changing manual
tone controls, returns the EQ to the manual tone control.
The radio will save separate AUTO EQ settings for
each preset and source.
If the radio is equipped with the Bose® audio system,
the equalization settings are either CUSTOM or TALK.
3-99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press and
hold either the TYPE or the SCAN arrows for
two seconds, and the radio will begin scanning the
stations in the PTY.
Finding a Program Type (PTY) Station
(RDS and XM™)
To select and find a desired PTY perform the following:
4. Press either the TYPE or the SCAN arrows to
stop scanning.
1. Press the TYPE button to activate program type
select mode. TYPE and a PTY will appear on
the display.
BAND (Alternate Frequency): Alternate frequency
allows the radio to switch to a stronger station with the
same program type. To turn alternate frequency on,
press and hold BAND for two seconds. AF ON will
appear on the display. The radio may switch to stations
with a stronger frequency.
2. Turn the TYPE knob or press and release the
TYPE button to select a PTY.
3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press and
release either the TYPE or the SEEK arrows to
select and to take you to the PTY’s first station.
To turn alternate frequency off, press and hold BAND
again for two seconds. AF OFF will appear on the
display. The radio will not switch to other stations.
4. To cancel the seek, press any of the TYPE or
SEEK arrows. This will also exit the PTY mode
and return to the last tuned station.
If the radio cannot find the desired program type, NONE
will appear on the display and the radio will return to
the last station you were listening to.
This function does not apply for XM™ Satellite
Radio Service.
SCAN: Scan the stations within a PTY by performing
the following:
1. Press the TYPE button to activate program type
select mode. TYPE and the last selected PTY will
appear on the display.
2. Turn the TYPE knob or press and release the
TYPE button to select a PTY.
3-100
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the entire message is not displayed, parts of the
message will appear every three seconds. To scroll
through the message, press and release the INFO button.
A new group of words will appear on the display after
every press of the button. Once the complete message
has been displayed, the information symbol will
disappear from the display until another new message is
received. The last message can be displayed by pressing
the INFO button. You can view the last message until a
new message is received or a different station is tuned to.
When a message is not available from a station, No Info
will appear on the display.
Setting Preset PTYs (RDS Only)
These buttons have factory PTY presets. Up to 12 PTYs
(six FM1 and six FM2), can be programmed on the
six numbered pushbuttons, by performing the
following steps:
1. Press BAND to select FM1 or FM2.
2. Press the TYPE button to activate program type
select mode. TYPE and the last selected PTY will
appear on the display.
3. Turn the TYPE knob or press and release the
TYPE button to select a PTY.
Radio Messages
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever that
numbered pushbutton is pressed (while in PTY
select mode), the PTY that was set will return.
CAL ERR (Calibration Error): The audio system has
been calibrated for your vehicle from the factory. If
CAL ERR appears on the display, it means that the radio
has not been configured properly for the vehicle and
must be returned to your GM dealer for service.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
RDS Messages
LOCKED: This message is displayed when the
THEFTLOCK® system has locked up. Take the vehicle
to your GM dealer for service.
INFO (Information): If the current station has a
message, the information symbol will appear on the
display. Press this button to see the message. The
message may display the artist, song title, call in phone
numbers, etc.
If any error occurs repeatedly, or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your GM dealer.
3-101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
XM™ Radio Messages
Radio Display
Message
Condition
Action Required
XL (Explicit Language
Channels)
XL on the radio display,
after the channel name,
indicates content with
explicit language.
These channels, or any others, can be blocked at a
customer’s request, by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
Updating
Updating
encryption code
The encryption code in the receiver is being updated, and
no action is required. This process should take no longer
than 30 seconds.
No Signal
Loading XM
Loss of signal
The system is functioning correctly, but the vehicle is in a
location that is blocking the XM™ signal. When you move
into an open area, the signal should return.
Acquiring channel audio
(after 4 second delay)
The audio system is acquiring and processing audio and
text data. No action is needed. This message should
disappear shortly.
CH Off Air
Channel not in service
This channel is not currently in service. Tune to
another channel.
CH Unavail
Channel no
longer available
This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned.
Tune to another station. If this station was one of the
presets, choose another station for that preset button.
No Info
Artist Name/Feature not
available
No artist information is available at this time on this
channel. The system is working properly.
3-102
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
XM™ Radio Messages (cont’d)
Radio Display
Message
Condition
Action Required
No Info
Song/Program Title
not available
No song title information is available at this time on this
channel. The system is working properly.
No Info
Category Name
not available
No category information is available at this time on this
channel. The system is working properly.
No Info
No Text/Informational
message available
No text or informational messages are available at this
time on this channel. The system is working properly.
Not Found
XM Locked
No channel available for
the chosen category
There are no channels available for the selected category.
The system is working properly.
Theft lock active
The XM™ receiver in the vehicle may have previously
been in another vehicle. For security purposes, XM™
receivers cannot be swapped between vehicles. If this
message is received after having your vehicle serviced,
check with your GM dealer.
Radio ID
Radio ID label
(channel 0)
If tuned to channel 0, this message will alternate with the
XM™ Radio eight digit radio ID label. This label is needed
to activate the service.
Unknown
Radio ID not known
(should only be if
hardware failure)
If this message is received when tuned to channel 0, there
may be a receiver fault. Consult with your GM dealer.
Chk XMRcvr
Hardware failure
If this message does not clear within a short period of
time, the receiver may have a fault. Consult with your
GM dealer.
3-103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1 PREV (Previous): The tape must have at least
three seconds of silence between each selection for
previous to work. Press this pushbutton to go to
the previous selection on the tape if the current selection
has been playing for less than three seconds. If
pressed when the current selection has been playing
from three to 13 seconds, it will go to the beginning
of the previous selection or the beginning of the current
selection, depending on the position on the tape. If
pressed when the current selection has been playing for
more than 13 seconds, it will go to the beginning of
the current selection.
Playing a Cassette Tape
The tape player is built to work best with tapes that are
up to 30 to 45 minutes long on each side. Tapes
longer than that are so thin they may not work well in
this player. The longer side with the tape visible should
face to the right. If you hear nothing or hear a garbled
sound, the tape may not be in squarely. Press the eject
button to remove the tape and start over.
If the ignition and radio are off, press the eject button or
the INFO knob to insert and to begin play of a tape.
If the ignition is on and the radio is off, the tape can be
inserted and will begin playing.
SEEK and a negative number will appear on the display
while the cassette player is in the previous mode.
Pressing this pushbutton multiple times will increase the
number of selections to be searched back, up to −9.
While the tape is playing, use the VOL, AUDIO, and
SEEK controls just as you do for the radio. The cassette
tape symbol will appear on the display and an arrow
showing which side of the tape is playing. The tape
player will play the other side of the tape when it
reaches the end.
2 NEXT: The tape must have at least three seconds of
silence between each selection for next to work.
Press this pushbutton to go to the next selection on the
tape. Pressing this pushbutton multiple times, in next
mode, will increase the number of selections to be
searched forward. SEEK and a positive number
will appear on the display.
Cassette tape adapter kits for portable CD players will
work in the cassette tape player. See “CD Adapter Kits”
later for more information.
The tape bias is set automatically when a metal or
chrome tape is inserted.
If an error appears on the display, see “Cassette Tape
Messages” later in this section.
3-104
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 REV (Reverse): Press this pushbutton to quickly
reverse the tape. The radio will play while the tape
reverses. Press it again to return to playing speed. The
station frequency and REV will appear on the display.
Select stations during reverse operation by using TUNE
and SEEK.
©SCAN ¨: Press and hold either the SCAN or the
TYPE arrows for more than two seconds until SCAN
appears on the display and you hear a beep. The radio
will go to the next selection, play for 10 seconds,
then go on to the next selection. Press either the SCAN
or the TYPE arrows again, to stop scanning. The
tape must have at least three seconds of silence
between each selection for scan to work.
4 FWD (Forward): Press this pushbutton to quickly
advance the tape. The radio will play while the
tape advances. Press this pushbutton again to return to
playing speed. The station frequency and FWD will
appear on the display. Select stations during forward
operation by using TUNE and SEEK.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when a
cassette tape or CD is playing. The inactive tape or CD
will remain safely inside the radio for future listening.
TAPE DISC: Press this button to play a cassette tape or
CD when listening to the radio. The inactive tape or
CD will remain safely inside the radio for future listening.
5 X SIDE: Press this pushbutton to play the other side
of the tape.
©SEEK ¨: The right arrow is the same as the NEXT
pushbutton, and the left arrow is the same as the
PREV pushbutton. If either arrow is held or pressed
more than once, the player will continue moving forward
or backward through the tape. SEEK and a positive
or negative number will appear on the display.
Z(Eject): Press this button to eject a tape when it
is not playing. Eject may be activated with the radio off.
Cassette tapes may be loaded with the radio off if
this button is pressed first.
3-105
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cassette Tape Messages
CD Adapter Kits
It is possible to use a portable CD player with the
cassette tape player after activating the bypass feature
on your tape player.
CHK TAPE (Check Tape): If this message appears on
the display, the tape will not play due to one of the
following errors:
To activate the bypass feature, perform the
following steps:
• The tape is tight and the player cannot turn the
tape hubs. Remove the tape. Hold the tape with
the open end down and try to turn the right
hub counterclockwise with a pencil. Turn the tape
over and repeat. If the hubs do not turn easily,
the tape may be damaged and should not be used
in the player. Try a new tape to make sure your
player is working properly.
1. Turn the ignition on.
2. Turn the radio off.
3. Press and hold the TAPE DISC button for
five seconds. READY will appear on the display and
the tape symbol on the display will flash, indicating
the feature is active.
• The tape is broken. Try a new tape.
4. Insert the adapter into the cassette tape slot. It will
power up the radio and begin playing.
• The tape is wrapped around the tape head. Attempt
to get the cassette out. Try a new tape.
The override feature will remain active until the eject
button is pressed.
CLEAN: If this message appears on the display, the
cassette tape player needs to be cleaned. It will still play
tapes, but it should be cleaned as soon as possible to
prevent damage to the tapes and player. See Care
If the cassette tape is not playing correctly, for any other
reason, try a known good cassette.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your GM dealer. If the radio displays
an error message, write it down and provide it to
your GM dealer when reporting the problem.
3-106
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If there is no apparent damage, try a known good CD.
Playing a CD
Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught in the
CD player. If a CD is recorded on a personal computer
and a description label is needed, try labeling the top of
the recorded CD with a marking pen instead.
Insert a CD part way into the slot, label side up. The
player will pull it in and the CD should begin playing. If
you want to insert a CD with the ignition off, first
press the eject button or the INFO knob.
Notice: If you add any label to a CD, insert more
than one CD into the slot at a time, or attempt
to play scratched or damaged CDs, you could
damage the CD player. When using the CD player,
use only CDs in good condition without any
label, load one CD at a time, and keep the CD player
and the loading slot free of foreign materials,
liquids, and debris.
If the ignition or radio is turned off with the CD in the
player, it will stay in the player. When the ignition
or radio is turned on, the CD will start playing where it
stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.
When a CD is inserted, the CD symbol will appear on
the display. As each new track starts to play, the
track number will appear on the display.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm) single
CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the
smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
later in this section.
1 PREV (Previous): Press this pushbutton to go to
the beginning of the current track if more than
eight seconds have played. TRACK and the track
number will appear on the display. If this pushbutton is
held or pressed more than once, the player will
continue moving backward through the CD.
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality may be reduced
due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality
of the music that has been recorded, and the way the
CD-R has been handled. There may be an increase
in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in
loading and ejecting. If these problems occur, check
the bottom surface of the CD. If the surface of the CD is
damaged, such as cracked, broken, or scratched, the
CD will not play properly. If the surface of the CD
page 3-142 for more information.
2 NEXT: Press this pushbutton to go to the next track.
TRACK and the track number will appear on the
display. If this pushbutton is held or pressed more than
once, the player will continue moving forward through
the CD.
3-107
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 REV (Reverse): Press and hold this pushbutton to
quickly reverse within a track. Press and hold this
pushbutton for less than two seconds to reverse at
six times the normal playing speed. Press and hold it for
more than two seconds to reverse at 17 times the
normal playing speed. Release this pushbutton to play
the passage. ET and the elapsed time of the track
will appear on the display.
©SCAN ¨: Press and hold either the SCAN or the
TYPE arrows for more than two seconds until SCAN
appears on the display and you hear a beep. The radio
will go to the next track, play for 10 seconds, then go
on to the next track. Press either the SCAN or the TYPE
arrows again, to stop scanning.
INFO (Information): Press this knob to see how long
the current track has been playing. ET and the elapsed
time will appear on the display. To change the default
on the display, track or elapsed time, press the
knob until you see the display you want, then press and
hold the knob for two seconds. The radio will produce
one beep and the selected display will now be the
default.
4 FWD (Forward): Press and hold this pushbutton to
quickly advance within a track. Press and hold this
pushbutton for less than two seconds to advance at
six times the normal playing speed. Press and hold it for
more than two seconds to advance at 17 times the
normal playing speed. Release this pushbutton to play
the passage. ET and the elapsed time of the track
will appear on the display.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when a
cassette tape or CD is playing. The inactive tape or CD
will remain safely inside the radio for future listening.
6 RDM (Random): Press this pushbutton to hear the
tracks in random, rather than sequential, order. RDM ON
will appear on the display. RDM and the track number
will appear on the display when each track starts to play.
Press this pushbutton again to turn off random play.
RDM OFF will appear on the display.
TAPE DISC: Press this button to play a cassette tape or
CD when listening to the radio. The inactive tape or
CD will remain safely inside the radio for future listening.
Z(Eject): Press this button to eject a CD when it
is not playing. Eject may be activated with either
the ignition or radio off. CDs may be loaded with the
radio and ignition off if this button is pressed first.
©SEEK ¨: Press the left arrow to go to the start of
the current or to the previous track. Press the right
arrow to go to the start of the next track. If either arrow
is pressed more than once, the player will continue
moving backward or forward through the CD.
3-108
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CD Messages
Listening to a DVD
If the CD comes out, it could be for one of the following
reasons:
If your vehicle has the Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)
system and a DVD is playing, the DVD symbol will
appear on the radio display indicating that the DVD is
available and can be listened to through your vehicle’s
speakers. To listen to the DVD, press the TAPE
DISC button until RSE appears on the radio display.
The current radio source will stop and the DVD sound
will come through the speakers. To stop listening to
the DVD, press the TAPE DISC button, if a cassette
tape or a CD is loaded, or press the BAND button
to select a different source.
• It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the CD should play.
• You are driving on a very rough road. When the
road becomes smoother, the CD should play.
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and
try again.
• There may have been a problem while burning
the CD.
When the RSE system is turned off, the DVD symbol
will go off of the radio display and RSE OFF will appear
on the radio display. The radio will return to the last
radio source that you were listening to.
• The label may be caught in the CD player.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.
more information.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your GM dealer. If the radio displays
an error message, write it down and provide it to
your GM dealer when reporting the problem.
3-109
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Radio Data System (RDS)
Radio with Six-Disc CD
The audio system has a Radio Data System (RDS).
RDS features are available for use only on FM stations
that broadcast RDS information.
With RDS, the radio can do the following:
• Seek to stations broadcasting the selected type of
programming
• Receive announcements concerning local and
national emergencies
• Display messages from radio stations
This system relies upon receiving specific information
from these stations and will only work when the
information is available. In rare cases, a radio station
may broadcast incorrect information that will cause
the radio features to work improperly. If this happens,
contact the radio station.
Base Radio Shown, Bose® Similar
If your vehicle has the Bose® audio system, your
vehicle will have six Bose® amplified speakers.
While the radio is tuned to an RDS station, the station
name or call letters will appear on the display instead of
the frequency. RDS stations may also provide the
time of day, a program type (PTY) for current
programming, and the name of the program being
broadcast.
3-110
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For XM™ (if equipped), press the INFO knob while in
XM™ mode to retrieve four different categories of
information related to the current song or channel:
Artist, Song Title, Category or PTY, Channel
Number/Channel Name.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
XM™ is a satellite radio service that is based in the 48
contiguous United States and in Canada (if available).
XM™ offers over 100 coast-to-coast channels including
music, news, sports, talk, and children’s programming.
XM™ provides digital quality audio and text information
that includes song title and artist name. A service
fee is required in order to receive the XM™ service. For
more information, contact XM™ at www.xmradio.com
or call 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
To change the default on the display, press the INFO
knob until you see the display you want, then hold
the knob until you hear a beep. The selected display will
now be the default.
AUTO VOL (Automatic Volume): With automatic
volume, the audio system will adjust automatically to
make up for road and wind noise as you drive by
increasing the volume as vehicle speed increases.
Playing the Radio
PWR (Power): Push this knob to turn the system on
and off.
Set the volume at the desired level. Press this button to
select MIN, MED, or MAX. AUTO VOL will appear on
the display. Each higher setting will provide more
volume compensation at faster vehicle speeds. To turn
automatic volume off, press this button until AUTO
VOL OFF appears on the display.
o VOLUME p: Turn this knob to increase or to
decrease the volume.
INFO (Information): When the ignition is off, press this
knob to display the time.
For RDS, press the INFO knob to change what appears
on the display while using RDS. The display options
are station name, RDS station frequency, PTY, and the
name of the program (if available).
3-111
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Finding a Station
Setting Preset Stations
Up to 30 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM,
six XM1 and six XM2 (if equipped)), can be programed
on the six numbered pushbuttons, by performing the
following steps:
BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1, FM2,
AM, or XM1 or XM2 (if equipped). The display will
show the selection.
oTUNE p: Turn this knob to select radio stations.
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, AM, or XM1
or XM2.
©SEEK ¨: Press either the SEEK or the TYPE
arrows to go to the next or to the previous station and
stay there.
3. Tune in the desired station.
The radio will only seek stations with a strong signal
that are in the selected band.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever that
numbered pushbutton is pressed, the station
that was set will return for that pushbutton.
©SCAN ¨: Press and hold either the SCAN or the
TYPE arrows for two seconds until SCN appears on the
display and you hear a beep. The radio will go to a
station, play for a few seconds, then go on to the next
station. Press either the SCAN or the TYPE arrows
again to stop scanning.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
To store an equalization setting to a preset station
perform the following:
1. Tune to the preset station.
To scan preset stations, press and hold either the
SCAN or the TYPE arrows for more than four seconds.
PSC will appear on the display and you will hear a
double beep. The radio will go to a preset station, play
for a few seconds, then go on to the next preset
station. Press either the SCAN or the TYPE arrows
again to stop scanning presets.
2. Press and release the AUTO EQ button to select
the equalization setting.
Once the equalization no longer appears on
the display, the equalization will be set for that
preset station.
The radio will only scan stations with a strong signal
that are in the selected band.
3-112
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting the Tone
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
(Bass/Midrange/Treble)
AUDIO: To adjust the balance between the right
and the left speakers, push and release the AUDIO
knob until BAL appears on the display. Turn the knob to
move the sound toward the right or the left speakers.
AUDIO: Push and release the AUDIO knob until BASS,
MID (without Bose®), or TREB appears on the display.
Turn the knob to increase or to decrease. The
display will show the bass, midrange (without Bose®),
or treble level. If a station is weak or noisy, decrease
the treble.
To adjust the bass, midrange (without Bose®), or treble
to the middle position while it is displayed, push and
hold the AUDIO knob. The radio will produce one beep
and adjust the display level to the middle position.
To adjust the fade between the front and rear speakers,
push and release the AUDIO knob until FAD appears
on the display. Turn the knob to move the sound toward
the front or the rear speakers.
To adjust the balance or fade to the middle position
while it is displayed, push and hold the AUDIO knob.
The radio will produce one beep and adjust the display
level to the middle position.
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle
position, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone
or speaker controls are displayed. ALL CENTERED
will appear on the display and you will hear a beep.
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle
position, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone
or speaker controls are displayed. ALL CENTERED
will appear on the display and you will hear a beep.
AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press this button
to select customized equalization settings designed
for country/western, jazz, talk, pop, rock, and classical.
The radio will save separate AUTO EQ settings for
each preset and source.
If the radio is equipped with the Bose® audio system,
the equalization settings are either CUSTOM or TALK.
3-113
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press and
hold either the TYPE or the SCAN arrows for
two seconds, and the radio will begin scanning the
stations in the PTY.
Finding a Program Type (PTY) Station
(RDS and XM™)
To select and find a desired PTY perform the following:
4. Press either the TYPE or the SCAN arrows to stop
scanning.
1. Press the TYPE button to activate program type
select mode. P-TYPE and the last selected PTY
will appear on the display.
BAND (Alternate Frequency): Alternate frequency
allows the radio to switch to a stronger station with the
same program type. To turn alternate frequency on,
press and hold BAND for two seconds. AF ON will
appear on the display. The radio may switch to stations
with a stronger frequency.
2. Turn the TYPE knob or press and release the
TYPE button to select a PTY.
3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press either the
TYPE or the SEEK arrows to select and to take you
to the PTY’s first station.
To turn alternate frequency off, press and hold BAND
again for two seconds. AF OFF will appear on the
display. The radio will not switch to other stations.
4. To go to another station within that PTY, press the
TYPE button then, press either the TYPE or the
SEEK arrows once.
5. Press either the TYPE or the SEEK arrows twice to
exit program type select mode.
This function does not apply for XM™ Satellite
Radio Service.
SCAN: Scan the stations within a PTY by performing
the following:
1. Press the TYPE button to activate program type
select mode. P-TYPE and the last selected PTY
will appear on the display.
2. Turn the TYPE knob or press and release the
TYPE button to select a PTY.
3-114
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the entire message is not displayed, parts of the
message will appear every three seconds. To scroll
through the message, press and release the INFO
button. A new group of words will appear on the display
after every press of this button. Once the complete
message has been displayed, INFO will disappear from
the display until another new message is received.
The last message can be displayed by pressing
the INFO button. You can view the last message until a
new message is received or a different station is
tuned to.
Setting Preset PTYs (RDS Only)
These pushbuttons have factory PTY presets. Up to
12 PTYs (six FM1 and six FM2), can be programmed on
the six numbered pushbuttons, by performing the
following steps:
1. Press BAND to select FM1 or FM2.
2. Press the TYPE button to activate program type
select mode. P-TYPE and the last selected PTY
will appear on the display.
3. Turn the TYPE knob or press and release the
TYPE button to select a PTY.
Radio Messages
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever that
numbered pushbutton is pressed (while in PTY
mode), the PTY that was set will return.
CAL ERR (Calibration Error): The audio system has
been calibrated for your vehicle from the factory. If
CAL ERR appears on the display, it means that the radio
has not been configured properly for the vehicle and
must be returned to your GM dealer for service.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
LOCKED: This message is displayed when the
THEFTLOCK® system has locked up. Take the vehicle
to your GM dealer for service.
RDS Messages
INFO (Information): If the current station has a
message, INFO will appear on the display. Press this
button to see the message. The message may display
the artist, song title, call in phone numbers, etc.
If any error occurs repeatedly, or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your GM dealer.
3-115
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
XM™ Radio Messages
Radio Display
Message
Condition
Action Required
XL (Explicit Language
Channels)
XL on the radio display,
after the channel name,
indicates content with
explicit language.
These channels, or any others, can be blocked at a
customer’s request, by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
Updating
Updating
encryption code
The encryption code in the receiver is being updated, and no
action is required. This process should take no longer than
30 seconds.
No Signal
Loading XM
Loss of signal
The system is functioning correctly, but the vehicle is in a
location that is blocking the XM™ signal. When you move
into an open area, the signal should return.
Acquiring channel audio
(after 4 second delay)
The audio system is acquiring and processing audio and
text data. No action is needed. This message should
disappear shortly.
CH Off Air
Channel not in service
This channel is not currently in service. Tune to another
channel.
CH Unavail
Channel no
longer available
This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned.
Tune to another station. If this station was one of the
presets, choose another station for that preset button.
No Info
Artist Name/Feature
not available
No artist information is available at this time on this channel.
The system is working properly.
3-116
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
XM™ Radio Messages (cont’d)
Radio Display
Message
Condition
Action Required
No Info
Song/Program Title
not available
No song title information is available at this time on this
channel. The system is working properly.
No Info
Category Name
not available
No category information is available at this time on this
channel. The system is working properly.
No Info
No Text/Informational
message available
No text or informational messages are available at this
time on this channel. The system is working properly.
Not Found
XM Locked
No channel available for
the chosen category
There are no channels available for the selected category.
The system is working properly.
Theft lock active
The XM™ receiver in the vehicle may have previously
been in another vehicle. For security purposes, XM™
receivers cannot be swapped between vehicles. If this
message is received after having your vehicle serviced,
check with your GM dealer.
Radio ID
Radio ID label
(channel 0)
If tuned to channel 0, this message will alternate with the
XM™ Radio eight digit radio ID label. This label is needed
to activate the service.
Unknown
Radio ID not known
(should only be if
hardware failure)
If this message is received when tuned to channel 0, there
may be a receiver fault. Consult with your GM dealer.
Chk XMRcvr
Hardware failure
If this message does not clear within a short period of
time, your receiver may have a fault. Consult with your
GM dealer.
3-117
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught in the
CD player. If a CD is recorded on a personal computer
and a description label is needed, try labeling the top of
the recorded CD with a marking pen instead.
Playing a CD
If the ignition or radio is turned off, with a CD in the
player, it will stay in the player. When the ignition
or radio is turned on, the CD will start playing where it
stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.
Notice: If you add any label to a CD, insert more
than one CD into the slot at a time, or attempt
to play scratched or damaged CDs, you could
damage the CD player. When using the CD player,
use only CDs in good condition without any
label, load one CD at a time, and keep the CD player
and the loading slot free of foreign materials,
liquids, and debris.
When a CD is inserted, the CD symbol will appear on
the display. As each new track starts to play, the
track number will appear on the display.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm) single
CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the
smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
later in this section.
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality may be reduced
due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality
of the music that has been recorded, and the way the
CD-R has been handled. There may be an increase
in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in
loading and ejecting. If these problems occur, check
the bottom surface of the CD. If the surface of the CD is
damaged, such as cracked, broken, or scratched, the
CD will not play properly. If the surface of the CD
page 3-142 for more information.
LOAD: Press this button to load CDs into the CD
player. This CD player will hold up to six CDs.
To insert one CD, do the following:
1. Turn the ignition on.
2. Press and release the LOAD button.
3. Wait for the indicator light, located to the right of the
slot, to turn green.
If there is no apparent damage, try a known good CD.
4. Load a CD. Insert the CD part way into the slot,
label side up. The player will pull the CD in.
3-118
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To insert multiple CDs, do the following:
1. Turn the ignition on.
Playing a Specific Loaded CD
For every CD loaded, a number will appear on the
display. To play a specific CD, first press the CD AUX
button (if not already in CD mode), then press the
numbered pushbutton that corresponds to the CD. A
small bar will appear under the CD number that is
playing and the track number will appear on the display.
2. Press and hold the LOAD button for two seconds.
You will hear a beep and the indicator light, located
to the right of the slot, will begin to flash and
MULTI LOAD # will appear on the display.
3. Once the light stops flashing and turns green,
INSERT CD # will appear on the display, load
a CD. Insert the CD part way into the slot, label side
up. The player will pull the CD in.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
later in this section.
CD Z(Eject): Press this button to eject CD(s).
Once the CD is loaded, the indicator light will begin
flashing again. Once the light stops flashing and
turns green, you can load another CD. The
CD player takes up to six CDs. Do not try to load
more than six.
To eject the CD that is currently playing, press and
release this button.
To eject multiple CDs, do the following:
1. Press and hold the CD eject button for two seconds.
To load more than one CD but less than six, complete
Steps 1 through 3. When finished loading CDs,
press the LOAD button to cancel the loading function.
The radio will begin to play the last CD loaded.
You will hear a beep and the indicator light, located
to the right of the slot, will begin to flash and
EJECT ALL will appear on the display.
2. Once the light stops flashing, REMOVE CD # will
appear on the display. The CD will eject and can
be removed.
If more than one CD has been loaded, a number for
each CD will appear on the display.
Once the CD is removed, the indicator light will
begin flashing again and another CD will eject.
To stop ejecting the CDs, press the eject button.
3-119
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the CD is not removed, after 25 seconds, the CD will
be automatically pulled back into the player. If CD is
pushed back into the player, before the 25-second time
period is complete, the player will sense an error
and will try to eject the CD several times before
stopping.
RPT (Repeat): With repeat, one track or an entire CD
can be repeated.
To use repeat, do the following:
• To repeat the track you are listening to, press and
release the RPT button. RPT will appear on the
display. Press RPT again to turn off repeat play.
Do not repeatedly press the CD eject button to eject a
CD after you have tried to push it in manually. The
player’s 25-second eject timer will reset at each press of
eject, causing the player to not eject the CD until the
25-second time period has elapsed.
• To repeat the CD you are listening to, press and
hold the RPT button for two seconds. RPT will
appear on the display. Press RPT again to turn off
repeat play.
RDM (Random): With random, you can listen to the
tracks in random, rather than sequential, order, on
one CD or on all of the CDs. To use random, do one of
the following:
{ REV (Reverse): Press and hold this button to
reverse quickly within a track. You will hear sound at a
reduced volume. Release the button to play the
passage. The elapsed time of the track will appear on
the display.
• To play the tracks on the CD you are listening to in
random order, press and release the RDM button.
RANDOM ONE will appear on the display. Press
RDM again to turn off random play.
FWD |(Forward): Press and hold this button to
advance quickly within a track. You will hear sound at a
reduced volume. Release the button to play the
passage. The elapsed time of the track will appear on
the display.
• To play the tracks on all of the CDs that are loaded
in random order, press and hold RDM for more
than two seconds. You will hear a beep and
RANDOM ALL will appear on the display. Press
RDM again to turn off random play.
3-120
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press AUTO EQ
to select the equalization setting while playing a CD.
The equalization will be stored whenever a CD is played.
For more information on AUTO EQ, see “AUTO EQ”
listed previously in this section.
INFO (Information): Press this knob to see how long
the current track has been playing. To change the
default on the display, track or elapsed time, press the
knob until you see the display you want, then press
and hold the knob until you hear a beep. The selected
display will now be the default.
©SEEK ¨: Press the left arrow to go to the start of
the current track, if more than ten seconds have played.
Press the right arrow to go to the next track. If either
arrow is pressed more than once, the player will
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when a
CD is playing. The inactive CD(s) will remain safely
inside the radio for future listening.
continue moving backward or forward through the CD.
Using Song List Mode
©SCAN ¨: To scan one CD, press and hold
either SCAN arrow for more than two seconds until
TRACK SCAN appears on the display and you hear a
beep. The radio will go to the next track, play for
10 seconds, then go on to the next track. Press either
SCAN arrow again, to stop scanning.
The six-disc CD changer has a feature called song list.
This feature is capable of saving 20 track selections.
To save tracks into the song list feature, perform
the following steps:
1. Turn the CD player on and load it with at least
one CD. See “LOAD CD” listed previously in this
section for more information.
To scan all loaded CDs, press and hold either SCAN
arrow for more than four seconds until ALL CD
SCAN appears on the display and you hear a beep.
Use this feature to listen to 10 seconds of the first track
of each loaded CD. Press either SCAN arrow again,
to stop scanning.
2. Check to see that the CD changer is not in song list
mode. S-LIST should not appear on the display. If
S-LIST is present, press the SONG LIST button
to turn it off.
3-121
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Select the desired CD by pressing the numbered
pushbutton and then use the SEEK or TYPE right
arrow to locate the track to be saved. The track will
begin to play.
To delete tracks from the song list, perform the
following steps:
1. Turn the CD player on.
2. Press the SONG LIST button to turn song list on.
S-LIST will appear on the display.
4. Press and hold the SONG LIST button to save the
track into memory. When SONG LIST is pressed,
one beep will be heard immediately. After
two seconds of continuously pressing the SONG
LIST button, two beeps will sound to confirm
the track has been saved.
3. Press either SEEK or TYPE arrow to select the
desired track to be deleted.
4. Press and hold the SONG LIST button for
two seconds. When SONG LIST is pressed,
one beep will be heard immediately. After
two seconds of continuously pressing the SONG
LIST button, two beeps will be heard to confirm that
the track has been deleted.
5. Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for saving other selections.
S-LIST FULL will appear on the display if you try to save
more than 20 selections.
To play the song list, press the SONG LIST button.
One beep will be heard and S-LIST will appear on the
display. The recorded tracks will begin to play in
the order they were saved.
After a track has been deleted, the remaining tracks are
moved up the list. When another track is added to
the song list, the track will be added to the end of
the list.
Seek through the song list by using the SEEK or TYPE
arrows. Seeking past the last saved track will return
to the first saved track.
3-122
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To delete the entire song list, perform the
following steps:
CD Messages
CHECK CD: If this message appears on the display
and/or the CD comes out, it could be for one of the
following reasons:
1. Turn the CD player on.
2. Press the SONG LIST button to turn song list on.
S-LIST will appear on the display.
• It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the CD should play.
3. Press and hold the SONG LIST button for more
than four seconds. One beep will be heard,
followed by two beeps after two seconds, and a
final beep will be heard after four seconds. S-LIST
EMPTY will appear on the display indicating the
song list has been deleted.
• You are driving on a very rough road. When the
road becomes smoother, the CD should play.
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and
try again.
If a CD is ejected, and the song list contains saved
tracks from that CD, those tracks are automatically
deleted from the song list. Any tracks saved to the song
list again are added to the bottom of the list.
• There may have been a problem while burning
the CD.
• The label may be caught in the CD player.
To end song list mode, press the SONG LIST button.
One beep will be heard and S-LIST will be removed from
the display.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your GM dealer. If the radio displays
an error message, write it down and provide it to
your GM dealer when reporting the problem.
3-123
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Listening to a DVD
Navigation/Radio System
If your vehicle has the Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)
system and a DVD is playing, the DVD symbol will
appear on the radio display indicating that the DVD is
available and can be listened to through your vehicle’s
speakers.
Your vehicle may have a navigation radio system.
The navigation system has built-in features intended to
minimize driver distraction. Technology alone, no
matter how advanced, can never replace your own
judgment. See the Navigation System manual for some
tips to help you reduce distractions while driving.
To listen to the DVD, press the CD AUX button until
RSE appears on the radio display. The current
radio source will stop and the DVD sound will come
through the speakers.
Rear Seat Entertainment System
To stop listening to the DVD, press the CD AUX button,
if a CD is loaded, or press the BAND button to select
a different source.
Your vehicle may have a DVD Rear Seat Entertainment
(RSE) system. The RSE system includes a DVD
player, a video display screen, two sets of wireless
headphones, and a remote control.
When the RSE system is turned off, the DVD symbol
will go off of the radio display and RSE OFF will appear
on the radio display. The radio will return to the last
radio source that you were listening to.
more information.
3-124
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Parental Control
Headphones
This button is located behind the video screen. Press
this button while a DVD or CD is playing to freeze
the video and mute the audio. The video screen will
display Parental Control ON and the power indicator
light on the DVD player will flash. It will also disable all
other button operations from the remote control and
the DVD player, with the exception of the eject button.
Press this button again to restore operation of the
DVD player.
The RSE system includes two sets of wireless
headphones.
Each set of headphones has an ON/OFF control. An
indicator light will illuminate on the headphones
when they are on. If the light does not illuminate, the
batteries may need to be replaced. See “Battery
Replacement” following for more information.
Each set of headphones has a volume knob. To adjust
the volume, adjust this knob.
This button may also be used to turn the DVD player
power on and automatically resume play if the ignition is
in RUN, ACCESSORY, or if RAP is active.
The transmitters are located below the video display
screen. The headphones will shut off automatically
if they lose the signal from the system after about
four minutes to save battery power. The signal may be
lost if the system is turned off or if the headphones
are out of range of the transmitters.
Before You Drive
The RSE system is for rear seat passengers only. The
driver cannot safely view the video screen while
driving and should not try to do so.
When using the wired headphones, if the front seat
passengers play a CD in the Radio with Six-Disc CD (if
equipped) or use XM™ Satellite Radio Service (if
equipped), you will hear the audio for these sources,
instead of the DVD or CD that is currently playing
through the RSE.
Notice: Do not store the headphones in heat or
direct sunlight. This could damage the headphones
and repairs will not be covered by your warranty.
Keep the headphones stored in a cool, dry place.
3-125
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Both sets of rear seat headphones may include foam
ear pads that can be replaced.
Stereo RCA Jacks
The RCA jacks are located behind the video screen.
The RCA jacks allow audio and video signals to
be connected from an auxiliary device such as a
camcorder or a video game unit to the RSE system.
Standard RCA cables, not included, are needed
to connect the auxiliary device to the RCA jacks. The
yellow connector inputs video and the red and white
connectors input right and left audio. Refer to the
manufacturer’s instructions for proper connection of the
auxiliary device.
Foam ear pads on these headphones may become
worn or damaged. The headphone foam ear pads can
become damaged if they are not handled or stored
properly. If the foam ear pads do become damaged or
worn out, the pads can be replaced separately from
the headphone set. It is not necessary to replace
the complete headphone set.
The headphone replacement foam ear pads can be
ordered in pairs. See your dealer for more information.
To use the auxiliary inputs on the RSE system, connect
an external auxiliary device to the color-coded RCA
jacks and turn both the auxiliary device and the
RSE system power on. If the RSE system had been
previously in the DVD player mode, pressing the SRCE
button on the faceplate or the remote control will
switch the RSE system between the auxiliary device
and the DVD player.
Battery Replacement
To change the batteries, do the following:
1. Loosen the screw on the battery compartment door
located on the left side of the headphone earpiece.
2. Replace the two AAA batteries in the compartment.
Make sure that they are installed correctly, using
the diagram on the inside of the battery
compartment.
3. Tighten the screw to close the compartment door.
If the headphones are to be stored for a long period
of time, remove the batteries and keep them in a cool,
dry place.
3-126
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The RSE system will always transmit the audio signal
by infrared to the wireless headphones, if there is audio
available. See “Headphones” previously for more
information.
How to Change the Video Format when in
the Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary input video format is preset to NTSC.
In some countries, the video format may be in the PAL
system. To change the video format, perform
the following:
The RSE system is capable of outputting audio to the
vehicle speakers by using the radio. The RSE
system may be selected as an audio source on the
radio if the RSE system power is on. Once the
RSE system is selected as an audio source on the
radio, adjust the speaker volume on the radio, if
necessary. If the RSE system power is not on, the RSE
system will not be an available source on the radio.
Refer to the radio information for the radio that
your vehicle has for more information.
1. Press the display menu button.
2. Press the down arrow button to highlight the Video
Format option.
3. Press the enter button to select Video Format.
4. Press the right or left arrow button to select
the desired video format.
5. Press the enter button to accept the change.
The RSE system is capable of outputting audio to the
wired headphone jacks on the rear seat audio system
(if equipped). The RSE system may be selected as
an audio source on the rear seat audio system if
the RSE system power is on. Refer to Rear Seat Audio
Audio Output
Audio from the DVD player or auxiliary inputs may be
heard through the following possible sources:
• Wireless Headphones
• Vehicle Speakers
• Vehicle wired headphone jacks on the Rear Seat
Audio system (if equipped)
3-127
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The RSE system DVD player is only compatible with
DVDs of the appropriate region code for the country that
the vehicle was sold in. The DVD region code is
printed on the jacket of most DVDs.
Video Screen
The video screen is located in the overhead console. To
use the video screen, push forward on the release
latch and the screen will fold down. Adjust the screen’s
position as desired. When the video screen is not in
use, push it up into its latched position.
Standard audio CDs, CD-R, CD-RW, Video CD and
Photo CD/CD-R media are fully supported by this DVD
player. DVD-R and DVD-RW media is supported if
formatted as DVD-Video. DVD+R and DVD+RW media
may or may not be supported by the DVD player.
The DVD player does not support DVD-RAM,
DVD-ROM, and DVD Audio media. An error message
will appear on the display if this type of media is inserted
into the DVD player.
The DVD player and display will continue to operate
when the screen is in the up or the down position. The
video screen contains the transmitters for the wireless
headphones and the remote control. If the screen is in the
closed position, the signals will not be available for the
operation of the headphones or the remote control.
Notice: Avoid directly touching the video screen,
as damage may occur. See “Cleaning the Video
Screen” later in this section for more information.
When using the wired headphones, not included, if the
front seat passengers play a CD in the Radio with
Six-Disc CD (if equipped) or use XM™ Satellite Radio
Service (if equipped), you will hear the audio for
these sources, instead of the DVD or CD that is currently
playing through the RSE.
DVD Player
The DVD player is located in the overhead console.
The DVD player can be controlled by the buttons on the
DVD player and/or by the buttons on the remote
control. See “Remote Control” later in this section for
more information.
If an error message appears on the video screen, see
“DVD Messages” later in this section.
The DVD player power may be turned on when the
ignition is in RUN, ACCESSORY, or when Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) is active.
3-128
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DVD Player Buttons (Without Sunroof)
y(Main DVD Menu): Press this button to access the
DVD menu. The DVD menu is different on every
DVD. Use the up, down, left, and right arrow buttons to
move the cursor around the DVD menu. After making
a selection press the enter button. This button only
operates when playing a DVD.
z(Set-up Menu): Press this button to adjust the color,
tint, brightness, contrast, display mode, and dynamic
range compression. The dynamic range compression
feature can be used to reduce loud audio and increase
low audio produced by some DVDs.
To change a feature back to the factory default setting,
press this button to display the feature, then press
and hold this button. The default setting will appear on
the display.
O(Power): Press this button to turn the RSE system
on and off. The power indicator light will illuminate
when the power is on.
While playing an Audio or DVD disc, press and hold this
button to display and to remove the track and time
information.
X(Eject): Press this button to eject a DVD or CD.
SRCE (Source): Press this button to switch between
the DVD player and an auxiliary source.
n, q, p, o(Menu Navigation Arrows): Use the
arrow buttons to navigate through a menu.
c(Stop): Press this button to stop playing, rewinding,
or fast forwarding a DVD or CD. Press this button
twice to return to the beginning of the DVD.
r(Enter): Press this button to select the choices
that are highlighted in any menu.
s(Play/Pause): Press this button to start play of a
DVD or CD. Press this button while a DVD or CD is
playing to pause it. Press this button again to continue
the play of the DVD or CD.
3-129
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DVD Player Buttons (With Sunroof)
Playing a Disc
To play a disc, gently insert the disc with the label side
up into the loading slot. The DVD player will continue
loading the disc and the player will automatically start,
if the vehicle is in RUN, ACCESSORY, or when RAP
is active.
If a disc is already in the player, press the play/pause
button on the DVD player faceplate or on the remote
control.
s(Play/Pause): Press this button to start play of a
DVD or CD. Press this button while a DVD or CD is
playing to pause it. Press this button again to continue
the play of the DVD or CD.
Some DVDs will not allow fast forwarding or skipping of
the copyright information or the previews. Some
DVDs will begin playing after the previews have finished.
If the DVD does not begin to play the main title, refer
to the on-screen instructions.
c X (Stop/Eject): Press this button to stop playing,
rewinding, or fast forwarding a DVD or CD. Press this
button twice to return to the beginning of the DVD.
Stopping and Resuming Playback
To stop playing a disc, press and release the stop
button on the DVD player faceplate or the remote
control.
Press and hold this button for more than two seconds to
eject a DVD or CD.
To resume playback, press the play/pause button on
the DVD player faceplate or the remote control.
The movie should resume play from where it was last
stopped, if the disc has not been ejected and the
stop button has not been pressed twice. If the disc has
been ejected or if the stop button has been pressed
twice, the disc will resume play at the beginning.
3-130
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ejecting a Disc (DVD Player without
Sunroof)
Press the eject button on the DVD player faceplate to
eject the disc. There is not an eject button on the
remote control.
Remote Control
To use the remote control, aim it at the transmitter
window below the video screen and press the desired
button. Direct sunlight or very bright light may affect the
ability of the RSE system to receive signals from the
remote control. If the remote control does not seem to
be working, the batteries may need to be replaced.
See “Battery Replacement” later in this section.
If a disc is ejected from the player, but is not removed,
the DVD player will reload the disc after a short
period of time. The disc will be stored in the DVD player.
The DVD player will not resume play of the disc
automatically.
Objects blocking the line of sight may also affect the
function of the remote control.
Notice: Storing the remote control in a hot area or
in direct sunlight may damage it, and the repairs
will not be covered by your warranty. Keep the
remote control stored in a cool, dry place.
Ejecting a Disc (DVD Player with Sunroof)
Press and hold the stop/eject button for more than
two seconds on the DVD player faceplate to eject the
disc. There is not an eject button on the remote control.
To extend the life of the batteries, the remote control
does not have a press and hold feature.
If a disc is ejected from the player, but is not removed,
the DVD player will reload the disc after a short period of
time. The disc will be stored in the DVD player. The
DVD player will not resume play of the disc
automatically.
3-131
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Control Buttons
z(Set-up Menu): Press this button to adjust the color,
tint, brightness, contrast, display mode, and dynamic
range compression. The dynamic range compression
feature can be used to reduce loud audio and increase
low audio produced by some DVDs.
e(Audio): Press this button to display a menu that
will only appear when a DVD is being played. The format
and content of this function will vary for each disc.
r(Fast Reverse): Press this button to fast reverse
the DVD or CD. To stop fast reversing, press this button
again. This button may not work when the DVD is
playing the copyright information or the previews.
SRCE (Source): Press this button to switch between
the DVD player and an auxiliary source.
O(Power): Press this button to turn the DVD player
c(Stop): Press this button to stop playing, rewinding,
or fast forwarding a DVD or CD. Press this button
twice to return to the beginning of the DVD.
on and off.
v (Title): Press this button to return the DVD to the
main menu of the DVD.
t(Previous Track/Chapter): Press this button to
return to the start of the current track or chapter. Press
this button again to return to the previous track or
chapter. This button may not work when the DVD is
playing the copyright information or the previews.
n, q, p, o(Menu Navigation Arrows): Use the
arrow buttons to navigate through a menu.
3-132
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1 through 0 (Numeric Keypad): The numeric keypad
provides you with the capability of direct chapter,
title, and track number selection.
|(Camera Angle): Press this button to change
camera angles on DVDs that have this feature when a
DVD is playing. The format and content of this
function will vary for each disc.
}10 (Double Digit Entries): Press this button to
select chapter, title, and track numbers greater than 9.
Press this button before inputting the number.
{(Subtitle): Press this button to turn on subtitles and
to move through subtitle options when a DVD is
playing. The format and content of this function will vary
for each disc.
\(Clear): Press this button within three seconds after
inputting a number to clear the number(s).
[(Fast Forward): Press this button to fast forward
the DVD or CD. To stop fast forwarding, press this
button again. This button may not work when the DVD
is playing the copyright information or the previews.
P(Illumination): Press this button to turn the remote
control backlight on. The backlight will time out after
about 7 to 10 seconds if no other button is pressed while
the backlight is on.
s(Play/Pause): Press this button to start play of a
DVD or CD. Press this button while a DVD or CD is
playing to pause it. Press this button again to continue
the play of the DVD or CD.
y(Main DVD Menu): Press this button to access the
DVD menu. The DVD menu is different on every
DVD. Use the up, down, left, and right arrow buttons to
move the cursor around the DVD menu. After making
a selection press the enter button. This button only
operates when playing a DVD.
When the DVD is playing, press the pause button then
press the fast forward button. The DVD will continue
playing in a slow play mode. To cancel slow play mode,
press the play/pause button.
r(Enter): Press this button to select the choices
that are highlighted in any menu.
u(Next Track/Chapter): Press this button to advance
to the beginning of the next track or chapter. This
button may not work when the DVD is playing the
copyright information or the previews.
q(Return): Press this button to exit the current
active menu and return to the previous menu. This
button will operate only when a DVD is playing and a
menu is active.
3-133
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Battery Replacement
To change the batteries, do the following:
Problem
No power.
Recommended Action
The ignition might not be
in on or accessory.
The parental control
button might have been
turned on. The power
indicator light will flash.
1. Remove the battery compartment door located on
the bottom of the remote control.
2. Replace the two AA batteries in the compartment.
Make sure that they are installed correctly, using
the diagram on the inside of the battery
compartment.
Disc will not play.
The system might be off.
The parental control
button might have been
turned on. The power
indicator light will flash.
The system might be in
auxiliary mode.
3. Close the battery door securely.
If the remote control is to be stored for a long period of
time, remove the batteries and keep them in a cool,
dry place.
The disc is upside down
or is not compatible.
The picture does not fill
the screen. There are
black borders on the top
and bottom or on both
sides or it looks
Check the display
mode settings in the
display menu.
stretched out.
3-134
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Problem
Recommended Action
Problem
Recommended Action
The disc was ejected, but The disc is being stored
it was pulled back into the in the DVD player. Press
The remote control does
not work.
Check to make sure
there is no obstruction
between the remote
control and the
DVD player.
the eject button again to
eject the disc.
transmitter window.
Check the batteries to
make sure they are not
dead or installed
In auxiliary mode, the
Check the auxiliary input
connections at both
devices.
picture moves or scrolls.
Change the Video
incorrectly.
Format to PAL or NTSC.
See “Stereo RCA Jacks”
previously for how to
change the video format.
Check the audio or
language selection in the
main DVD menu.
The parental control
button might have been
turned on. The power
indicator light will flash.
The language in the
audio or on the screen
is wrong.
After stopping the player, If the stop button was
I push Play but
pressed one time, the
DVD player will resume
sometimes the DVD
starts where I left off and playing where the DVD
sometimes at the
beginning.
was stopped. If the stop
button was pressed
two times the DVD player
will begin to play from the
beginning of the DVD.
3-135
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Problem
Recommended Action
Problem
Recommended Action
The auxiliary source is
running but there is no
picture or sound.
Check that the DVD
player is in the auxiliary
source mode.
Check the auxiliary
input connections at
both devices.
Turn the DVD power off,
then on, then press the
load/eject button on the
DVD player.
Do not attempt to forcibly
remove the disc from the
DVD player. This could
permanently damage the
disc and DVD player.
Check for obstructions,
low batteries, reception
range, and interference
from cellular telephone
towers or by using your
cellular telephone in the
vehicle.
Check that the
headphones are facing
the front of the vehicle.
I lost the remote and/or
the headphones.
The DVD is playing, but
there is no picture or
sound.
See your dealer for
assistance.
Check that the DVD
player is in DVD mode.
The audio/video skips
or jumps.
The DVD or CD could be
dirty, scratched, or
damaged.
My disc is stuck in the
player. The Load/Eject
button does not work.
The audio from the radio The RSE is working
for the Radio with
correctly.
Use the wireless
Six-Disc CD and XM™
has taken over the audio headphones or have the
from the DVD or CD
when using the wired
headphones.
front seat passengers
listen to another audio
source.
Sometimes the wireless
headphone audio cuts
out or buzzes.
3-136
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DVD Messages
Cleaning the Video Screen
The following errors may be displayed on the
video screen:
Disc Format Error: This message will be displayed if a
disc is inserted upside down, if the disc is not readable,
or if the format is not compatible with the DVD player.
Pour some isopropyl or rubbing alcohol on a clean cloth
and gently wipe the video screen. Do not spray
directly onto the screen and do not press too hard or
too long on the video screen.
Rear Seat Audio (RSA)
Load/Eject Error: This message will be displayed if the
disc is not properly loaded or ejected.
This feature allows rear seat passengers to listen to any
of the sources: radio, cassette tapes, CDs, or DVDs.
However, the rear seat passengers can only control the
sources that the front seat passengers are not
listening to. For example, rear seat passengers may
listen to and control cassette tapes, CDs, or DVDs
through the headphones while the driver listens to the
radio through the front speakers. The rear seat
passengers have control of the volume for each set of
headphones.
Disc Play Error: This message will be displayed if the
DVD player cannot play the disc. Scratched or
damaged discs will cause this error.
Region Code Error: This message will be displayed if
the region code of the DVD is not compatible with
the region code of the DVD player.
No Disc: This message will be displayed if any of the
buttons on the DVD faceplate or remote control are
pressed and no disc is present in the DVD player.
The front seat audio controls always have priority over
the RSA controls. If the front seat passengers switch the
source for the main radio to a remote source, the RSA will
not be able to control the source. You can operate the
rear seat audio when the main radio is off.
DVD Distortion
There may be an experience with audio distortion in the
wireless headphones when operating cellular phones,
scanners, CB radios, Global Positioning Systems
(GPS)*, two-way radios, mobile fax, or walkie talkies.
It may be necessary to turn off the DVD player when
operating one of these devices in or near the vehicle.
* Excludes the OnStar® System.
3-137
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SEEK: Press this button to advance to the next station
or track and stay there. The display will show the
selection. This function is inactive if the front seat
passengers are listening to the same audio source.
To scan preset stations, press and hold the SEEK button
for two seconds and the radio will advance to the next
preset station. If you continue to hold the button
down, the radio will continue to advance through the
available preset stations. The display will show the
selections. This function is inactive if the front seat
passengers are listing to the radio.
Regular Wheelbase shown, Extended Wheelbase
similar
When a cassette tape is playing, press the SEEK button
to go to the next selection on the tape. Press and
hold the SEEK button to go to the other side of the tape.
This function is inactive if the front seat passengers
are listening to a cassette tape.
P(Power): Press this button to turn the system on or
off. The rear speakers will be muted when the power
is turned on.
When a CD is playing, press the SEEK button to go to
the next track on the CD. This function is inactive if
the front seat passengers are listening to a CD.
u(Volume): Turn this knob to increase or to decrease
the volume. The left volume knob controls the left
wired headphones and the right volume knob controls
the right wired headphones.
When a CD is playing in the six-disc CD player, press
and hold the SEEK button for 2 seconds to go you to the
next CD, if multiple CDs are loaded. This function is
inactive if the front seat passengers are listening
to a CD.
SRCE (Source): Press this button to select a source:
radio, cassette tape, CD, or DVD. The inactive tape, CD,
or DVD will remain safely inside the radio for future
listening.
3-138
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Theft-Deterrent Feature
Audio Steering Wheel Controls
THEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theft of your
vehicle’s radio. The feature works automatically by
learning a portion of the Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN). If the radio is moved to a different vehicle, it
will not operate and LOCKED will appear on the display.
When the radio and vehicle are turned off, the blinking
red light indicates that THEFTLOCK® is armed.
With THEFTLOCK® activated, the radio will not operate
if stolen.
If your vehicle has this feature, some audio functions
can be adjusted at the steering wheel. They include the
following:
g(OnStar®/Mute): If your vehicle has OnStar, press
this button to interact with the OnStar system. See
more information.
If your vehicle does not have OnStar, press this button
to silence the system. Press it again, or any other
radio button, to turn on the sound.
3-139
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PROG (Program): Press this button to play a station
you have programmed on the radio preset pushbuttons.
The radio will only seek preset stations with a strong
signal that are in the selected band.
Radio Reception
You may experience frequency interference and static
during normal radio reception if items such as cellphone
chargers, vehicle convenience accessories, and
external electronic devices are plugged into the
accessory power outlet. If there is interference or static,
unplug the item from the accessory power outlet.
When a CD is playing in the CD changer, press this
button to go to the next available CD, if multiple CDs
are loaded.
Q SOURCE R: Press this button to switch between
FM1, FM2, AM, or XM1 or XM2 (if equipped), or a
CD. If a CD is loaded the CD symbol will appear on
the display.
AM
The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM,
especially at night. The longer range can cause
station frequencies to interfere with each other. For
better radio reception, most AM radio stations will boost
the power levels during the day, and then reduce
these levels during the night. Static can also occur when
things like storms and power lines interfere with radio
reception. When this happens, try reducing the treble on
your radio.
QSEEK R: Press the up or the down arrow to go to
the next or to the previous radio station and stay
there. The radio will only seek stations with a strong
signal that are in the selected band.
When a CD is playing, press the up or the down arrow
to fast forward or reverse.
FM Stereo
Q VOL R(Volume): Press the up or the down arrow
FM stereo will give the best sound, but FM signals will
reach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km). Tall
buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals, causing
the sound to fade in and out.
to increase or to decrease the volume.
3-140
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
be cleaned as soon as possible to prevent damage to
the tapes and player. If there is a reduction in sound
quality, try a known good cassette to see if the tape or
the tape player is at fault. If this other cassette has
no improvement in sound quality, clean the tape player.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
XM™ Satellite Radio Service gives digital radio
reception from coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguous
United States, and in Canada (if available). Just as with
FM, tall buildings or hills can interfere with satellite
radio signals, causing the sound to fade in and out. In
addition, traveling or standing under heavy foliage,
bridges, garages, or tunnels may cause loss of the XM™
signal for a period of time. The radio may display NO
SIGNAL to indicate interference.
For best results, use a scrubbing action, non-abrasive
cleaning cassette with pads which scrub the tape
head as the hubs of the cleaner cassette turn. The
recommended cleaning cassette is available through
your dealer.
The broken tape detection feature of the cassette tape
player may identify the cleaning cassette as a
damaged tape, in error. To prevent the cleaning cassette
from being ejected, use the following steps:
Care of the Cassette Tape Player
A tape player that is not cleaned regularly can cause
reduced sound quality, ruined cassettes, or a damaged
mechanism. Cassette tapes should be stored in their
cases away from contaminants, direct sunlight, and
extreme heat. If they are not, they may not operate
properly or may cause failure of the tape player.
1. Turn the ignition on.
2. Turn the radio off.
3. Press and hold the TAPE CD button for
five seconds. READY will appear on the display
and a cassette symbol will flash for five seconds.
The tape player should be cleaned regularly after every
50 hours of use. The radio may display CLEAN to
indicate that the tape player has been used for 50 hours
without resetting the tape clean timer. If this message
appears on the display, the cassette tape player
4. Insert the scrubbing action cleaning cassette.
5. Eject the cleaning cassette after the manufacturer’s
recommended cleaning time.
After the cleaning cassette is ejected, the broken
tape detection feature will be active again.
needs to be cleaned. It will still play tapes, but it should
3-141
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A non-scrubbing action, wet-type cleaner which uses a
cassette with a fabric belt to clean the tape head
can be used. This type of cleaning cassette will not
eject on its own. A non-scrubbing action cleaner may not
clean as thoroughly as the scrubbing type cleaner.
The use of a non-scrubbing action, dry-type cleaning
cassette is not recommended.
Care of Your CDs and DVDs
Handle CDs carefully. Store them in their original cases
or other protective cases and away from direct
sunlight and dust. The CD player scans the bottom
surface of the disc. If the surface of a CD is damaged,
such as cracked, broken, or scratched, the CD will
not play properly or not at all. If the surface of a CD is
soiled, take a soft, lint free cloth or dampen a clean, soft
cloth in a mild, neutral detergent solution mixed with
water, and clean it. Make sure the wiping process starts
from the center to the edge.
After the player is cleaned, press and hold the EJT
button for five seconds to reset the CLEAN indicator.
The radio will display CLEANED to show the indicator
was reset.
Cassettes are subject to wear and the sound quality
may degrade over time. Always make sure the cassette
tape is in good condition before the tape player is
serviced.
Do not touch the bottom side of a CD while handling it;
this could damage the surface. Pick up CDs by
grasping the outer edges or the edge of the hole and
the outer edge.
Care of the CD and DVD Player
The use of CD lens cleaners for CDs is not advised,
due to the risk of contaminating the lens of the CD optics
with lubricants internal to the CD mechanism.
3-142
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fixed Mast Antenna
Chime Level Adjustment
The fixed mast antenna can withstand most car washes
without being damaged. If the mast should ever
become slightly bent, straighten it out by hand. If the
mast is badly bent, replace it.
The radio is used to adjust the vehicle’s chime level. To
change the volume level of the chime, press and
hold pushbutton 6 with the ignition on and the radio
power off. The volume level will change from the normal
level to loud, and LOUD CHIME will appear on the
radio display. To change back to the default or normal
setting, press and hold pushbutton 6 again. The
volume level will change from the loud level to normal,
and NORMAL CHIME will appear on the radio
display. Removing the radio and not replacing it with a
factory radio or chime module will disable vehicle
chimes.
Check occasionally to make sure the mast is still
tightened to the fender. If tightening is required, tighten
by hand, then with a wrench one quarter turn.
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna
System
The XM™ Satellite Radio antenna is located on the roof
of your vehicle. Keep this antenna clear of snow and
ice build up for clear radio reception.
If your vehicle has a sunroof, the performance of the
XM™ system may be affected if the sunroof is open.
Loading items onto the roof of your vehicle can interfere
with the performance of the XM™ system. Make sure
the XM™ Satellite Radio antenna is not obstructed.
3-143
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
3-144
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your Driving, the Road, and
Your Vehicle
{CAUTION:
Defensive driving really means “Be ready for
anything.” On city streets, rural roads, or
expressways, it means “Always expect the
unexpected.” Assume that pedestrians or other
drivers are going to be careless and make
mistakes. Anticipate what they might do and
be ready. Rear-end collisions are about the
most preventable of accidents. Yet they are
common. Allow enough following distance.
Defensive driving requires that a driver
concentrate on the driving task. Anything that
distracts from the driving task makes proper
defensive driving more difficult and can even
cause a collision, with resulting injury. Ask a
passenger to help do these things, or pull off
the road in a safe place to do them. These
simple defensive driving techniques could
save your life.
Defensive Driving
The best advice anyone can give about driving is: Drive
defensively.
Please start with a very important safety device in your
vehicle: Buckle up. See Safety Belts: They Are for
4-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Many adults — by some estimates, nearly half the adult
population — choose never to drink alcohol, so they
never drive after drinking. For persons under 21,
it is against the law in every U.S. state to drink alcohol.
There are good medical, psychological, and
Drunken Driving
Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is
a national tragedy. It is the number one contributor
to the highway death toll, claiming thousands of victims
every year.
developmental reasons for these laws.
The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway
safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol and
then drive. But what if people do? How much is “too
much” if someone plans to drive? It is a lot less
than many might think. Although it depends on each
person and situation, here is some general information
on the problem.
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive
a vehicle:
• Judgment
• Muscular Coordination
• Vision
• Attentiveness
The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) of someone
who is drinking depends upon four things:
Police records show that almost half of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,
these deaths are the result of someone who was
drinking and driving. In recent years, more than
16,000 annual motor vehicle-related deaths have been
associated with the use of alcohol, with more than
300,000 people injured.
• The amount of alcohol consumed
• The drinker’s body weight
• The amount of food that is consumed before and
during drinking
• The length of time it has taken the drinker to
consume the alcohol
4-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
According to the American Medical Association, a 180 lb
(82 kg) person who drinks three 12 ounce (355 ml)
bottles of beer in an hour will end up with a BAC
of about 0.06 percent. The person would reach the
same BAC by drinking three 4 ounce (120 ml) glasses
of wine or three mixed drinks if each had 1-1/2 ounces
(45 ml) of liquors like whiskey, gin, or vodka.
BAC would be close to 0.12 percent. A person who
consumes food just before or during drinking will have
a somewhat lower BAC level.
There is a gender difference, too. Women generally
have a lower relative percentage of body water
than men. Since alcohol is carried in body water, this
means that a woman generally will reach a higher
BAC level than a man of her same body weight will
when each has the same number of drinks.
The law in most U.S. states, and throughout Canada,
sets the legal limit at 0.08 percent. In some other
countries, the limit is even lower. For example, it is
0.05 percent in both France and Germany. The
BAC limit for all commercial drivers in the United States
is 0.04 percent.
The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three to
six drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we have seen,
it depends on how much alcohol is in the drinks,
and how quickly the person drinks them.
It is the amount of alcohol that counts. For example, if
the same person drank three double martinis (3 ounces
or 90 ml of liquor each) within an hour, the person’s
4-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
But the ability to drive is affected well below a BAC of
0.10 percent. Research shows that the driving skills
of many people are impaired at a BAC approaching
0.05 percent, and that the effects are worse at night. All
drivers are impaired at BAC levels above 0.05 percent.
Statistics show that the chance of being in a collision
increases sharply for drivers who have a BAC of
0.05 percent or above. A driver with a BAC level of
0.06 percent has doubled his or her chance of having a
collision. At a BAC level of 0.10 percent, the chance
of this driver having a collision is 12 times greater; at a
level of 0.15 percent, the chance is 25 times greater!
There is something else about drinking and driving that
many people do not know. Medical research shows that
alcohol in a person’s system can make crash injuries
worse, especially injuries to the brain, spinal cord, or
heart. This means that when anyone who has been
drinking — driver or passenger — is in a crash, that
person’s chance of being killed or permanently disabled
is higher than if the person had not been drinking.
{CAUTION:
The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the alcohol in
one drink. No amount of coffee or number of cold
showers will speed that up. “I will be careful” is not the
right answer. What if there is an emergency, a need to
take sudden action, as when a child darts into the street?
A person with even a moderate BAC might not be able to
react quickly enough to avoid the collision.
Drinking and then driving is very dangerous.
Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness, and
judgment can be affected by even a small
amount of alcohol. You can have a serious — or
even fatal — collision if you drive after drinking.
Please do not drink and drive or ride with a
driver who has been drinking. Ride home in a
cab; or if you are with a group, designate a
driver who will not drink.
4-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Control of a Vehicle
Braking
You have three systems that make your vehicle go where
you want it to go. They are the brakes, the steering, and
the accelerator. All three systems have to do their work at
the places where the tires meet the road.
Braking action involves perception time and
reaction time.
First, you have to decide to push on the brake pedal.
That is perception time. Then you have to bring up your
foot and do it. That is reaction time.
Sometimes, as when you are driving on snow or ice, it
is easy to ask more of those control systems than
the tires and road can provide. That means you can lose
control of your vehicle.
Average reaction time is about three-fourths of a
second. But that is only an average. It might be less
with one driver and as long as two or three seconds or
more with another. Age, physical condition, alertness,
coordination, and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol,
drugs, and frustration. But even in three-fourths of a
second, a vehicle moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels
66 feet (20 m). That could be a lot of distance in an
emergency, so keeping enough space between
your vehicle and others is important.
Adding non-GM accessories can affect your vehicle’s
performance. See Accessories and Modifications
on page 5-3.
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly
with the surface of the road, whether it is pavement
or gravel; the condition of the road, whether it is
wet, dry, or icy; tire tread; the condition of your brakes;
the weight of the vehicle; and the amount of brake
force applied.
4-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive in
spurts — heavy acceleration followed by heavy
braking — rather than keeping pace with traffic. This is
a mistake. Your brakes may not have time to cool
between hard stops. Your brakes will wear out much
faster if you do a lot of heavy braking. If you keep pace
with the traffic and allow realistic following distances,
you will eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking.
That means better braking and longer brake life.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
Your vehicle has the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), an
advanced electronic braking system that will help
prevent a braking skid.
When you start your engine and begin to drive away, ABS
will check itself. You may hear a momentary motor or
clicking noise while this test is going on. This is normal.
If there is a problem with
ABS, this warning light will
stay on. See Anti-Lock
If your engine ever stops while you are driving, brake
normally but do not pump your brakes. If you do,
the pedal may get harder to push down. If your engine
stops, you will still have some power brake assist.
But you will use it when you brake. Once the power
assist is used up, it may take longer to stop and
the brake pedal will be harder to push.
Adding non-GM accessories can affect your vehicle’s
performance. See Accessories and Modifications
on page 5-3.
Along with ABS, your vehicle has a Dynamic Rear
Proportioning (DRP) system. If there is a DRP problem,
both the brake and ABS warning lights will come on
accompanied by a 10-second chime. The lights and
chime will come on each time the ignition is turned on
until the problem is repaired. See your dealer for service.
4-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ABS can change the brake pressure faster than any
driver could. The computer is programmed to make the
most of available tire and road conditions. This can
help you steer around the obstacle while braking hard.
Let us say the road is wet and you are driving safely.
Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of you. You slam
on the brakes and continue braking. Here is what
happens with ABS:
A computer senses that wheels are slowing down. If
one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer
will separately work the brakes at each front wheel
and at both rear wheels.
As you brake, your computer keeps receiving updates
on wheel speed and controls braking pressure
accordingly.
4-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
StabiliTrak® System
Remember: ABS does not change the time you need to
get your foot up to the brake pedal or always decrease
stopping distance. If you get too close to the vehicle
in front of you, you will not have time to apply your
brakes if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops. Always
leave enough room up ahead to stop, even though
you have ABS.
Your vehicle is equipped with StabiliTrak®, Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) which combines antilock
brake, traction and stability control systems and helps
the driver maintain directional control of the vehicle
in most driving conditions.
Traction control activates when the controller senses
wheel spin. StabiliTrak® will selectively apply the brakes
and reduce engine torque to help regain traction.
Using ABS
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal
down firmly and let anti-lock work for you. You may feel
the brakes vibrate, or you may notice some noise,
but this is normal.
Stability control activates when the controller senses a
discrepancy between your intended path and the
direction the vehicle is travelling. StabiliTrak® selectively
applies braking pressure at any one of the vehicle’s
brakes to help guide the vehicle in the direction which
you are steering.
Braking in Emergencies
With ABS, you can steer and brake at the same time. In
many emergencies, steering can help you more than
even the very best braking.
When you first start your vehicle and begin to drive
away, the system performs several diagnostic checks to
insure there are no problems. You may hear or feel
the system working. This is normal and does not mean
there is a problem with your vehicle. If driving
Locking Rear Axle
conditions delay system initialization, the STABILITRAK
NOT READY message may be displayed. If this is
the case, your vehicle does not need servicing.
If your vehicle has this feature, your locking rear axle
can give you additional traction on snow, mud, ice, sand
or gravel. It works like a standard axle most of the
time, but when one of the rear wheels has no traction
and the other does, this feature will allow the wheel with
traction to move the vehicle.
For more information on the stability messages, see
4-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the StabiliTrak®
system is both on and
actively controlling
The StabiliTrak® system has three modes of operation:
STABILITRAK ON, TRACTION CONTROL OFF,
and STABILITRAK OFF.
the stability of the vehicle,
the StabiliTrak® light
will blink for the duration of
the event.
STABILITRAK ON -The vehicle will default to
STABILITRAK ON every time the driver starts the
vehicle. The StabiliTrak® light will be off and no DIC
messages will be displayed.
TRACTION CONTROL OFF - The driver can modify the
engine speed management system by momentarily
pressing the StabiliTrak® button on the transmission shift
handle. The StabiliTrak® light will come on and
TRACTION CONTROL OFF will be displayed. For
vehicles without a DIC, the StabiliTrak® indicator light
will come on. Momentarily pressing the StabiliTrak®
button again will return the system to the STABILITRAK
ON mode.
You may also feel or hear the system working. This
is normal.
The StabiliTrak® disable
button is located on the
transmission shift handle.
STABILITRAK OFF - The driver can turn off StabiliTrak®
by pressing the StabiliTrak® button for more than
five seconds. The StabiliTrak® light will come on and
STABILITRAK OFF will be displayed. For vehicles
without a DIC, the StabiliTrak® indicator light will come
on. Momentarily pressing the StabiliTrak® button
again will return the system to the STABILITRAK ON
mode. See StabiliTrak® Off below for more information.
The StabiliTrak® system is automatically disabled in
4LO mode and cannot be turned on until the vehicle is
switched to 2HI, 4HI, or 4AWD.
4-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
It is recommended to leave the system on for normal
driving conditions, but it may be necessary to turn
the system off if your vehicle is stuck in sand, mud, ice
or snow, and you may want to “rock” your vehicle in
an attempt to free it. It may also be necessary to turn off
the system when driving in extreme off-road conditions
where high wheel spin is required. See If Your
page 4-44 for more information.
Traction Control Off
In this mode, stability control and brake-traction control
are functional. Engine speed management will be
modified and the driven wheels can spin more freely.
This can cause the brake-traction control to activate
more frequently. If the controller detects excessive wheel
spin in this mode, the StabiliTrak® indicator light may
blink and the STABILITRAK ACTIVE message may be
displayed to warn the driver that damage may occur
to the transfer case.
When the transfer case is in 4LO, the stability system is
automatically disabled. The StabiliTrak® light will
come on and the STABILITRAK OFF message will
appear on the DIC. The StabiliTrak® system cannot be
turned on until the vehicle is switched to 2HI, 4HI,
or 4AWD.
StabiliTrak® Off
In this mode, both stability control and part of the
traction control system are disabled. Your vehicle will
still have brake-traction control, but will not be able
to use the engine speed management system. You may
still hear system noises as a result of the brake-traction
control coming on. If the controller detects excessive
wheel spin in this mode, the StabiliTrak® indicator light
may blink and the STABILITRAK ACTIVE message
may be displayed to warn the driver that damage may
occur to the transfer case.
4-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The following chart describes the StabiliTrak® system events and the corresponding messages and lights that will be
displayed on the instrument panel cluster.
Vehicles with a DIC
Vehicles without a DIC
StabiliTrak®
StabiliTrak®
StabiliTrak®
DIC Message
Indicator Light
Indicator Light
Service Light
Event
StabiliTrak® On mode
(System is fully enabled, but
is not actively controlling
vehicle stability).
Traction Control
Off Mode
StabiliTrak® Off Mode
(StabiliTrak® indicator light
will flash when system first
enters this mode).
Off
None
Off
Off
Off
Off
Solid
Solid
Traction Control Off
StabiliTrak® Off
Solid
Solid
StabiliTrak® system
activates using engine
speed management, brake
traction control, and/or
stability control.
Blinking
StabiliTrak® Active
Service StabiliTrak®
Blinking
Off
StabiliTrak® system is
disabled due to a system
fault.
Solid
Solid
Solid
Solid
Solid
Off
StabiliTrak® system is
disabled due to a failure
to initialize.
StabiliTrak® Not
Ready
4-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If the StabiliTrak® light comes on due to
heavy braking and/or because the traction control
system has been continuously active, do not
allow the wheel(s) of one axle to spin excessively. If
you do, you may be causing damage to the
transfer case. This could lead to costly repairs not
covered by your warranty.
If your vehicle is in cruise control when the system
activates, the StabiliTrak® light will blink, and the cruise
control will automatically disengage. When road
conditions allow, you may re-engage the cruise control.
StabiliTrak® will turn off automatically if a problem is
detected in the system. The StabiliTrak® light will come
on and SERVICE STABILITRAK will be displayed on
the DIC. For vehicles without a DIC, the StabiliTrak®
light and the StabiliTrak® service light will both come on.
If the SERVICE STABILITRAK message (or StabiliTrak®
service light) does not clear itself after restarting the
vehicle, you should see your dealer for service.
Notice: If you allow the wheel(s) of one axle to spin
excessively while the StabiliTrak®, ABS and brake
warning lights and the SERVICE STABILITRAK
message are displayed, you could damage the
transfer case. The repairs would not be covered by
your warranty. Reduce engine power and do not
spin the wheel(s) excessively while these lights and
this message are displayed.
StabiliTrak® may activate on dry or rough roads or
under conditions such as heavy acceleration while
turning or abrupt upshifts/downshifts of the transmission.
When this happens, you may notice a reduction in
acceleration, or may hear a noise or vibration. This
is normal.
Adding non-GM accessories can affect your vehicle’s
performance. See Accessories and Modifications
on page 5-3 for more information.
4-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve.
Then you suddenly accelerate. Both control
systems — steering and acceleration — have to do their
work where the tires meet the road. Adding the sudden
acceleration can demand too much of those places. You
can lose control.
Steering
Power Steering
If you lose power steering assist because the engine
stops or the system is not functioning, you can steer but
it will take much more effort.
What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up on
the accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the way you
want it to go, and slow down.
Steering Tips
It is important to take curves at a reasonable speed.
Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should
adjust your speed. Of course, the posted speeds
are based on good weather and road conditions. Under
less favorable conditions you will want to go slower.
A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned on
the news happen on curves. Here is why:
Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is subject to
the same laws of physics when driving on curves.
The traction of the tires against the road surface makes
it possible for the vehicle to change its path when
you turn the front wheels. If there is no traction, inertia
will keep the vehicle going in the same direction. If
you have ever tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice, you
will understand this.
If you need to reduce your speed as you approach
a curve, do it before you enter the curve, while your front
wheels are straight ahead.
Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive” through the
curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait to
accelerate until you are out of the curve, and then
accelerate gently into the straightaway.
The traction you can get in a curve depends on the
condition of your tires and the road surface, the angle at
which the curve is banked, and your speed. While
you are in a curve, speed is the one factor you
can control.
Adding non-GM accessories can affect your vehicle’s
performance. See Accessories and Modifications
on page 5-3.
4-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can be more effective
than braking. For example, you come over a hill and find
a truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls
out from nowhere, or a child darts out from between
parked cars and stops right in front of you. You
can avoid these problems by braking — if you can stop
in time. But sometimes you cannot; there is not room.
That is the time for evasive action — steering around
the problem.
Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like
these. First apply your brakes.
speed as you can from a possible collision. Then
steer around the problem, to the left or right depending
on the space available.
An emergency like this requires close attention and a
quick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel at
the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, you
can turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without
removing either hand. But you have to act fast, steer
quickly, and just as quickly straighten the wheel
once you have avoided the object.
The fact that such emergency situations are always
possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving
at all times and wear safety belts properly.
4-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Off-Road Recovery
Passing
You may find that your right wheels have dropped
off the edge of a road onto the shoulder while you
are driving.
The driver of a vehicle about to pass another on a
two-lane highway waits for just the right moment,
accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, then
goes back into the right lane again. A simple maneuver?
Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on a two-lane
highway is a potentially dangerous move, since the
passing vehicle occupies the same lane as oncoming
traffic for several seconds. A miscalculation, an error in
judgment, or a brief surrender to frustration or anger
can suddenly put the passing driver face to face with the
worst of all traffic accidents — the head-on collision.
So here are some tips for passing:
• Drive ahead. Look down the road, to the sides
and to crossroads for situations that might affect
your passing patterns. If you have any doubt
whatsoever about making a successful pass, wait
for a better time.
• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings and
lines. If you can see a sign up ahead that might
indicate a turn or an intersection, delay your pass.
A broken center line usually indicates it is all
right to pass, providing the road ahead is clear.
Never cross a solid line on your side of the lane or
a double solid line, even if the road seems empty
of approaching traffic.
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the
accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way,
steer so that your vehicle straddles the edge of
the pavement. You can turn the steering wheel up to
one-quarter turn until the right front tire contacts
the pavement edge. Then turn your steering wheel to go
straight down the roadway.
4-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to
pass while you are awaiting an opportunity. For
one thing, following too closely reduces your area
of vision, especially if you are following a larger
vehicle. Also, you will not have adequate space if
the vehicle ahead suddenly slows or stops.
Keep back a reasonable distance.
• Check your mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and
start your left lane change signal before moving out
of the right lane to pass. When you are far
enough ahead of the passed vehicle to see its front
in your inside mirror, activate your right lane
change signal and move back into the right lane.
Remember that your passenger side outside mirror
is convex. The vehicle you just passed may
• When it looks like a chance to pass is coming up,
start to accelerate but stay in the right lane and
do not get too close. Time your move so you will be
increasing speed as the time comes to move into
the other lane. If the way is clear to pass, you
will have a running start that more than makes up
for the distance you would lose by dropping
back. And if something happens to cause you to
cancel your pass, you need only slow down
and drop back again and wait for another
opportunity.
seem to be farther away from you than it really is.
• Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time on
two-lane roads. Reconsider before passing the
next vehicle.
• Do not overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly.
Even though the brake lamps are not flashing, it
may be slowing down or starting to turn.
• If you are being passed, make it easy for the
following driver to get ahead of you. Perhaps
you can ease a little to the right.
• If other vehicles are lined up to pass a slow vehicle,
wait your turn. But take care that someone is not
trying to pass you as you pull out to pass the slow
vehicle. Remember to glance over your shoulder
and check the blind spot.
4-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the
accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want
the vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough,
your vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready
for a second skid if it occurs.
Loss of Control
Let us review what driving experts say about what
happens when the three control systems — brakes,
steering, and acceleration — do not have enough friction
where the tires meet the road to do what the driver
has asked.
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,
gravel, or other material is on the road. For safety, you
will want to slow down and adjust your driving to
these conditions. It is important to slow down on slippery
surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and
vehicle control more limited.
In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying to
steer and constantly seek an escape route or area of
less danger.
Skidding
While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try your
best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration, or braking,
including reducing vehicle speed by shifting to a lower
gear. Any sudden changes could cause the tires to slide.
You may not realize the surface is slippery until your
vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning
clues — such as enough water, ice, or packed snow on
the road to make a mirrored surface — and slow down
when you have any doubt.
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable
care suited to existing conditions, and by not overdriving
those conditions. But skids are always possible.
The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle’s
three control systems. In the braking skid, your wheels
are not rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too much
speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and lose
cornering force. And in the acceleration skid, too much
throttle causes the driving wheels to spin.
Remember: Any Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) helps
avoid only the braking skid.
A cornering skid is best handled by easing your foot off
the accelerator pedal.
4-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before You Go Off-Roading
Off-Road Driving
There are some things to do before you go out. For
example, be sure to have all necessary maintenance
and service work done. Check to make sure all
underbody shields, if the vehicle has them, are
properly attached.
This off-road guide is for vehicles that have four-wheel
does not have four-wheel drive, you should not
drive off-road unless you are on a level, solid surface.
Off-road driving can be great fun. But it does have some
definite hazards. The greatest of these is the terrain itself.
Be sure you read all the information about your
four-wheel-drive vehicle in this manual.
“Off-roading” means you have left the great North
American road system behind. Traffic lanes are not
marked. Curves are not banked. There are no
road signs. Surfaces can be slippery, rough, uphill, or
downhill. In short, you have gone right back to nature.
Is there enough fuel? Is the spare tire fully inflated?
Are the fluid levels up where they should be? What are
the local laws that apply to off-roading where you
will be driving? If you do not know, you should check
with law enforcement people in the area. Will you be on
someone’s private land? If so, be sure to get the
necessary permission.
Off-road driving involves some new skills. And that
is why it is very important that you read this guide.
You will find many driving tips and suggestions. These
will help make your off-road driving safer and
more enjoyable.
4-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
There are some important things to remember about
how to load your vehicle.
Loading Your Vehicle for Off-Road
Driving
• The heaviest things should be on the load floor and
forward of the rear axle. Put heavier items as far
forward as you can.
{CAUTION:
• Be sure the load is secured properly, so driving on
the off-road terrain does not toss things around.
• Cargo on the load floor piled higher than
the seatbacks can be thrown forward
during a sudden stop. You or your
passengers could be injured. Keep cargo
below the top of the seatbacks.
You will find other important information in this manual.
• Unsecured cargo on the load floor can be
tossed about when driving over rough
terrain. You or your passengers can be
struck by flying objects. Secure the
cargo properly.
• Heavy loads on the roof raise the vehicle’s
center of gravity, making it more likely to
roll over. You can be seriously or fatally
injured if the vehicle rolls over. Put heavy
loads inside the cargo area, not on the
roof. Keep cargo in the cargo area as far
forward and low as possible.
4-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Environmental Concerns
Traveling to Remote Areas
Off-road driving can provide wholesome and satisfying
recreation. However, it also raises environmental
concerns. We recognize these concerns and urge every
off-roader to follow these basic rules for protecting
the environment:
It makes sense to plan your trip, especially when going
to a remote area. Know the terrain and plan your
route. You are much less likely to get bad surprises.
Get accurate maps of trails and terrain. Try to learn of
any blocked or closed roads.
• Always use established trails, roads, and areas that
have been specially set aside for public off-road
recreational driving; obey all posted regulations.
It is also a good idea to travel with at least one other
vehicle. If something happens to one of them, the other
can help quickly.
Does your vehicle have a winch? If so, be sure to read
the winch instructions. In a remote area, a winch
can be handy if you get stuck. But you will want to know
how to use it properly.
• Avoid any driving practice that could damage
the environment — shrubs, flowers, trees,
grasses — or disturb wildlife. This includes
wheel-spinning, breaking down trees, or
unnecessary driving through streams or over
soft ground.
Getting Familiar with Off-Road Driving
It is a good idea to practice in an area that is safe
and close to home before you go into the wilderness.
Off-road driving does require some new and different
skills. Here is what we mean.
• Always carry a litter bag — make sure all refuse is
removed from any campsite before leaving.
• Take extreme care with open fires where permitted,
camp stoves, and lanterns.
Tune your senses to different kinds of signals. Your
eyes, for example, need to constantly sweep the terrain
for unexpected obstacles. Your ears need to listen
for unusual tire or engine sounds. With your arms,
hands, feet, and body, you will need to respond to
vibrations and vehicle bounce.
• Never park your vehicle over dry grass or other
combustible materials that could catch fire from
the heat of the vehicle’s exhaust system.
4-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controlling your vehicle is the key to successful off-road
driving. One of the best ways to control your vehicle
is to control your speed. Here are some things to keep
in mind. At higher speeds:
Scanning the Terrain
Off-road driving can take you over many different kinds
of terrain. You need to be familiar with the terrain
and its many different features. Here are some things
to consider.
• You approach things faster and you have less time
to scan the terrain for obstacles.
Surface Conditions: Off-roading can take you over
hard-packed dirt, gravel, rocks, grass, sand, mud, snow,
or ice. Each of these surfaces affects the steering,
acceleration, and braking of your vehicle in different
ways. Depending upon the kind of surface you are on,
you may experience slipping, sliding, wheel spinning,
delayed acceleration, poor traction, and longer
braking distances.
• You have less time to react.
• You have more vehicle bounce when you drive over
obstacles.
• You will need more distance for braking, especially
since you are on an unpaved surface.
Surface Obstacles: Unseen or hidden obstacles can
be hazardous. A rock, log, hole, rut, or bump can startle
you if you are not prepared for them. Often these
obstacles are hidden by grass, bushes, snow, or even
the rise and fall of the terrain itself. Here are some
things to consider:
{CAUTION:
When you are driving off-road, bouncing and
quick changes in direction can easily throw
you out of position. This could cause you to
lose control and crash. So, whether you are
driving on or off the road, you and your
passengers should wear safety belts.
• Is the path ahead clear?
• Will the surface texture change abruptly up ahead?
• Does the travel take you uphill or downhill?
There is more discussion of these subjects later.
• Will you have to stop suddenly or change
direction quickly?
4-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When you drive over obstacles or rough terrain, keep a
firm grip on the steering wheel. Ruts, troughs, or
other surface features can jerk the wheel out of your
hands if you are not prepared.
Driving on Off-Road Hills
Off-road driving often takes you up, down, or across a
hill. Driving safely on hills requires good judgment
and an understanding of what your vehicle can and
cannot do. There are some hills that simply cannot be
driven, no matter how well built the vehicle.
When you drive over bumps, rocks, or other obstacles,
the wheels can leave the ground. If this happens,
even with one or two wheels, you cannot control the
vehicle as well or at all.
Because you will be on an unpaved surface, it is
especially important to avoid sudden acceleration,
sudden turns, or sudden braking.
{CAUTION:
Many hills are simply too steep for any vehicle.
If you drive up them, you will stall. If you drive
down them, you cannot control your speed. If
you drive across them, you will roll over. You
could be seriously injured or killed. If you have
any doubt about the steepness, do not drive
the hill.
In a way, off-road driving requires a different kind of
alertness from driving on paved roads and highways.
There are no road signs, posted speed limits, or signal
lights. You have to use your own good judgment
about what is safe and what is not.
Drinking and driving can be very dangerous on any
road. And this is certainly true for off-road driving. At the
very time you need special alertness and driving
skills, your reflexes, perceptions, and judgment can be
affected by even a small amount of alcohol. You
could have a serious — or even fatal — accident if you
drink and drive or ride with a driver who has been
4-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Approaching a Hill
Driving Uphill
When you approach a hill, you need to decide if it is
one of those hills that is just too steep to climb, descend,
or cross. Steepness can be hard to judge. On a very
small hill, for example, there may be a smooth, constant
incline with only a small change in elevation where
you can easily see all the way to the top. On a large hill,
the incline may get steeper as you near the top, but
you may not see this because the crest of the hill
is hidden by bushes, grass, or shrubs.
Once you decide you can safely drive up the hill, you
need to take some special steps.
• Use a low gear and get a firm grip on the
steering wheel.
• Get a smooth start up the hill and try to maintain
your speed. Do not use more power than you
need, because you do not want the wheels to start
spinning or sliding.
Here are some other things to consider as you
approach a hill.
• Is there a constant incline, or does the hill get
sharply steeper in places?
• Try to drive straight up the hill if at all possible. If
the path twists and turns, you might want to find
another route.
• Is there good traction on the hillside, or will the
surface cause tire slipping?
• Is there a straight path up or down the hill so you
will not have to make turning maneuvers?
• Are there obstructions on the hill that can block your
path, such as boulders, trees, logs, or ruts?
• What is beyond the hill? Is there a cliff, an
embankment, a drop-off, a fence? Get out and walk
the hill if you do not know. It is the smart way
to find out.
{CAUTION:
Turning or driving across steep hills can be
dangerous. You could lose traction, slide
sideways, and possibly roll over. You could be
seriously injured or killed. When driving up
hills, always try to go straight up.
• Is the hill simply too rough? Steep hills often have
ruts, gullies, troughs, and exposed rocks because
they are more susceptible to the effects of erosion.
4-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Ease up on your speed as you approach the top of
the hill.
Q: What should I do if my vehicle stalls, or is about
to stall, and I cannot make it up the hill?
• Attach a flag to the vehicle to make you more
visible to approaching traffic on trails or hills.
A: If this happens, there are some things you should
do, and there are some things you must not do.
First, here is what you should do:
• Sound the horn as you approach the top of the hill
to let opposing traffic know you are there.
• Push the brake pedal to stop the vehicle and
keep it from rolling backwards. Also, apply the
parking brake.
• Use your headlamps even during the day. They
make you more visible to oncoming traffic.
• If the engine is still running, shift the transmission
to REVERSE (R), release the parking brake, and
slowly back down the hill in REVERSE (R).
{CAUTION:
• If the engine has stopped running, you will need to
restart it. With the brake pedal pressed and the
parking brake still applied, shift the transmission to
PARK (P) and restart the engine. Then, shift to
REVERSE (R), release the parking brake, and
slowly back down the hill as straight as possible in
REVERSE (R).
Driving to the top (crest) of a hill at full speed
can cause an accident. There could be a
drop-off, embankment, cliff, or even another
vehicle. You could be seriously injured or
killed. As you near the top of a hill, slow down
and stay alert.
• As you are backing down the hill, put your left hand
on the steering wheel at the 12 o’clock position.
This way, you will be able to tell if the wheels are
straight and maneuver as you back down. It is
best that you back down the hill with the wheels
straight rather than in the left or right direction.
Turning the wheel too far to the left or right
will increase the possibility of a rollover.
4-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Here are some things you must not do if you stall, or
are about to stall, when going up a hill.
Q: Suppose, after stalling, I try to back down the hill
and decide I just cannot do it. What should I do?
• Never attempt to prevent a stall by shifting into
NEUTRAL (N) to rev-up the engine and regain
forward momentum. This will not work. Your vehicle
will roll backwards very quickly and you could go
out of control.
A: Set the parking brake, put the transmission in
PARK (P) and turn off the engine. Leave the vehicle
and go get some help. Exit on the uphill side and
stay clear of the path the vehicle would take if
it rolled downhill. Do not shift the transfer case to
NEUTRAL when you leave the vehicle. Leave
it in some gear.
Instead, apply the regular brake to stop the vehicle.
Then apply the parking brake. Shift to
REVERSE (R), release the parking brake, and
slowly back straight down.
• Never attempt to turn around if you are about to
stall when going up a hill. If the hill is steep
enough to stall your vehicle, it is steep enough to
cause you to roll over if you turn around. If you
cannot make it up the hill, you must back straight
down the hill.
{CAUTION:
Shifting the transfer case to NEUTRAL can
cause your vehicle to roll even if the
transmission is in PARK (P). This is because
the NEUTRAL position on the transfer case
overrides the transmission. You or someone
else could be injured. If you are going to leave
your vehicle, set the parking brake and shift
the transmission to PARK (P). But do not shift
the transfer case to NEUTRAL. Leave the
transfer case in the Two-Wheel High,
Four-Wheel High or Four-Wheel Low position.
4-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving Downhill
When off-roading takes you downhill, you will want to
Q: Are there some things I should not do when
driving down a hill?
consider a number of things:
• How steep is the downhill? Will I be able to maintain
vehicle control?
• What is the surface like? Smooth? Rough?
Slippery? Hard-packed dirt? Gravel?
• Are there hidden surface obstacles? Ruts? Logs?
Boulders?
A: Yes! These are important because if you ignore
them you could lose control and have a serious
accident.
• When driving downhill, avoid turns that take you
across the incline of the hill. A hill that is not too
steep to drive down may be too steep to drive
across. You could roll over if you do not drive
straight down.
• What is at the bottom of the hill? Is there a hidden
creek bank or even a river bottom with large rocks?
• Never go downhill with the transmission in
NEUTRAL (N). This is called “free-wheeling.” The
brakes will have to do all the work and could
overheat and fade.
If you decide you can go down a hill safely, then try to
keep your vehicle headed straight down, and use a
low gear. This way, engine drag can help the brakes and
they will not have to do all the work. Descend slowly,
keeping your vehicle under control at all times.
Q: Am I likely to stall when going downhill?
A: It is much more likely to happen going uphill. But if
{CAUTION:
it happens going downhill, here is what to do.
1. Stop your vehicle by applying the regular brakes.
Apply the parking brake.
Heavy braking when going down a hill can
cause your brakes to overheat and fade. This
could cause loss of control and a serious
accident. Apply the brakes lightly when
descending a hill and use a low gear to keep
vehicle speed under control.
2. Shift to PARK (P) and, while still braking, restart
the engine.
3. Shift back to a low gear, release the parking brake,
and drive straight down.
4. If the engine will not start, get out and get help.
4-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For reasons like these, you need to decide carefully
whether to try to drive across an incline. Just because the
trail goes across the incline does not mean you have to
drive it. The last vehicle to try it might have rolled over.
Driving Across an Incline
Sooner or later, an off-road trail will probably go across
the incline of a hill. If this happens, you have to
decide whether to try to drive across the incline. Here
are some things to consider:
• A hill that can be driven straight up or down may be
too steep to drive across. When you go straight up or
down a hill, the length of the wheel base — the
distance from the front wheels to the rear
{CAUTION:
Driving across an incline that is too steep will
make your vehicle roll over. You could be
seriously injured or killed. If you have any
doubt about the steepness of the incline, do
not drive across it. Find another route instead.
wheels — reduces the likelihood the vehicle will
tumble end over end. But when you drive across an
incline, the much more narrow track width — the
distance between the left and right wheels — may
not prevent the vehicle from tilting and rolling over.
Also, driving across an incline puts more weight on
the downhill wheels. This could cause a downhill
slide or a rollover.
Q: What if I am driving across an incline that is not
too steep, but I hit some loose gravel and start
to slide downhill. What should I do?
• Surface conditions can be a problem when you drive
across a hill. Loose gravel, muddy spots, or even wet
grass can cause the tires to slip sideways, downhill.
If the vehicle slips sideways, it can hit something that
will trip it — a rock, a rut, etc. — and roll over.
A: If you feel your vehicle starting to slide sideways,
turn downhill. This should help straighten out the
vehicle and prevent the side slipping. However,
a much better way to prevent this is to get out and
“walk the course” so you know what the surface
is like before you drive it.
• Hidden obstacles can make the steepness of the
incline even worse. If you drive across a rock with the
uphill wheels, or if the downhill wheels drop into a rut
or depression, your vehicle can tilt even more.
4-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Stalling on an Incline
{CAUTION:
If your vehicle stalls when you are crossing an incline,
be sure you, and any passengers, get out on the
uphill side, even if the door there is harder to open. If
you get out on the downhill side and the vehicle starts to
roll over, you will be right in its path.
Getting out on the downhill (low) side of a
vehicle stopped across an incline is
dangerous. If the vehicle rolls over, you could
be crushed or killed. Always get out on the
uphill (high) side of the vehicle and stay well
clear of the rollover path.
If you have to walk down the slope, stay out of the path
the vehicle will take if it does roll over.
4-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving in Mud, Sand, Snow, or Ice
{CAUTION:
When you drive in mud, snow, or sand, the wheels will
not get good traction. You cannot accelerate as
quickly, turning is more difficult, and you will need longer
braking distances.
Driving on frozen lakes, ponds, or rivers can
be dangerous. Underwater springs, currents
under the ice, or sudden thaws can weaken the
ice. Your vehicle could fall through the ice and
you and your passengers could drown. Drive
your vehicle on safe surfaces only.
It is best to use a low gear when you are in mud — the
deeper the mud, the lower the gear. In really deep
mud, the idea is to keep your vehicle moving so you do
not get stuck.
When you drive on sand, you will sense a change in
wheel traction. But it will depend upon how loosely
packed the sand is. On loosely packed sand, such as
on beaches or sand dunes, the tires will tend to sink into
the sand. This has an effect on steering, accelerating,
and braking. Drive at a reduced speed and avoid sharp
turns or abrupt maneuvers.
Driving in Water
Heavy rain can mean flash flooding, and flood waters
demand extreme caution.
Find out how deep the water is before you drive through
it. If it is deep enough to cover the wheel hubs, axles
or exhaust pipe, do not try it — you probably will not get
through. Also, water that deep can damage the axle
and other vehicle parts.
Hard packed snow and ice offer the worst tire traction.
On these surfaces, it is very easy to lose control.
On wet ice, for example, the traction is so poor that you
will have difficulty accelerating. And if you do get
moving, poor steering and difficult braking can cause
you to slide out of control.
4-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the water is not too deep, drive slowly through it. At
faster speeds, water splashes on the ignition system and
your vehicle can stall. Stalling can also occur if you
get the tailpipe under water. And, as long as the tailpipe
is under water, you will never be able to start the
engine. When you go through water, remember that
when the brakes get wet, it may take you longer to stop.
After Off-Road Driving
Remove any brush or debris that has collected on the
underbody, chassis, or under the hood. These
accumulations can be a fire hazard.
After operation in mud or sand, have the brake linings
cleaned and checked. These substances can cause
glazing and uneven braking. Check the body structure,
steering, suspension, wheels, tires, and exhaust
system for damage. Also, check the fuel lines and
cooling system for any leakage.
{CAUTION:
Your vehicle will require more frequent service due to
off-road use. Refer to the Maintenance Schedule
for additional information.
Driving through rushing water can be
dangerous. Deep water can sweep your
vehicle downstream and you and your
passengers could drown. If it is only shallow
water, it can still wash away the ground from
under your tires, and you could lose traction
and roll the vehicle over. Do not drive through
rushing water.
more information on driving through water.
4-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
What you do in the daytime can also affect your night
vision. For example, if you spend the day in bright
sunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses. Your eyes
will have less trouble adjusting to night. But if you
are driving, do not wear sunglasses at night. They may
cut down on glare from headlamps, but they also
make a lot of things invisible.
Driving at Night
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving.
One reason is that some drivers are likely to be
impaired — by alcohol or drugs, with night vision
problems, or by fatigue.
Here are some tips on night driving.
• Drive defensively.
You can be temporarily blinded by approaching
headlamps. It can take a second or two, or even several
seconds, for your eyes to re-adjust to the dark. When
you are faced with severe glare, as from a driver
who does not lower the high beams, or a vehicle with
misaimed headlamps, slow down a little. Avoid
staring directly into the approaching headlamps.
• Do not drink and drive.
• Adjust the inside rearview mirror to reduce the glare
from headlamps behind you.
• Since you cannot see as well, you may need to
slow down and keep more space between you
and other vehicles.
Keep the windshield and all the glass on your vehicle
clean — inside and out. Glare at night is made much
worse by dirt on the glass. Even the inside of the glass
can build up a film caused by dust. Dirty glass makes
lights dazzle and flash more than clean glass would,
making the pupils of your eyes contract repeatedly.
• Slow down, especially on higher speed roads. Your
vehicle’s headlamps can light up only so much
road ahead.
• In remote areas, watch for animals.
Remember that the headlamps light up far less of a
roadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep your eyes
moving; that way, it is easier to pick out dimly lighted
objects. Just as the headlamps should be checked
regularly for proper aim, so should your eyes be
examined regularly. Some drivers suffer from night
blindness — the inability to see in dim light — and are not
even aware of it.
• If you are tired, pull off the road in a safe place
and rest.
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime. But
as we get older these differences increase. A
50-year-old driver may require at least twice as much
light to see the same thing at night as a 20-year-old.
4-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see. Even if your
windshield wiper blades are in good shape, a heavy
rain can make it harder to see road signs and
traffic signals, pavement markings, the edge of the road,
and even people walking.
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
It is wise to keep your wiping equipment in good shape
and keep your windshield washer fluid reservoir filled
with washer fluid. Replace your windshield wiper inserts
when they show signs of streaking or missing areas
on the windshield, or when strips of rubber start
to separate from the inserts.
{CAUTION:
Wet brakes can cause accidents. They will not
work as well in a quick stop and may cause
pulling to one side. You could lose control of
the vehicle.
Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On a wet
road, you cannot stop, accelerate, or turn as well
because your tire-to-road traction is not as good as on
dry roads. And, if your tires do not have much tread
left, you will get even less traction. It is always wise to
go slower and be cautious if rain starts to fall while
you are driving. The surface may get wet suddenly when
your reflexes are tuned for driving on dry pavement.
After driving through a large puddle of water
or a car wash, apply your brake pedal lightly
until your brakes work normally.
Driving too fast through large water puddles or even
going through some car washes can cause problems,
too. The water may affect your brakes. Try to avoid
puddles. But if you cannot, try to slow down before you
hit them.
4-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hydroplaning
Driving Through Flowing Water
Hydroplaning is dangerous. So much water can build up
under your tires that they can actually ride on the
water. This can happen if the road is wet enough and
you are going fast enough. When your vehicle is
hydroplaning, it has little or no contact with the road.
{CAUTION:
Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces.
If you try to drive through flowing water, as you
might at a low water crossing, your vehicle can
be carried away. As little as six inches of
flowing water can carry away a smaller vehicle.
If this happens, you and other vehicle
occupants could drown. Do not ignore police
warning signs, and otherwise be very cautious
about trying to drive through flowing water.
Hydroplaning does not happen often. But it can if your
tires do not have much tread or if the pressure in
one or more is low. It can happen if a lot of water is
standing on the road. If you can see reflections
from trees, telephone poles, or other vehicles, and
raindrops dimple the water’s surface, there could be
hydroplaning.
Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds. There
just is not a hard and fast rule about hydroplaning.
The best advice is to slow down when it is raining.
Some Other Rainy Weather Tips
Driving Through Deep Standing Water
• Besides slowing down, allow some extra following
distance. And be especially careful when you
pass another vehicle. Allow yourself more clear
room ahead, and be prepared to have your
view restricted by road spray.
Notice: If you drive too quickly through deep
puddles or standing water, water can come in
through your engine’s air intake and badly damage
your engine. Never drive through water that is
slightly lower than the underbody of your vehicle. If
you cannot avoid deep puddles or standing water,
drive through them very slowly.
on page 5-55.
4-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Here are ways to increase your safety in city driving:
City Driving
• Know the best way to get to where you are
going. Get a city map and plan your trip into
an unknown part of the city just as you would for a
cross-country trip.
• Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross
most large cities. You will save time and energy.
• Treat a green light as a warning signal. A traffic
light is there because the corner is busy enough
to need it. When a light turns green, and just before
you start to move, check both ways for vehicles
that have not cleared the intersection or may
be running the red light.
One of the biggest problems with city streets is the
amount of traffic on them. You will want to watch out for
what the other drivers are doing and pay attention to
traffic signals.
4-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The most important advice on freeway driving is: Keep
up with traffic and keep to the right. Drive at the
same speed most of the other drivers are driving.
Too-fast or too-slow driving breaks a smooth traffic flow.
Treat the left lane on a freeway as a passing lane.
Freeway Driving
At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leads to the
freeway. If you have a clear view of the freeway as you
drive along the entrance ramp, you should begin to check
traffic. Try to determine where you expect to blend with
the flow. Try to merge into the gap at close to the
prevailing speed. Switch on your turn signal, check your
mirrors, and glance over your shoulder as often as
necessary. Try to blend smoothly with the traffic flow.
Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speed to the
posted limit or to the prevailing rate if it is slower.
Stay in the right lane unless you want to pass.
Before changing lanes, check your mirrors. Then use
your turn signal.
Just before you leave the lane, glance quickly over your
shoulder to make sure there is not another vehicle in
your blind spot.
Mile for mile, freeways — also called thruways, parkways,
expressways, turnpikes, or superhighways — are the
safest of all roads. But they have their own special rules.
4-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Once you are moving on the freeway, make certain you
allow a reasonable following distance. Expect to
move slightly slower at night.
Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep it
serviced and maintained, it is ready to go. If it needs
service, have it done before starting out. Of course, you
will find experienced and able service experts in GM
dealerships all across North America. They will be ready
and willing to help if you need it.
When you want to leave the freeway, move to the
proper lane well in advance. If you miss your exit, do
not, under any circumstances, stop and back up. Drive
on to the next exit.
Here are some things you can check before a trip:
• Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoir full? Are
The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quite sharply.
The exit speed is usually posted.
all windows clean inside and outside?
Reduce your speed according to your speedometer, not
to your sense of motion. After driving for any distance
at higher speeds, you may tend to think you are
going slower than you actually are.
• Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?
• Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have you checked
all levels?
• Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lenses clean?
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
• Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,
trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enough for
long-distance driving? Are the tires all inflated to the
recommended pressure?
Make sure you are ready. Try to be well rested. If you
must start when you are not fresh — such as after
a day’s work — do not plan to make too many miles that
first part of the journey. Wear comfortable clothing
and shoes you can easily drive in.
• Weather Forecasts: What is the weather outlook
along your route? Should you delay your trip a
short time to avoid a major storm system?
• Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?
4-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Highway Hypnosis
Hill and Mountain Roads
Is there actually such a condition as highway hypnosis?
Or is it just plain falling asleep at the wheel? Call it
highway hypnosis, lack of awareness, or whatever.
There is something about an easy stretch of road with
the same scenery, along with the hum of the tires on the
road, the drone of the engine, and the rush of the
wind against the vehicle that can make you sleepy. Do
not let it happen to you! If it does, your vehicle can
leave the road in less than a second, and you could
crash and be injured.
What can you do about highway hypnosis? First, be
aware that it can happen.
Then here are some tips:
• Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, with a
comfortably cool interior.
• Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead and
to the sides. Check your mirrors and your
instruments frequently.
Driving on steep hills or mountains is different from
driving in flat or rolling terrain.
If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you are
planning to visit there, here are some tips that can make
your trips safer and more enjoyable. See Off-Road
• If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest,
service, or parking area and take a nap, get some
exercise, or both. For safety, treat drowsiness
on the highway as an emergency.
• Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check all fluid
levels and also the brakes, tires, cooling system, and
transmission. These parts can work hard on
mountain roads.
4-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Know how to go down hills. The most important
thing to know is this: let your engine do some of
the slowing down. Shift to a lower gear when you go
down a steep or long hill.
{CAUTION:
If you do not shift down, your brakes could get
so hot that they would not work well. You
would then have poor braking or even none
going down a hill. You could crash. Shift down
to let your engine assist your brakes on a
steep downhill slope.
• Know how to go uphill. You may want to shift down
to a lower gear. The lower gears help cool your
engine and transmission, and you can climb the
hill better.
• Stay in your own lane when driving on two-lane
roads in hills or mountains. Do not swing wide
or cut across the center of the road. Drive at speeds
that let you stay in your own lane.
• As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. There
could be something in your lane, like a stalled car or
an accident.
{CAUTION:
Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or with the
ignition off is dangerous. Your brakes will have
to do all the work of slowing down. They could
get so hot that they would not work well. You
would then have poor braking or even none
going down a hill. You could crash. Always
have your engine running and your vehicle in
gear when you go downhill.
• You may see highway signs on mountains that
warn of special problems. Examples are long
grades, passing or no-passing zones, a falling rocks
area, or winding roads. Be alert to these and take
appropriate action.
4-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, a
supply of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some winter
outer clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a red
cloth, and reflective warning triangles. And, if you will be
driving under severe conditions, include a small bag
of sand, a piece of old carpet, or a couple of burlap bags
to help provide traction. Be sure you properly secure
these items in your vehicle.
Winter Driving
Driving on Snow or Ice
Most of the time, those places where the tires meet the
road probably have good traction.
However, if there is snow or ice between the tires and
the road, you can have a very slippery situation. You will
have a lot less traction, or grip, and will need to be
very careful.
Here are some tips for winter driving:
• Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.
• You may want to put winter emergency supplies in
your vehicle.
4-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Whatever the condition — smooth ice, packed, blowing,
or loose snow — drive with caution.
Accelerate gently. Try not to break the fragile traction. If
you accelerate too fast, the drive wheels will spin and
polish the surface under the tires even more.
Your Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) improves your
vehicle’s stability when you make a hard stop on
a slippery road. Even though you have ABS, you will
want to begin stopping sooner than you would on
dry pavement. See Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
on page 4-7.
• Allow greater following distance on any slippery road.
• Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fine until
you hit a spot that is covered with ice. On an
otherwise clear road, ice patches may appear in
shaded areas where the sun cannot reach, such as
around clumps of trees, behind buildings, or under
bridges. Sometimes the surface of a curve or an
overpass may remain icy when the surrounding
roads are clear. If you see a patch of ice ahead of
you, brake before you are on it. Try not to brake while
you are actually on the ice, and avoid sudden
steering maneuvers.
What is the worst time for this? Wet ice. Very cold snow
or ice can be slick and hard to drive on. But wet ice
can be even more trouble because it may offer the least
traction of all. You can get wet ice when it is about
freezing, 32°F (0°C), and freezing rain begins to fall. Try
to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand crews
can get there.
4-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If You Are Caught in a Blizzard
If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in a
serious situation. You should probably stay with
your vehicle unless you know for sure that you are near
help and you can hike through the snow. Here are
some things to do to summon help and keep yourself
and your passengers safe:
• Turn on your hazard flashers.
• Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that
you have been stopped by the snow.
• Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you.
If you do not have blankets or extra clothing, make
body insulators from newspapers, burlap bags,
rags, floor mats — anything you can wrap around
yourself or tuck under your clothing to keep warm.
You can run the engine to keep warm, but be careful.
4-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Run your engine only as long as you must. This saves
fuel. When you run the engine, make it go a little
faster than just idle. That is, push the accelerator
slightly. This uses less fuel for the heat that you get and
it keeps the battery charged. You will need a
well-charged battery to restart the vehicle, and possibly
for signaling later on with your headlamps. Let the
heater run for a while.
{CAUTION:
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your
vehicle. This can cause deadly CO (carbon
monoxide) gas to get inside. CO could
overcome you and kill you. You cannot see it
or smell it, so you might not know it is in your
vehicle. Clear away snow from around the
base of your vehicle, especially any that is
blocking your exhaust pipe. And check around
again from time to time to be sure snow does
not collect there.
Then, shut the engine off and close the window almost
all the way to preserve the heat. Start the engine
again and repeat this only when you feel really
uncomfortable from the cold. But do it as little as
possible. Preserve the fuel as long as you can. To help
keep warm, you can get out of the vehicle and do
some fairly vigorous exercises every half hour or so until
help comes.
Open a window just a little on the side of the
vehicle that is away from the wind. This will
help keep CO out.
4-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Spinning your wheels can destroy parts of
your vehicle as well as the tires. If you spin the
wheels too fast while shifting your transmission
back and forth, you can destroy your transmission.
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,
Mud, Ice, or Snow
In order to free your vehicle when it is stuck, you will
need to spin the wheels, but you do not want to
spin your wheels too fast. The method known as rocking
can help you get out when you are stuck, but you
must use caution.
For more information about using tire chains on your
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out
First, turn your steering wheel left and right. That
will clear the area around your front wheels. If you have
a four-wheel-drive vehicle, shift into Four-Wheel
High. Then shift back and forth between REVERSE (R)
and a forward gear, spinning the wheels as little as
possible. Release the accelerator pedal while you shift,
and press lightly on the accelerator pedal when the
transmission is in gear. By slowly spinning your wheels
in the forward and reverse directions, you will cause
a rocking motion that may free your vehicle. If that does
not get you out after a few tries, you may need to be
towed out. If you do need to be towed out, see Towing
{CAUTION:
If you let your tires spin at high speed, they can
explode, and you or others could be injured.
And, the transmission or other parts of the
vehicle can overheat. That could cause an
engine compartment fire or other damage.
When you are stuck, spin the wheels as little as
possible. Do not spin the wheels above 35 mph
(55 km/h) as shown on the speedometer.
4-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tire and Loading Information Label
Loading Your Vehicle
It is very important to know how much weight your
vehicle can carry. This weight is called the vehicle
capacity weight and includes the weight of all occupants,
cargo, and all nonfactory-installed options. Two labels
on your vehicle show how much weight it was designed
to carry, the Tire and Loading Information label and
the Certification/Tire label.
{CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or either
the maximum front or rear Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts on your
vehicle can break, and it can change the way
your vehicle handles. These could cause you
to lose control and crash. Also, overloading
can shorten the life of your vehicle.
Label Example
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information label is
attached to the center pillar (B-pillar). With the driver’s
door open, you will find the label attached below
the door lock post (striker). The tire and loading
information label shows the number of occupant seating
positions (A), and the maximum vehicle capacity
weight (B) in kilograms and pounds.
The Tire and Loading Information label also shows the
size of the original equipment tires (C) and the
recommended cold tire inflation pressures (D). For more
4-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
There is also important loading information on the
vehicle Certification/Tire label. It tells you the Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for the front and rear axle.
See “Certification/Tire Label” later in this section.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the load from
your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle.
Consult this manual to determine how this reduces
the available cargo and luggage load capacity of
important information on towing a trailer, towing
safety rules and trailering tips.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or XXX lbs” on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and
passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if
the “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs and there will be
five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount
of available cargo and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
Example 1
Item
Description
Total
Vehicle Capacity Weight
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and
cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight
may not safely exceed the available cargo
A
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
for Example 1 =
Subtract Occupant Weight
150 lbs (68 kg) × 2 =
Available Occupant and
Cargo Weight =
B
C
300 lbs (136 kg)
700 lbs (317 kg)
and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
4-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Example 2
Description
Example 3
Description
Item
Total
Item
Total
Vehicle Capacity Weight
for Example 2 =
Vehicle Capacity Weight
for Example 3 =
A
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
A
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
Subtract Occupant Weight
Subtract Occupant Weight
B
C
750 lbs (136 kg)
250 lbs (113 kg)
B
C
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
0 lbs (0 kg)
150 lbs (68 kg) × 5 =
200 lbs (91 kg) × 5 =
Available Cargo Weight =
Available Cargo Weight =
Refer to your vehicle’s tire and loading information label
for specific information about your vehicle’s capacity
weight and seating positions. The combined weight of
the driver, passengers, and cargo should never
exceed your vehicle’s capacity weight.
Your vehicle may have an electronically controlled air
suspension system that automatically keeps your vehicle
level as you load and unload your vehicle. See
page 4-55 for additional information.
4-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This is called Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). The
GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle, all occupants,
fuel, cargo, and trailer tongue weight, if pulling a trailer.
Certification/Tire Label
The Certification/Tire label also tells you the maximum
weights for the front and rear axles, called Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). To find out the actual loads
on your front and rear axles, you need to go to a
weigh station and weigh your vehicle. Your dealer can
help you with this. Be sure to spread out your load
equally on both sides of the centerline.
Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle, or the GAWR
for either the front or rear axle.
And, if you do have a heavy load, you should spread
it out.
Similar appearing vehicles may have different GVWRs
and capacity weights. Please note your vehicle’s
Certification/Tire label or consult your dealer for
additional details.
A vehicle specific Certification/Tire label is found on the
rear edge of the driver’s door. The label shows the size
of your vehicle’s original tires and the inflation pressures
needed to obtain the gross weight capacity of your
vehicle.
4-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or either
the maximum front or rear Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts on your
vehicle can break, and it can change the way
your vehicle handles. These could cause you
to lose control and crash. Also, overloading
can shorten the life of your vehicle.
Things you put inside your vehicle can strike
and injure people in a sudden stop or turn, or
in a crash.
• Put things in the cargo area of your
vehicle. Try to spread the weight evenly.
• Never stack heavier things, like suitcases,
inside the vehicle so that some of them
are above the tops of the seats.
• Do not leave an unsecured child restraint
in your vehicle.
Using heavier suspension components to get added
durability might not change your vehicle’s weight ratings.
Ask your dealer to help you load your vehicle the
right way.
• When you carry something inside the
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
• Do not leave a seat folded down unless
you need to.
Notice: Overloading your vehicle may cause
damage. Repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Do not overload your vehicle.
There is also important loading information for off-road
driving in this manual. See “Loading Your Vehicle
page 4-19.
If you put things inside your vehicle — like suitcases,
tools, packages, or anything else — they will go as fast
as the vehicle goes. If you have to stop or turn
quickly, or if there is a crash, they will keep going.
4-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adding a Snow Plow or Similar
Equipment
Your vehicle was neither designed nor intended for a
snow plow.
Recreational Vehicle Towing
Recreational vehicle towing means towing your vehicle
behind another vehicle – such as behind a motorhome.
The two most common types of recreational vehicle
towing are known as “dinghy towing” (towing your
vehicle with all four wheels on the ground) and “dolly
towing” (towing your vehicle with two wheels on
the ground and two wheels up on a device known
as a “dolly”).
Notice: Adding a snow plow or similar equipment
to your vehicle can damage it, and the repairs would
not be covered by warranty. Do not install a snow
plow or similar equipment on your vehicle.
With the proper preparation and equipment, many
vehicles can be towed in these ways. See “Dinghy
Towing” and “Dolly Towing,” following. You may
also need brakes for the vehicle being towed. See your
dealer for additional trailering information.
Towing
Towing Your Vehicle
Consult your dealer or a professional towing service if
you need to have your disabled vehicle towed. See
If you want to tow your vehicle behind another vehicle
for recreational purposes (such as behind a motorhome),
see “Recreational Vehicle Towing” following.
4-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Here are some important things to consider before you
do recreational vehicle towing:
Dinghy Towing
Two-Wheel-Drive Vehicles
• What’s the trailering capacity of the towing vehicle?
Be sure you read the tow vehicle manufacturer’s
recommendations.
Notice: If you tow your vehicle with all four wheels
on the ground, the drivetrain components could
be damaged. The repairs would not be covered by
your warranty. Do not tow your vehicle with all
four wheels on the ground.
• How far will you tow? Some vehicles have
restrictions on how far and how long they can
be towed.
Two-wheel-drive vehicles should not be towed with all
four wheels on the ground. Two-wheel-drive
transmissions have no provisions for internal lubrication
while being towed. To properly tow these vehicles,
they should be placed on a platform trailer.
• Do you have the proper towing equipment? See
your dealer or trailering professional for additional
advice and equipment recommendations.
• Is your vehicle ready to be towed? Just as you
would prepare your vehicle for a long trip, you’ll
want to make sure your vehicle is prepared to be
page 4-37.
4-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicles
{CAUTION:
Shifting a four-wheel-drive vehicle’s transfer
case into NEUTRAL can cause your vehicle to
roll even if the transmission is in PARK (P).
You or others could be injured. Make sure the
parking brake is firmly set before you shift the
transfer case to NEUTRAL.
5. Shift the transfer case to NEUTRAL (N). See
procedure to select the NEUTRAL (N) position for
your vehicle.
6. Release the parking brake only after the vehicle
being towed is firmly attached to the towing
vehicle.
Four-wheel-drive vehicles can be dinghy towed if you
follow the proper procedures. The transmission has no
provisions for internal lubrication while being towed, so it
is important that you follow all the steps listed in this
manual to dinghy tow your four-wheel-drive vehicle.
7. Turn the ignition off.
After towing, see “Shifting Out of Neutral” under
Use the following procedure to tow your vehicle:
1. Shift the transmission to PARK (P).
2. Turn the engine off, but leave the ignition on.
3. Firmly set the parking brake.
4. Securely attach the vehicle being towed to the
tow vehicle.
4-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dolly Towing
{CAUTION:
Front Towing
(Front Wheels Off the Ground)
Shifting a four-wheel-drive vehicle’s transfer
case into NEUTRAL can cause your vehicle to
roll even if the transmission is in PARK (P).
You or others could be injured. Make sure the
parking brake is firmly set before you shift the
transfer case to NEUTRAL.
Two-Wheel-Drive Vehicles
Notice: If you tow a two-wheel-drive vehicle with
the rear wheels on the ground, the transmission
could be damaged. The repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Never tow your vehicle
with the rear wheels on the ground.
Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicles
Four-wheel-drive vehicles can be dolly towed with the
rear wheels on the ground.
6. Shift the transfer case to NEUTRAL (N). See
procedure to select the NEUTRAL (N) position for
your vehicle.
Use the following procedure to tow your vehicle:
1. Drive the vehicle onto the tow dolly.
7. Release the parking brake only after the
vehicle being towed is firmly attached to the
towing vehicle.
2. Shift the automatic transmission to PARK (P).
3. Turn the engine off, but leave the ignition on.
4. Firmly set the parking brake.
8. Turn the ignition off.
After towing, see “Shifting Out of Neutral” under
5. Securely attach the vehicle being towed to
the dolly.
4-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Follow the dolly manufacturer’s instructions to
attach and secure the vehicle being towed to
the dolly and then the loaded dolly to the tow
vehicle. Use an adequate clamping device to
ensure that the front wheels are locked into the
straight position.
Rear Towing
(Rear Wheels Off the Ground)
(Two-Wheel or Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicles)
5. Release the parking brake only after the vehicle
being towed is firmly attached to the towing
vehicle.
6. Turn the ignition to LOCK.
If the tow vehicle will not be started or driven for
six weeks or more, remove the battery cable
from the negative terminal (post) of the battery.
Use the following procedure to tow your vehicle from
the rear:
1. Drive the vehicle onto the dolly.
page 2-31 for more information.
3. Shift the transmission in PARK (P).
4-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overload Protection
Electronically Controlled Air
Suspension System
Your vehicle may be equipped with an electronically
controlled air suspension system that automatically
keeps your vehicle level as you load and unload. The
system includes a compressor, two height sensors
and two air springs supporting the rear axle.
The air suspension system is equipped with overload
protection. Overload protection is designed to protect the
air suspension system, and it is an indicator to the
driver that the vehicle is overloaded. When the overload
protection mode is on, it will not allow damage to the
air compressor. However, do not overload the vehicle.
The system also has an internal clock to prevent
overheating if the inflator is used for prolonged periods.
If the system overheats, all leveling function stops
until the system cools down. During this time, the
indicator light on the air inflator switch will be flashing.
The ignition has to be on for the system to inflate,
in order to raise the vehicle to the standard ride height
after loading. The system can lower the vehicle to
the standard ride height after unloading with the ignition
on and also for up to 30 minutes after the ignition
has been turned off.
You may hear the compressor operating when you load
your vehicle, and periodically as the system adjusts
the vehicle to the standard ride height.
Load leveling will not function normally with the inflator
hose attached to the inflator outlet. Remove the inflator
hose from the outlet during loading and unloading.
If the suspension remains at a low height, the rear
axle load has exceeded GAWR (Gross Axle Weight
Rating). When the overload protection mode is activated,
the compressor operates for about 30 seconds to
one minute without raising the vehicle depending on the
amount of overload. This will continue each time the
ignition is turned on until the rear axle load is reduced
below GAWR.
Indicator Light
The indicator light on the inflator switch in the rear
passenger compartment also serves as an indicator for
internal system error. If the indicator light is flashing
without the load leveling function or the inflator being
active, turn off the ignition. The next day turn on
the ignition and check the indicator light. The vehicle
can be driven with the light flashing, but if it is you
should have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible.
If the vehicle is parked for an extended period of time,
some bleed down of the suspension is normal. Upon
starting the vehicle, proper height will be achieved.
4-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To identify the trailering capacity of your vehicle, you
should read the information in “Weight of the Trailer” that
appears later in this section.
Towing a Trailer
Trailering is different than just driving your vehicle by
itself. Trailering means changes in acceleration, braking,
handling, durability and fuel economy. Successful,
safe trailering takes correct equipment, and it has to be
used properly.
{CAUTION:
If you do not use the correct equipment and
drive properly, you can lose control when you
pull a trailer. For example, if the trailer is too
heavy, the brakes may not work well — or even
at all. You and your passengers could be
seriously injured. Pull a trailer only if you have
followed all the steps in this section. Ask your
dealer for advice and information about towing
a trailer with your vehicle.
That’s the reason for this part. In it are many time-tested,
important trailering tips and safety rules. Many of
these are important for your safety and that of your
passengers. So please read this section carefully before
you pull a trailer.
Notice: Pulling a trailer improperly can damage
your vehicle and result in costly repairs that would
not be covered by your warranty. Always follow
the instructions in this section and check with your
dealer for more information about towing a trailer
with your vehicle.
4-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Three important considerations have to do with weight:
• the weight of the trailer,
If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer
If you do, here are some important points:
• the weight of the trailer tongue
• There are many different laws, including speed limit
restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sure
your rig will be legal, not only where you live
• and the weight on your vehicle’s tires.
Weight of the Trailer
How heavy can a trailer safely be?
but also where you’ll be driving. A good source for
this information can be state or provincial police.
• Consider using a sway control. See “Hitches” later
in this section.
It depends on how you plan to use your rig. For
example, speed, altitude, road grades, outside
temperature and how much your vehicle is used to pull
a trailer are all important. It can also depend on any
special equipment that you have on your vehicle,
and the amount of tongue weight the vehicle can carry.
See “Weight of the Trailer Tongue” later in this
section for more information.
• Don’t tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(800 km) your new vehicle is driven. Your engine,
axle or other parts could be damaged.
• Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) that you
tow a trailer, don’t drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)
and don’t make starts at full throttle. This helps your
engine and other parts of your vehicle wear in at
the heavier loads.
Maximum trailer weight is calculated assuming only the
driver is in the tow vehicle and it has all the required
trailering equipment. The weight of additional optional
equipment, passengers and cargo in the tow vehicle
must be subtracted from the maximum trailer weight.
• You can tow in DRIVE (D). You may want to shift the
transmission to THIRD (3) or, if necessary, a lower
gear selection if the transmission shifts too often
(e.g., under heavy loads and/or hilly conditions).
4-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Look in the following chart to find the maximum trailer weight for your vehicle.
Vehicle
Axle Ratio
3.42
3.73
4.10
3.42
3.73
3.42
3.73
4.10
3.42
3.73
3.42
3.73
4.10
3.42
3.73
4.10
3.42
3.73
3.42
3.73
Max.Trailer Wt.
*GCWR
5,300 lbs. (2 404 kg)
5,800 lbs. (2 631 kg)
6,300 lbs. (2 858 kg)
6,100 lbs (2 767 kg)
6,600 lbs (2 994 kg)
5,200 lbs. (2 359 kg)
5,700 lbs. (2 858 kg)
6,200 lbs. (2 812 kg)
6,000 lbs (2 721 kg)
6,500 lbs (2 948 kg)
5,000 lbs. (2 268 kg)
5,500 lbs. (2 495 kg)
6,000 lbs. (2 722 kg)
4,800 lbs. (2 177 kg)
5,300 lbs. (2 404 kg)
5,800 lbs. (2 631 kg)
5,700 lbs. (2 585 kg)
6,200 lbs. (2 812 kg)
5,600 lbs. (2 540 kg)
6,000 lbs. (2 721 kg)
10,000 lbs. (4 536 kg)
10,500 lbs. (4 763 kg)
11,000 lbs. (4 990 kg)
11,000 lbs (4 989 kg)
11,500 lbs (5 216 kg)
10,000 lbs. (4 536 kg)
10,500 lbs. (4 763 kg)
11,000 lbs. (4 990 kg)
11,000 lbs. (4 990 kg)
11,500 lbs. (5 216 kg)
10,000 lbs. (4 536 kg)
10,500 lbs. (4 763 kg)
11,000 lbs. (4 990 kg)
10,000 lbs. (4 536 kg)
10,500 lbs. (4 763 kg)
11,000 lbs. (4 990 kg)
11,000 lbs. (4 990 kg)
12,500 lbs. (5 670 kg)
11,000 lbs. (4 990 kg)
12,500 lbs. (5 670 kg)
2WD Envoy (L6 Engine)
2WD Envoy (V8 Engine)
4WD Envoy (L6 Engine)
4WD Envoy (V8 Engine)
2WD Envoy XL (L6 Engine)
4WD Envoy XL (L6 Engine)
2WD Envoy XL (V8 Engine)
4WD Envoy XL (V8 Engine)
*The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle and
trailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment and conversion. The GCWR for your vehicle should not be
exceeded.
4-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
You can ask your dealer for our trailering information or
advice, or you can write us at the address listed in
your Warranty and Owner Assistance Information
Booklet.
And if you will tow a trailer, you must add the tongue
load to the GVW because your vehicle will be carrying
that weight, too. See Loading Your Vehicle for more
information about your vehicle’s maximum load capacity.
In Canada, write to:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Weight of the Trailer Tongue
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important weight
to measure because it affects the total or gross weight
of your vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW)
includes the curb weight of the vehicle, any cargo you
may carry in it, and the people who will be riding in
the vehicle. If you have a lot of options, equipment,
passengers or cargo in your vehicle, it will reduce the
tongue weight your vehicle can carry, which will
also reduce the trailer weight your vehicle can tow.
The trailer tongue weight (A) should be 10 percent to
15 percent of the total loaded trailer weight (B), up to a
maximum of 400 lbs (181 kg) with a weight carrying
hitch. The trailer tongue weight (A) should be 10 percent
to 15 percent of the total loaded trailer weight (A), up
to a maximum of 900 lbs (408 kg) for a weight
distributing hitch.
4-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Do not exceed the maximum allowable tongue weight
for your vehicle. Choose the shortest hitch extension
that will position the hitch ball closest to the vehicle. This
will help reduce the effect of trailer tongue weight on
the rear axle.
Consider the following example:
A vehicle model base weight is 5,500 lbs (2 495 kg);
2,800 lbs (1 270 kg) at the front axle and 2,700 lbs
(1 225 kg) at the rear axle. It has a GVWR of 7,200 lbs
(3 266 kg), a RGAWR of 4,000 lbs (1 814 kg) and a
GCWR (Gross Combination Weight Rating) of
After you’ve loaded your trailer, weigh the trailer and then
the tongue, separately, to see if the weights are proper. If
they aren’t, you may be able to get them right simply by
moving some items around in the trailer.
14,000 lbs (6 350 kg). The trailer rating should be:
Trailering may be limited by the vehicle’s ability to carry
tongue weight. Tongue weight cannot cause the vehicle
to exceed the GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) or
the RGAWR (Rear Gross Axle Weight Rating). The effect
of additional weight may reduce your trailering capacity
more than the total of the additional weight.
You can expect tongue weight to be at least 10 percent
of trailer weight (850 lbs (386 kg)) and because the
weight is applied well behind the rear axle, the effect on
the rear axle will be greater than just the weight
itself, as much as 1.5 times as much. The weight at the
rear axle could be 850 lbs (386 kg) X 1.5 = 1,275 lbs
(578 kg). Since the rear axle already weighs 2,700 lbs
(1 225 kg), adding 1,275 lbs (578 kg) brings the
total to 3,975 lbs (1 803 kg). This is very close to, but
within the limit for RGAWR as well. The vehicle is set to
trailer up to 8,500 lbs (3 856 kg).
4-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
But let’s say your specific vehicle is equipped with some
of the latest options and you have a front seat passenger
and two rear seat passengers with some luggage and
gear in the vehicle as well. You may add 300 lbs (136 kg)
to the front axle weight and 400 lbs (181 kg) to the rear
axle weight. Your vehicle now weighs:
But, you must still consider the effect on the rear axle.
Because your rear axle now weighs 3,100 lbs (1 406 kg),
you can only put 900 lbs (408 kg) on the rear axle
without exceeding RGAWR. The effect of tongue weight
is about 1.5 times the actual weight. Dividing the
900 lbs (408 kg) by 1.5 leaves you with being able to
handle only 600 lbs (272 kg) of tongue weight.
Since tongue weight is usually at least 10 percent of
total loaded trailer weight, you can expect that the
largest trailer your vehicle can properly handle is
6,000 lbs (2 721 kg).
It is important that you make sure your vehicle does not
exceed any of its ratings — GCWR, GVWR, RGAWR,
Maximum Trailer Rating or Tongue Weight. The only way
to be sure you are not exceeding any of these ratings is to
weigh your vehicle and trailer.
Weight is still below 7,200 lbs (3 266 kg) and you may
think that you should subtract 700 additional pounds
(318 kg) from your trailering capacity to stay within
GCWR limits. Your maximum trailer would only
be 7,800 lbs (3 538 kg). You may go further and think
you must limit tongue weight to less than 1,000 lbs
(454 kg) to avoid exceeding GVWR.
4-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires
Be sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upper limit
for cold tires. You’ll find these numbers on the
Weight Distributing Hitches and Weight
Carrying Hitches
Certification label at the rear edge of the driver’s door or
see Loading Your Vehicle for more information. Then,
be sure you don’t go over the GVW limit for your vehicle,
or the GAWR, including the weight of the trailer
tongue. If you use a weight distributing hitch, make sure
you don’t go over the rear axle limit before you apply
the weight distribution spring bars.
Hitches
It’s important to have the correct hitch equipment.
Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads are
a few reasons why you’ll need the right hitch.
(A) Body to Ground Distance, (B) Front of Vehicle
When using a weight-distributing hitch, the hitch must
be adjusted so the distance (A) remains the same both
before and after coupling the trailer to the tow vehicle.
If you use a step-bumper hitch, the bumper could
be damaged in sharp turns. Make sure there is ample
room when turning to avoid contact between the
trailer and the bumper.
4-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you will be pulling a trailer that, when loaded, will
weigh more than 5,000 lbs (2 270 kg) be sure to use a
properly mounted weight-distributing hitch and sway
control of the proper size. This equipment is very
important for proper vehicle loading and good handling
when driving. Always use a sway control if the trailer
will weigh more than these limits. You can ask a
hitch dealer about sway controls.
Trailer Brakes
If your trailer weighs more than 1,500 lbs. (680 kg)
loaded, then it needs its own brakes — and they must
be adequate. Be sure to read and follow the instructions
for the trailer brakes so you’ll be able to install, adjust
and maintain them properly.
Your trailer’s brake system can tap into the vehicle’s
hydraulic brake system only if:
Safety Chains
• The trailer parts can withstand 3,000 psi
(20 650 kPa) of pressure.
You should always attach chains between your vehicle
and your trailer. Cross the safety chains under the
tongue of the trailer to help prevent the tongue from
contacting the road if it becomes separated from
the hitch.
• The trailer’s brake system will use less than
0.02 cubic inch (0.3 cc) of fluid from your vehicle’s
master cylinder. Otherwise, both braking systems
won’t work well. You could even lose your brakes.
Instructions about safety chains may be provided by the
hitch manufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer. Follow
the manufacturer’s recommendation for attaching safety
chains and do not attach them to the bumper. Always
leave just enough slack so you can turn with your rig.
Never allow safety chains to drag on the ground.
If everything checks out this far, then make the brake
fluid tap at the port on the master cylinder that
sends fluid to the rear brakes. But don’t use copper
tubing for this. If you do, it will bend and finally break off.
Use steel brake tubing.
4-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience.
Before setting out for the open road, you’ll want to get
to know your rig. Acquaint yourself with the feel of
handling and braking with the added weight of the trailer.
And always keep in mind that the vehicle you are
driving is now a good deal longer and not nearly as
responsive as your vehicle is by itself.
Driving with a Trailer
{CAUTION:
If you have a rear-most window open and you
pull a trailer with your vehicle, carbon
monoxide (CO) could come into your vehicle.
You can not see or smell CO. It can cause
unconsciousness or death. See Engine
when towing a trailer:
• Have your exhaust system inspected for
leaks, and make necessary repairs before
starting on your trip.
Before you start, check all trailer hitch parts and
attachments, safety chains, electrical connection, lamps,
tires and mirror adjustment. If the trailer has electric
brakes, start your vehicle and trailer moving and then
apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure
the brakes are working. This lets you check your
electrical connection at the same time.
During your trip, check occasionally to be sure that the
load is secure, and that the lamps and any trailer
brakes are still working.
• Keep the rear-most windows closed.
• If exhaust does come into your vehicle
through a window in the rear or another
opening, drive with your front, main
heating or cooling system on and with the
fan on any speed. This will bring fresh,
outside air into your vehicle. Do not use
the climate control setting for maximum air
because it only recirculates the air inside
your vehicle. See Dual Climate Control
4-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Following Distance
Making Turns
Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as
you would when driving your vehicle without a trailer.
This can help you avoid situations that require
heavy braking and sudden turns.
Notice: Making very sharp turns while trailering
could cause the trailer to come in contact with the
vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged. Avoid
making very sharp turns while trailering.
When you’re turning with a trailer, make wider turns than
normal. Do this so your trailer won’t strike soft shoulders,
curbs, road signs, trees or other objects. Avoid jerky or
sudden maneuvers. Signal well in advance.
Passing
You’ll need more passing distance up ahead when
you’re towing a trailer. And, because you’re a good deal
longer, you’ll need to go much farther beyond the
passed vehicle before you can return to your lane.
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer
The arrows on your instrument panel will flash whenever
you signal a turn or lane change. Properly hooked up,
the trailer lamps will also flash, telling other drivers
you’re about to turn, change lanes or stop.
Backing Up
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand.
Then, to move the trailer to the left, just move that hand
to the left. To move the trailer to the right, move your
hand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if possible,
have someone guide you.
When towing a trailer, the arrows on your instrument
panel will flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer
are burned out. Thus, you may think drivers behind
you are seeing your signal when they are not. It’s
important to check occasionally to be sure the trailer
bulbs are still working.
4-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving On Grades
Parking on Hills
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you start
down a long or steep downgrade. If you don’t shift
down, you might have to use your brakes so much that
they would get hot and no longer work well.
{CAUTION:
You really should not park your vehicle, with a
trailer attached, on a hill. If something goes
wrong, your rig could start to move. People
can be injured, and both your vehicle and the
trailer can be damaged.
You can tow in DRIVE (D). You may want to shift the
transmission to THIRD (3) or a lower gear, under heavy
loads or hilly conditions.
When towing at high altitude on steep uphill grades,
consider the following: Engine coolant will boil at a lower
temperature than at normal altitudes. If you turn your
engine off immediately after towing at high altitude on
steep uphill grades, your vehicle may show signs similar
to engine overheating. To avoid this, let the engine run
while parked (preferably on level ground) with the
automatic transmission in PARK (P) for a few minutes
before turning the engine off. If you do get the overheat
But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill, here’s
how to do it:
1. Apply your regular brakes, but don’t shift into
PARK (P) yet. When parking uphill, turn your wheels
away from the curb. When parking downhill, turn
your wheels into the curb.
2. Have someone place chocks under the
trailer wheels.
3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release the
regular brakes until the chocks absorb the load.
4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply your
parking brake, and then shift into PARK (P).
5. Release the regular brakes.
4-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When You Are Ready to Leave After
Parking on a Hill
1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal down
while you:
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if
the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
• start your engine,
• shift into a gear, and
If you have left the engine running, the vehicle
can move suddenly. You or others could be
injured. To be sure your vehicle will not move,
even when you are on fairly level ground, use
the steps that follow.
• release the parking brake.
2. Let up on the brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.
4. Stop and have someone pick up and store
the chocks.
Always put the shift lever fully in PARK (P) with
the parking brake firmly set.
Maintenance When Trailer Towing
If the transfer case on four-wheel drive vehicles
is in NEUTRAL, your vehicle will be free to roll,
even if your shift lever is in PARK (P). So, be
sure the transfer case is in a drive gear — not
in NEUTRAL.
Your vehicle will need service more often when you’re
pulling a trailer. See the Maintenance Schedule for more
on this. Things that are especially important in trailer
operation are automatic transmission fluid (don’t overfill),
engine oil, axle lubricant, belt(s), cooling system and
brake system. Each of these is covered in this manual,
and the Index will help you find them quickly. If
you’re trailering, it’s a good idea to review these sections
before you start your trip.
Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts
are tight.
4-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The seven-wire harness contains the following trailer
circuits:
Trailer Wiring Harness
• Yellow: Left Stop/Turn Signal
• Dark Green: Right Stop/Turn Signal
• Brown: Running Lamps
• White: Ground
• Light Green: Back-up Lamps
• Red: Battery Feed
• Dark Blue: Electric Brakes
If you need to tow a light-duty trailer with a standard
four-way round pin connector, an adapter connector is
available from your dealer.
Your vehicle may also be equipped with wiring for an
electric trailer brake controller. These wires are located
inside the vehicle on the driver’s side under the
instrument panel. These wires should be connected to
an electric trailer brake controller by your dealer or
a qualified service center.
Your vehicle may be equipped with the seven-wire
trailer towing harness. This harness has a seven-pin
universal heavy-duty trailer connector (if equipped with
the trailering package) that is attached to a bracket
on the hitch platform. If your vehicle is not equipped with
the heavy-duty trailer connector, you may purchase
one from your dealer.
4-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 5
Service and Appearance Care
5-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Accessories and Modifications
Service
When you add non-GM accessories to your vehicle they
can affect your vehicle’s performance and safety,
including such things as, airbags, braking, stability, ride
and handling, emissions systems, aerodynamics,
durability, and electronic systems like anti-lock brakes,
traction control and stability control. Some of these
accessories may even cause malfunction or damage not
covered by warranty.
Your dealer knows your vehicle best and wants you to
be happy with it. We hope you will go to your dealer
for all your service needs. You will get genuine GM parts
and GM-trained and supported service people.
We hope you will want to keep your GM vehicle all GM.
Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:
GM Accessories are designed to complement and
function with other systems on your vehicle. Your GM
dealer can accessorize your vehicle using genuine
GM Accessories. When you go to your GM dealer and
ask for GM Accessories, you will know that GM-trained
and supported service technicians will perform the
work using genuine GM Accessories.
California Proposition 65 Warning
Most motor vehicles, including this one, contain and/or
emit chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive
harm. Engine exhaust, many parts and systems
(including some inside the vehicle), many fluids, and
some component wear by-products contain and/or emit
these chemicals.
5-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you want to do some of your own service work, you
will want to use the proper service manual. It tells
you much more about how to service your vehicle than
this manual can. To order the proper service manual,
page 7-15.
Doing Your Own Service Work
{CAUTION:
You can be injured and your vehicle could be
damaged if you try to do service work on a
vehicle without knowing enough about it.
Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to
do your own service work, see Servicing Your
• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
experience, the proper replacement parts,
and tools before you attempt any vehicle
maintenance task.
You should keep a record with all parts receipts and list
the mileage and the date of any service work you
• Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts, and
other fasteners. English and metric
fasteners can be easily confused. If you
use the wrong fasteners, parts can later
break or fall off. You could be hurt.
5-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adding Equipment to the Outside of Gasoline Octane
Your Vehicle
Use regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octane
rating of 87 or higher. If the octane rating is less than 87,
you may notice an audible knocking noise when you
drive, commonly referred to as spark knock. If this
occurs, use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as
soon as possible. If you are using gasoline rated at
87 octane or higher and you hear heavy knocking, your
engine needs service.
Things you might add to the outside of your vehicle can
affect the airflow around it. This may cause wind
noise and affect windshield washer performance. Check
with your dealer before adding equipment to the
outside of your vehicle.
Fuel
Gasoline Specifications
Use of the recommended fuel is an important part of the
proper maintenance of your vehicle.
At a minimum, gasoline should meet ASTM
specification D 4814 in the United States or
CAN/CGSB-3.5 in Canada. Some gasolines may
contain an octane-enhancing additive called
methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl (MMT).
General Motors recommends against the use of
for additional information.
5-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
California Fuel
Additives
If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emissions
Standards, it is designed to operate on fuels that
meet California specifications. See the underhood
emission control label. If this fuel is not available
in states adopting California emissions standards, your
vehicle will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting
federal specifications, but emission control system
performance may be affected. The malfunction indicator
lamp may turn on and your vehicle may fail a
smog-check test. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp
on page 3-42. If this occurs, return to your authorized
GM dealer for diagnosis. If it is determined that the
condition is caused by the type of fuel used, repairs
may not be covered by your warranty.
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States
are now required to contain additives that will help
prevent engine and fuel system deposits from forming,
allowing your emission control system to work
properly. In most cases, you should not have to add
anything to your fuel. However, some gasolines contain
only the minimum amount of additive required to
meet U.S. Environmental Protection Agency regulations.
To help keep fuel injectors and intake valves clean,
or if your vehicle experiences problems due to
dirty injectors or valves, look for gasoline that is
advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline. Also, your
GM dealer has additives that will help correct and
prevent most deposit-related problems.
Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers and
ethanol, and reformulated gasolines may be available in
your area. General Motors recommends that you use
these gasolines if they comply with the specifications
described earlier. However, E85 (85% ethanol)
and other fuels containing more than 10% ethanol must
not be used in vehicles that were not designed for
those fuels.
5-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that
contains methanol. Do not use fuel containing
methanol. It can corrode metal parts in your fuel
system and also damage the plastic and rubber
parts. That damage would not be covered under
your warranty.
Fuels in Foreign Countries
If you plan on driving in another country outside the
United States or Canada, the proper fuel may be hard
to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel
not recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly
repairs caused by use of improper fuel would not
be covered by your warranty.
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low
emissions may contain an octane-enhancing additive
called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl
(MMT); ask the attendant where you buy gasoline
whether the fuel contains MMT. General Motors
recommends against the use of such gasolines. Fuels
containing MMT can reduce the life of spark plugs
and the performance of the emission control system may
be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp may turn
on. If this occurs, return to your authorized GM dealer
for service.
To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, or
contact a major oil company that does business in the
country where you will be driving.
5-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Filling the Tank
{CAUTION:
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can
cause bad injuries. To help avoid injuries to
you and others, read and follow all the
instructions on the pump island. Turn off your
engine when you are refueling. Do not smoke
if you are near fuel or refueling your vehicle.
Keep sparks, flames, and smoking materials
away from fuel. Do not leave the fuel pump
unattended when refueling your vehicle — this
is against the law in some places. Keep
children away from the fuel pump; never let
children pump fuel.
The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hinged fuel
door on the driver’s side of the vehicle.
To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly counterclockwise.
While refueling, hang the tethered fuel cap from the
hook on the fuel door.
5-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
There may also be a light that comes on in the
instrument panel to let you know if your gas cap is not
page 3-49 for more information.
{CAUTION:
If you spill fuel and then something ignites it,
you could be badly burned. Fuel can spray out
on you if you open the fuel cap too quickly.
This spray can happen if your tank is nearly
full, and is more likely in hot weather. Open
the fuel cap slowly and wait for any hiss noise
to stop. Then unscrew the cap all the way.
{CAUTION:
If a fire starts while you are refueling, do not
remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by
shutting off the pump or by notifying the
station attendant. Leave the area immediately.
Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfill the
tank and wait a few seconds after you have finished
pumping before removing the nozzle. Clean fuel
from painted surfaces as soon as possible. See
Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to get
the right type. Your dealer can get one for you.
If you get the wrong type, it may not fit properly.
This may cause your malfunction indicator lamp to
light and may damage your fuel tank and emissions
page 3-42.
When replacing the fuel cap, turn it clockwise until it
clicks. Make sure the cap is fully installed. The
diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has
been left off or improperly installed. This would allow fuel
to evaporate into the atmosphere. See Malfunction
5-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
Checking Things Under
the Hood
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in
your vehicle. Static electricity discharge from
the container can ignite the gasoline vapor.
You can be badly burned and your vehicle
damaged if this occurs. To help avoid injury to
you and others:
Things that burn can get on hot engine parts
and start a fire. These include liquids like fuel,
oil, coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and
other fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or
others could be burned. Be careful not to drop
or spill things that will burn onto a hot engine.
• Dispense gasoline only into approved
containers.
• Do not fill a container while it is inside a
vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed, or
on any surface other than the ground.
• Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the
inside of the fill opening before operating
the nozzle. Contact should be maintained
until the filling is complete.
• Do not smoke while pumping gasoline.
5-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hood Release
1. To open the hood, first
pull the handle with this
symbol on it. It is
located inside the
vehicle under
the instrument panel
on the driver’s side.
2. Then go to the front of the vehicle and release the
secondary hood release.
3. Lift the hood, release the prop rod from its retainer
and put the prop rod into the slot in the hood.
Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler caps are
on properly. Then lift the hood to relieve pressure on the
prop rod. Remove the prop rod from its slot in the
hood and return the prop to its retainer. Lower the hood
6 to 8 inches (15 to 20 cm) above the vehicle and
release it to latch fully. Check to make sure the hood is
closed and repeat the process if necessary.
5-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
on page 5-28.
on page 5-30.
H. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”
C. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding
Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid
on page 5-37.
I. Remote Negative (−) Terminal (Marked GND). See
J. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid”
E. Automatic Transmission Fluid Dipstick (Out of View).
See “Checking the Fluid Level” under Automatic
F. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”
5-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When you open the hood on the 5.3L V8 engine, here is what you will see:
5-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
on page 5-30.
on page 5-28.
H. Remote Negative (−) Terminal (Marked GND). See
C. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding
Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid
on page 5-37.
J. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid”
D. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”
E. Automatic Transmission Fluid Dipstick. See
“Checking the Fluid Level” under Automatic
F. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”
5-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When to Add Engine Oil
Engine Oil
Checking Engine Oil
It is a good idea to check your engine oil every time you
get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil
must be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.
The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop. See
the location of the engine oil dipstick.
1. Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes
to drain back into the oil pan. If you do not do this,
the oil dipstick might not show the actual level.
L6 Engine
2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel
or cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it
again, keeping the tip down, and check the level.
V8 Engine
5-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the oil is below the L mark for the L6 engine or the
cross-hatched area at the tip of the dipstick for the
V8 engine, you will need to add at least one quart/liter
of oil. But you must use the right kind. This section
explains what kind of oil to use. For engine oil crankcase
page 5-119.
the location of the
engine oil fill cap.
Notice: Do not add too much oil. If your engine has
so much oil that the oil level gets above the
cross-hatched area (F) that shows the proper
operating range for the L6 engine or above the
cross-hatched area for the V8 engine, your engine
could be damaged.
Be sure to add enough oil to put the level somewhere in
the proper operating range. Push the dipstick all the
way back in when you are through.
5-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Look for two things:
• GM6094M
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use
Your vehicle’s engine requires oil meeting GM
Standard GM6094M. You should look for and use
only an oil that meets GM Standard GM6094M.
• SAE 5W-30
As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30 is best
for your vehicle.
These numbers on an oil container show its
viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other viscosity
oils such as SAE 20W-50.
5-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Oils meeting these
requirements should also
have the starburst
symbol on the container.
This symbol indicates
that the oil has been
certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API).
GM Goodwrench® oil meets all the requirements for
your vehicle.
If you are in an area of extreme cold, where the
temperature falls below −20°F (−29°C), it is
recommended that you use either an SAE 5W-30
synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 oil. Both will provide
easier cold starting and better protection for your engine
at extremely low temperatures.
Engine Oil Additives
Do not add anything to your oil. The recommended oils
with the starburst symbol that meet GM Standard
GM6094M are all you will need for good performance
and engine protection.
You should look for this information on the oil container,
and use only those oils that are identified as meeting
GM Standard GM6094M and have the starburst symbol
on the front of the oil container.
Notice: Use only engine oil identified as meeting
GM Standard GM6094M and showing the American
Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. Failure to use the recommended
oil can result in engine damage not covered by
your warranty.
5-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the system is ever reset accidentally, you must
change your oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since the last
oil change. Remember to reset the oil life system
whenever the oil is changed.
Engine Oil Life System
When to Change Engine Oil
Your vehicle has a computer system that lets you know
when to change the engine oil and filter. This is based on
engine revolutions and engine temperature, and not on
mileage. Based on driving conditions, the mileage at
which an oil change will be indicated can vary
considerably. For the oil life system to work properly, you
must reset the system every time the oil is changed.
How to Reset the Engine Oil Life
System
The Engine Oil Life System calculates when to change
your engine oil and filter based on vehicle use.
Anytime your oil is changed, reset the system so it can
calculate when the next oil change is required. If a
situation occurs where you change your oil prior to a
change engine oil light or CHANGE ENGINE OIL
message being turned on, reset the system.
When the system has calculated that oil life has been
diminished, it will indicate that an oil change is
necessary. A change engine oil light will come on, or, if
your vehicle has a Driver Information Center (DIC), a
CHANGE ENGINE OIL message will come. See Change
as possible within the next 600 miles (1 000 km). It is
possible that, if you are driving under the best
conditions, the oil life system may not indicate that an
oil change is necessary for over a year. However,
the engine oil and filter must be changed at least once
a year and at this time the system must be reset.
Your dealer has GM-trained people who will perform
this work using genuine GM parts and reset the system.
It is also important to check the oil regularly and keep
it at the proper level.
To reset the Engine Oil Life System, do the following:
1. Turn the ignition key to RUN with the engine off.
2. Fully press and release the accelerator pedal slowly
three times within five seconds.
3. Turn the key to LOCK.
If the light/message comes back on when you start the
vehicle, the engine oil life system has not reset.
Repeat the procedure.
For vehicles with the Driver Information Center, see
the system.
5-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
What to Do with Used Oil
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
Used engine oil contains certain elements that may be
unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer.
Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Clean
your skin and nails with soap and water, or a good
hand cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of clothing or
rags containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer’s
warnings about the use and disposal of oil products.
the location of the
engine air cleaner/filter.
Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you
change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from the
filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting it
in the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers, or into
streams or bodies of water. Instead, recycle it by
taking it to a place that collects used oil. If you have a
problem properly disposing of your used oil, ask
your dealer, a service station, or a local recycling center
for help.
When to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the Maintenance II
intervals and replace at the first oil change after each
50,000 mile (83 000 km) interval. See Scheduled
are driving in dusty/dirty conditions, inspect the filter
at each engine oil change.
5-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
To inspect the air cleaner/filter remove the filter from the
vehicle and lightly shake the filter to release loose
dust and dirt. If the filter remains caked with dirt, a new
filter is required.
{CAUTION:
Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter
off can cause you or others to be burned. The
air cleaner not only cleans the air; it helps to
stop flames if the engine backfires. If it is not
there and the engine backfires, you could be
burned. Do not drive with it off, and be careful
working on the engine with the air
To inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter,
do the following:
1. Remove the screws on the engine air cleaner/filter
and lift off the cover.
cleaner/filter off.
2. Remove the air cleaner/filter from the housing. Care
should be taken to dislodge as little dirt as possible.
3. Inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter.
4. Reinstall the cover and tighten the screws.
Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire can
cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt can
easily get into your engine, which will damage it.
Always have the air cleaner/filter in place when you
are driving.
5-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the
transmission fluid level if you have been driving:
Automatic Transmission Fluid
When to Check and Change Automatic
Transmission Fluid
• When outside temperatures are above 90°F (32°C).
• At high speed for quite a while.
• In heavy traffic — especially in hot weather.
• While pulling a trailer.
A good time to check your automatic transmission fluid
level is when the engine oil is changed.
Change the fluid and filter at the intervals listed in
to use the transmission fluid listed in Recommended
To get the right reading, the fluid should be at normal
operating temperature, which is 180°F to 200°F
(82°C to 93°C).
Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about 15 miles
(24 km) when outside temperatures are above 50°F
(10°C). If it is colder than 50°F (10°C), drive the vehicle
in THIRD (3) until the engine temperature gage
moves and then remains steady for 10 minutes.
How to Check Automatic
Transmission Fluid
Because this operation can be a little difficult, you may
choose to have this done at the dealership service
department.
A cold fluid check can be made after the vehicle has
been sitting for eight hours or more with the engine off,
but this is used only as a reference. Let the engine
run at idle for five minutes if outside temperatures are
50°F (10°C) or more. If it is colder than 50°F (10°C), you
may have to idle the engine longer. Should the fluid
level be low during this cold check, you must check the
fluid hot before adding fluid. Checking the fluid hot
will give you a more accurate reading of the fluid level.
If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the instructions
here, or you could get a false reading on the dipstick.
Notice: Too much or too little fluid can damage
your transmission. Too much can mean that some
of the fluid could come out and fall on hot engine
part or exhaust system parts, starting a fire.
Too little fluid could cause the transmission to
overheat. Be sure to get an accurate reading if you
check your transmission fluid.
5-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Checking the Fluid Level
Prepare your vehicle as follows:
1. Park your vehicle on a level place. Keep the
engine running.
2. With the parking brake applied, place the shift lever
in PARK (P).
3. With your foot on the brake pedal, move the shift
lever through each gear range, pausing for about
three seconds in each range. Then, position
the shift lever in PARK (P).
3. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read the lower
level. The fluid level must be in the COLD area,
below the cross-hatched area, for a cold check or in
the HOT or cross-hatched area for a hot check.
Be sure to keep the dipstick pointed down to get an
accurate reading.
4. Let the engine run at idle for three minutes or more.
Then, without shutting off the engine, follow these steps:
1. Flip the handle up and then pull out the dipstick
and wipe it with a clean rag or paper towel.
The automatic
4. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, push the
dipstick back in all the way; then flip the handle
down to lock the dipstick in place.
transmission dipstick
handle with this symbol on
it is located in the engine
compartment on the
passenger’s side of the
vehicle.
Consistency of Readings
Always check the fluid level at least twice using the
procedure described previously. Consistency (repeatable
readings) is important to maintaining proper fluid level. If
inconsistent readings persist, contact your dealer.
for more information on location.
2. Push it back in all the way, wait three seconds and
then pull it back out again.
5-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Add Automatic
Transmission Fluid
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of transmission fluid to use. See Recommended
Engine Coolant
The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with
DEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant is designed
to remain in your vehicle for five years or 150,000 miles
(240 000 km), whichever occurs first, if you add only
DEX-COOL® extended life coolant.
The following explains your cooling system and how to
add coolant when it is low. If you have a problem with
page 5-28.
Add fluid only after checking the transmission fluid while
it is hot. A cold check is used only as a reference. If
the fluid level is low, add only enough of the proper fluid
to bring the level up to the HOT area for a hot check.
It does not take much fluid, generally less than one pint
(0.5 L). Do not overfill.
A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOL® coolant will:
Notice: Use of the incorrect automatic transmission
fluid may damage your vehicle, and the damages
may not be covered by your warranty. Always
use the automatic transmission fluid listed in
• Give freezing protection down to −34°F (−37°C).
• Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).
• Protect against rust and corrosion.
• Help keep the proper engine temperature.
• After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level as
described under “How to Check Automatic
Transmission Fluid,” earlier in this section.
• Let the warning lights and gages work as
they should.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® may
cause premature engine, heater core, or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant may
require changing sooner, at the first maintenance
service after each 30,000 miles (50 000 km) or
24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs
would not be covered by your warranty. Always use
DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in your vehicle.
• When the correct fluid level is obtained, push the
dipstick back in all the way; then flip the handle
down to lock the dipstick in place.
5-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you have to add coolant more than four times a year,
have your dealer check your cooling system.
What to Use
Use a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable water and
one-half DEX-COOL® coolant. If you use this coolant
mixture, you do not need to add anything else.
Notice: If you use extra inhibitors and/or additives
in your vehicle’s cooling system, you could
damage your vehicle. Use only the proper mixture
of the engine coolant listed in this manual for
the cooling system. See Recommended Fluids and
{CAUTION:
Checking Coolant
Adding only plain water to your cooling
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or
some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil
before the proper coolant mixture will. Your
vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the
proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the
wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot
but you would not get the overheat warning.
Your engine could catch fire and you or others
could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
The engine coolant
recovery tank is in the
engine compartment
on the passenger’s side of
the vehicle. The cap
has this symbol on it. See
Overview on page 5-12
for more information
on location.
Notice: If you use an improper coolant mixture,
your engine could overheat and be badly damaged.
The repair cost would not be covered by your
warranty. Too much water in the mixture can freeze
and crack the engine, radiator, heater core, and
other parts.
The vehicle must be on a level surface. When your
engine is cold, the coolant level should be at FULL
COLD, or a little higher.
5-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Add coolant mixture at the recovery tank, but be careful
not to spill it.
Adding Coolant
If you need more coolant, add the proper DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture at the coolant recovery tank.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol,
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
Turning the radiator pressure cap when the
engine and radiator are hot can allow steam
and scalding liquids to blow out and burn you
badly. With the coolant recovery tank, you will
almost never have to add coolant at the
radiator. Never turn the radiator pressure
cap — even a little — when the engine and
radiator are hot.
Occasionally check the coolant level in the radiator. For
information on how to add coolant to the radiator,
5-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine
Radiator Pressure Cap
Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightly installed,
coolant loss and possible engine damage may
occur. Be sure the cap is properly and tightly
secured.
{CAUTION:
Steam from an overheated engine can burn
you badly, even if you just open the hood. Stay
away from the engine if you see or hear steam
coming from it. Just turn it off and get
everyone away from the vehicle until it cools
down. Wait until there is no sign of steam or
coolant before you open the hood.
information on location.
Engine Overheating
You will find a coolant temperature gage on your
vehicle’s instrument panel. See Engine Coolant
If you keep driving when your engine is
overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire. You
or others could be badly burned. Stop your
engine if it overheats, and get out of the
vehicle until the engine is cool.
If your vehicle has a Driver Information Center (DIC),
the display will show an Engine Coolant Hot/Engine
Overheated message. See DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 3-54 for more information.
Notice: If your engine catches fire because you
keep driving with no coolant, your vehicle can
be badly damaged. The costly repairs would not be
covered by your warranty.
5-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you no longer have the overheat warning, you can
drive. Just to be safe, drive slower for about 10 minutes.
If the warning does not come back on, you can drive
normally.
If No Steam Is Coming From
Your Engine
If you get an engine overheat warning but see or hear
no steam, the problem may not be too serious.
If the warning continues and you have not stopped, pull
over, stop, and park your vehicle right away.
Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot when you:
• Climb a long hill on a hot day.
• Stop after high-speed driving.
• Idle for long periods in traffic.
• Tow a trailer.
If there is still no sign of steam, you can push down the
accelerator until the engine speed is about twice as
fast as normal idle speed for at least three minutes while
you are parked. If you still have the warning, turn off
the engine and get everyone out of the vehicle until it
cools down.
If you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam,
try this for a minute or so:
You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service
help right away.
1. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle in NEUTRAL (N)
while stopped. If it is safe to do so, pull off the road,
shift to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) and let the
engine idle.
2. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest fan
speed and open the windows as necessary.
5-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cooling System
When you decide it is safe to lift the hood, here is what
you will see:
5.3L V8 Engine
A. Coolant Recovery Tank
B. Radiator Pressure Cap
C. Engine Fan
4.2L L6 Engine
If the coolant inside the coolant recovery tank is boiling,
do not do anything else until it cools down. The
vehicle should be parked on a level surface.
A. Coolant Recovery Tank
B. Radiator Pressure Cap
C. Engine Fan
5-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The coolant level should
be at least up to the FULL
COLD mark. If it is not,
you may have a leak at the
pressure cap or in the
radiator hoses, heater
hoses, radiator, water
If there seems to be no leak, start the engine again.
The engine cooling fan speed should increase when idle
speed is doubled by pushing the accelerator pedal
down. If it does not, your vehicle needs service.
Turn off the engine.
Notice: Engine damage from running your engine
without coolant is not covered by your warranty.
pump, or somewhere else
in the cooling system.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® may
cause premature engine, heater core or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant may
require changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50 000 km)
or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs
would not be covered by your warranty. Always use
DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in your vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine
parts, can be very hot. Do not touch them. If
you do, you can be burned.
Do not run the engine if there is a leak. If you
run the engine, it could lose all coolant. That
could cause an engine fire, and you could be
burned. Get any leak fixed before you drive
the vehicle.
5-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze and crack
the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts.
Use the recommended coolant and the proper
coolant mixture.
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
Recovery Tank
If you have not found a problem yet, but the coolant
level is not at the FULL COLD mark, add a
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL®
engine coolant at the coolant recovery tank. See
{CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
{CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to your cooling
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or
some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil
before the proper coolant mixture will. Your
vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the
proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the
wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot
but you would not get the overheat warning.
Your engine could catch fire and you or others
could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
When the coolant in the coolant recovery tank is at the
FULL COLD mark, start your vehicle.
5-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the overheat warning continues, there is one more
thing you can try. You can add the proper coolant
mixture directly to the radiator, but be sure the cooling
system is cool before you do it.
How to Add Coolant to the Radiator
{CAUTION:
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling
system can blow out and burn you badly. They
are under pressure, and if you turn the radiator
pressure cap — even a little — they can come
out at high speed. Never turn the cap when the
cooling system, including the radiator pressure
cap, is hot. Wait for the cooling system and
radiator pressure cap to cool if you ever have
to turn the pressure cap.
1. You can remove the radiator pressure cap when
the cooling system, including the radiator pressure
cap and upper radiator hose, is no longer hot.
Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise about
one full turn. If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A
hiss means there is still some pressure left.
2. Then keep turning the pressure cap. Remove the
pressure cap.
5-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Fill the radiator with the proper DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture, up to the base of the filler
information about the proper coolant mixture.
4. Then fill the coolant recovery tank to the FULL
COLD mark.
5. Put the cap back on the coolant recovery tank, but
leave the radiator pressure cap off.
5-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Fan Noise
Your vehicle has a clutched engine cooling fan. When
the clutch is engaged, the fan spins faster to provide
more air to cool the engine. In most everyday driving
conditions the clutch is not engaged. This improves fuel
economy and reduces fan noise. Under heavy vehicle
loading, trailer towing, and/or high outside temperatures,
the fan speed increases when the clutch engages so
you may hear an increase in fan noise. This is normal
and should not be mistaken as the transmission slipping
or making extra shifts. It is merely the cooling system
functioning properly. The fan will slow down when
additional cooling is not required and the clutch
disengages.
6. Start the engine and let it run until you can feel the
upper radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for the
engine cooling fan.
You may also hear this fan noise when you start the
engine. It will go away as the fan clutch disengages.
7. By this time, the coolant level inside the radiator
filler neck may be lower. If the level is lower, add
more of the proper DEX-COOL® coolant mixture
through the filler neck until the level reaches
the base of the filler neck.
8. Then replace the pressure cap. At any time during
this procedure if coolant begins to flow out of the
filler neck, reinstall the pressure cap. Be sure
the pressure cap is hand-tight and fully seated.
5-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Check Power Steering Fluid
Power Steering Fluid
To check the power steering fluid, do the following:
reservoir location.
1. Turn the key off and let the engine compartment
cool down.
2. Wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean.
3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a
clean rag.
4. Replace the cap and completely tighten it.
5. Remove the cap again and look at the fluid level on
the dipstick.
For vehicles with the 4.2L L6 engine, the level should
be at the C (Cold) mark. For vehicles with the 5.3L V8
engine, the level should be at the FULL mark. If
necessary, add only enough fluid to bring the level
up to the mark.
When to Check Power Steering Fluid
It is not necessary to regularly check power steering fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or
you hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this system
could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected
and repaired.
What to Use
To determine what kind of fluid to use, see
Always use the proper fluid. Failure to use the proper
fluid can cause leaks and damage hoses and seals.
5-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice:
Windshield Washer Fluid
What to Use
When you need windshield washer fluid, be sure to read
the manufacturer’s instructions before use. If you will
be operating your vehicle in an area where the
temperature may fall below freezing, use a fluid that has
sufficient protection against freezing.
• When using concentrated washer fluid,
follow the manufacturer’s instructions for
adding water.
• Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid.
Water can cause the solution to freeze and
damage your washer fluid tank and other parts
of the washer system. Also, water does not
clean as well as washer fluid.
Adding Washer Fluid
• Fill your washer fluid tank only three-quarters
full when it is very cold. This allows for
expansion if freezing occurs, which could
damage the tank if it is completely full.
Open the cap with the
washer symbol on it. Add
washer fluid until the
tank is full. See Engine
page 5-12 for reservoir
location.
• Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in your
windshield washer. It can damage your washer
system and paint.
5-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
So, it is not a good idea to top off your brake fluid.
Adding brake fluid will not correct a leak. If you add fluid
when your linings are worn, then you will have too
much fluid when you get new brake linings. You should
add or remove brake fluid, as necessary, only when
work is done on the brake hydraulic system.
Brakes
Brake Fluid
Your brake master cylinder
reservoir is filled with
DOT-3 brake fluid. See
the location of the
{CAUTION:
reservoir.
If you have too much brake fluid, it can spill on
the engine. The fluid will burn if the engine is
hot enough. You or others could be burned,
and your vehicle could be damaged. Add brake
fluid only when work is done on the brake
hydraulic system. See “Checking Brake Fluid”
in this section.
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in
the reservoir might go down. The first is that the
brake fluid goes down to an acceptable level during
normal brake lining wear. When new linings are put in,
the fluid level goes back up. The other reason is
that fluid is leaking out of the brake system. If it is, you
should have your brake system fixed, since a leak
means that sooner or later your brakes will not work
well, or will not work at all.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when
to check your brake fluid. See Scheduled Maintenance
on page 6-4.
5-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area
around the cap before removing it. This will help
keep dirt from entering the reservoir.
Checking Brake Fluid
You can check the brake fluid without taking off the cap.
Look at the brake fluid
reservoir. The fluid level
should be above MIN. If it
is not, have your brake
system checked to
{CAUTION:
With the wrong kind of fluid in your brake
system, your brakes may not work well, or they
may not even work at all. This could cause a
crash. Always use the proper brake fluid.
see if there is a leak.
Notice:
• Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brake
system parts. For example, just a few drops of
mineral-based oil, such as engine oil, in your
brake system can damage brake system parts so
badly that they will have to be replaced. Do not
let someone put in the wrong kind of fluid.
After work is done on the brake hydraulic system,
make sure the level is above the MIN, but not over
the MAX mark.
What to Add
When you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3 brake
fluid. Use new brake fluid from a sealed container
page 6-12.
• If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s painted
surfaces, the paint finish can be damaged. Be
careful not to spill brake fluid on your vehicle. If
you do, wash it off immediately. See Washing
5-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Some driving conditions or climates may cause a brake
squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly
applied. This does not mean something is wrong with
your brakes.
Brake Wear
Your vehicle has four-wheel disc brakes.
Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that make
a high-pitched warning sound when the brake pads
are worn and new pads are needed. The sound
may come and go or be heard all the time your vehicle
is moving, except when you are pushing on the
brake pedal firmly.
Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help
prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect
brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts in
the proper sequence to GM torque specifications.
Brake linings should always be replaced as complete
axle sets.
{CAUTION:
Brake Pedal Travel
See your dealer if the brake pedal does not return to
normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in
pedal travel. This could be a sign of brake trouble.
The brake wear warning sound means that soon
your brakes will not work well. That could lead
to an accident. When you hear the brake wear
warning sound, have your vehicle serviced.
Brake Adjustment
Every time you make a brake stop, your disc brakes
adjust for wear.
Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out brake
pads could result in costly brake repair.
5-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Replacing Brake System Parts
Vehicle Storage
The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its many
parts have to be of top quality and work well together if
the vehicle is to have really good braking. Your vehicle
was designed and tested with top-quality GM brake parts.
When you replace parts of your braking system — for
example, when your brake linings wear down and you
need new ones put in — be sure you get new approved
GM replacement parts. If you do not, your brakes may no
longer work properly. For example, if someone puts in
brake linings that are wrong for your vehicle, the balance
between your front and rear brakes can change — for the
worse. The braking performance you have come to
expect can change in many other ways if someone puts
in the wrong replacement brake parts.
If you are not going to drive your vehicle for 25 days
or more, remove the black, negative (−) cable from
the battery. This will help keep your battery from
running down.
{CAUTION:
Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas
that can explode. You can be badly hurt if you
page 5-42 for tips on working around a battery
without getting hurt.
Battery
Your vehicle has a maintenance free battery. When it is
time for a new battery, get one that has the replacement
number shown on the original battery’s label. We
recommend an ACDelco® replacement battery. See
battery location.
Warning: Battery posts, terminals, and related
accessories contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of California to cause
cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after
handling.
5-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in costly
damage to your vehicle that would not be covered
by your warranty.
Jump Starting
If your vehicle’s battery has run down, you may want to
use another vehicle and some jumper cables to start
your vehicle. Be sure to use the following steps to do
it safely.
Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or pulling it
will not work, and it could damage your vehicle.
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt
battery with a negative ground system.
{CAUTION:
Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a 12-volt
system with a negative ground, both vehicles can
be damaged. Only use vehicles with 12-volt systems
with negative grounds to jump start your vehicle.
Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerous
because:
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables
can reach, but be sure the vehicles are not touching
each other. If they are, it could cause a ground
connection you do not want. You would not be able
to start your vehicle, and the bad grounding
could damage the electrical systems.
• They contain acid that can burn you.
• They contain gas that can explode
or ignite.
• They contain enough electricity to
burn you.
If you do not follow these steps exactly, some
or all of these things can hurt you.
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set
the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved in
the jump start procedure. Put an automatic
transmission in PARK (P) or a manual transmission
in NEUTRAL before setting the parking brake. If
you have a four-wheel-drive vehicle, be sure
the transfer case is not in NEUTRAL.
5-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If you leave your radio or other accessories
on during the jump starting procedure, they could
be damaged. The repairs would not be covered
by your warranty. Always turn off your radio and
other accessories when jump starting your vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Using a match near a battery can cause battery
gas to explode. People have been hurt doing
this, and some have been blinded. Use a
flashlight if you need more light.
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug
unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette
lighter or the accessory power outlets, if equipped.
Turn off the radio and all lamps that are not
needed. This will avoid sparks and help to save
both batteries. And it could save the radio!
Be sure the battery has enough water. You do
not need to add water to the battery installed
in your new vehicle. But if a battery has filler
caps, be sure the right amount of fluid is there.
If it is low, add water to take care of that first.
If you do not, explosive gas could be present.
4. Open both hoods and locate the batteries. Find the
positive (+) and negative (−) terminals on each
battery. Your vehicle has a remote negative (−) jump
starting terminal. You should always use this
remote terminal instead of the terminal on the
battery. The remote negative (−) terminal is located
on the front engine lift bracket on vehicles with
the 4.2L L6 engine or the engine accessory drive
bracket for vehicles with the 5.3L V8 engine, and is
marked GND (Ground). See Engine Compartment
location.
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you.
Do not get it on you. If you accidentally get it
in your eyes or on your skin, flush the place
with water and get medical help immediately.
5-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Do not connect positive (+) to negative (−) or you
will get a short that would damage the battery
and maybe other parts too. And do not connect the
negative (−) cable to the negative (−) terminal on
the dead battery because this can cause sparks.
{CAUTION:
Fans or other moving engine parts can injure
you badly. Keep your hands away from moving
parts once the engine is running.
6. Connect the red
positive (+) cable to the
positive (+) terminal of
the dead battery. Use a
remote positive (+)
terminal if the vehicle
has one.
5. Check that the jumper cables do not have loose or
missing insulation. If they do, you could get a
shock. The vehicles could be damaged too.
Before you connect the cables, here are some
basic things you should know. Positive (+) will go to
positive (+) or to a remote positive (+) terminal if
the vehicle has one. Negative (−) will go to a heavy,
unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
5-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connect it to
the positive (+) terminal of the good battery. Use a
remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
8. Now connect the black negative (−) cable to the
negative (−) terminal of the good battery. Use a
remote negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Do not let the other end touch anything until the
next step. The other end of the negative (−) cable
does not go to the dead battery. It goes to a
heavy, unpainted metal engine part or to the remote
negative (−) terminal on the vehicle with the dead
battery. Your vehicle has a remote negative (−)
terminal, marked GND, for this purpose.
4.2L L6 Engine
5.3L V8 Engine
The remote negative (−) terminal is located on
the front engine lift bracket for the 4.2L L6 engine,
and on the accessory drive bracket for the
5.3L V8 engine.
9. Connect the other end of the negative (−) cable to
the remote negative (−) terminal on the vehicle with
the dead battery.
10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run
the engine for a while.
11. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery.
If it will not start after a few tries, it probably
needs service.
5-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If the jumper cables are connected or
removed in the wrong order, electrical shorting may
occur and damage the vehicle. The repairs would
not be covered by your warranty. Always connect
and remove the jumper cables in the correct
order, making sure that the cables do not touch
each other or other metal.
To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles, do
the following:
1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle that had the dead battery.
2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
other vehicle.
Jumper Cable Removal
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part or Remote
Negative (−) Terminal
B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) and Remote
Negative (−) Terminals
C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal
5-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The proper level is from 0 to 3/8 inch (0 to 10 mm)
below the bottom of the filler plug hole, located on the
rear axle.
Rear Axle
When to Check Lubricant
It is not necessary to regularly check rear axle fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak or you hear an
unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate a problem.
Have it inspected and repaired.
What to Use
To determine what kind of lubricant to use, see
How to Check Lubricant
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a
level surface.
5-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,
you’ll need to add some lubricant. Add enough lubricant
to raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole.
Use care not to overtighten the plug.
Four-Wheel Drive
Transfer Case
When to Check Lubricant
It is not necessary to regularly check fluid unless you
suspect there is a leak or you hear an unusual noise. A
fluid loss could indicate a problem. Have it inspected
and repaired.
What to Use
To determine what kind of lubricant to use, see
How to Check Lubricant
To get an accurate
reading, the vehicle should
be on a level surface.
5-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,
located on the front axle, you may need to add
some lubricant.
Front Axle
When to Check Lubricant
It is not necessary to regularly check front axle fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak or you hear an
unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate a problem.
Have it inspected and repaired.
When the differential is cold, add enough lubricant to
raise the level to 1/2 inch (12 mm) below the filler
plug hole.
When the differential is at operating temperature
(warm), add enough lubricant to raise the level to the
bottom of the filler plug hole.
How to Check Lubricant
What to Use
To determine what kind of lubricant to use, see
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a
level surface.
5-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Headlamps, Front Turn Signal,
Sidemarker, and Parking Lamps
To replace one of these bulbs, do the following:
Bulb Replacement
For the proper type of replacement bulbs, see
For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this
section, contact your dealer.
more information.
2. Lift the inner quick release clips.
Halogen Bulbs
{CAUTION:
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and
can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb. You or
others could be injured. Be sure to read and
follow the instructions on the bulb package.
3. Pull the headlamp assembly away from the vehicle.
4. Remove the cover from the headlamp bulb.
5. Disconnect the wiring harness.
5-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. Remove the bulb that needs to be replaced by
turning the socket counterclockwise.
7. Replace the old bulb with a new one using care not
to touch the glass with your fingers.
8. Reinstall by reversing Steps 1 through 6.
Taillamps, Turn Signal, and
Stoplamps
To replace a stoplamp/taillamp or turn signal bulb, do
the following:
page 2-13 for more information.
2. Remove the
two screws from
the taillamp
4. Unclip the wiring harness (A) and remove the
three socket retaining screws (B).
5. Remove the socket by releasing the retaining tabs.
assembly.
6. Holding the socket, pull the bulb to release it from
the socket.
7. Push the new bulb into the socket until it clicks.
8. Reinstall the socket and screws.
9. Reconnect the wiring harness.
10. Reinstall the taillamp assembly and tighten the
screws.
11. Close the liftgate.
3. Pull the assembly away from the vehicle.
5-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Back-Up Lamps
Replacement Bulbs
Exterior Lamp
Back-up Lamps
Bulb Number
3157
The back-up lamps are located in the rear bumper. To
replace a bulb, do the following:
Front Sidemarker Lamps
Front Turn Signal Lamps
Halogen Headlamps
High-Beam
194
3457
9005 HB3
9006 HB4
Low-Beam
Rear Turn Signal, Stoplamp and
Taillamp
3057
For replacement bulbs not listed here, contact
your dealer.
1. Reach behind the rear bumper and locate the
bulb socket.
2. Turn it counterclockwise to remove from the bulb
assembly.
3. Pull the bulb from the bulb socket.
4. Push in a new bulb into the bulb socket.
5. Reinstall the bulb socket by lining up the tabs in the
lamp assembly and turn it clockwise to secure it.
5-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Windshield Wiper Blade
Replacement
Windshield wiper blades should be inspected for wear
Allowing the wiper blade arm to touch the windshield
when no wiper blade is installed could damage the
windshield. Any damage that occurs would not
be covered by your warranty. Do not allow the wiper
blade arm to touch the windshield.
1. To remove the old wiper blades, lift the wiper arm
until it locks into a vertical position.
A. Blade Assembly
B. Arm Assembly
C. Locking Tab
D. Blade Pivot
E. Hook Slot
F. Arm Hook
2. Press down on the blade assembly pivot locking
tab. Pull down on the blade assembly to release it
from the wiper arm hook.
3. Remove the insert from the blade assembly. The
insert has two notches at one end that are locked
by the bottom claws of the blade assembly. At
the notched end, pull the insert from the blade
assembly.
5-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. To install the new wiper insert, slide the insert (D),
notched end last, into the end with two blade
claws (A). Slide the insert all the way through the
blade claws at the opposite end (B). The plastic
caps (C) will be forced off as the insert is fully
inserted.
A. Claw in Notch
B. Correct Installation
C. Incorrect Installation
5. Be sure that the notches are locked by the bottom
claws. Make sure that all other claws are properly
locked on both sides of the insert slots.
6. Put the blade assembly pivot in the wiper arm hook.
Pull up until the pivot locking tab locks in the
hook slot.
7. Carefully lower the wiper arm and blade assembly
onto the windshield.
5-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Backglass Wiper Blade Replacement
{CAUTION:
for instructions on how to change the backglass wiper
blade. The backglass wiper blade will not lock in a
vertical position like the windshield wiper blade, so care
should be used when pulling it away from the vehicle.
Poorly maintained and improperly used tires
are dangerous.
• Overloading your tires can cause
overheating as a result of too much
friction. You could have an air-out and a
serious accident. See Loading Your
• Underinflated tires pose the same danger
as overloaded tires. The resulting accident
could cause serious injury. Check all tires
frequently to maintain the recommended
pressure. Tire pressure should be checked
when your tires are cold. See Inflation -
Tires
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires made by
a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever have questions
about your tire warranty and where to obtain service,
see your GM Warranty booklet for details. For additional
information refer to the tire manufacturer’s booklet
included with your vehicle.
• Overinflated tires are more likely to be cut,
punctured, or broken by a sudden
impact — such as when you hit a pothole.
Keep tires at the recommended pressure.
• Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If
your tread is badly worn, or if your tires
have been damaged, replace them.
5-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed to
GM’s specific tire performance criteria have a TPC
specification code molded onto the sidewall. GM’s TPC
specifications meet or exceed all federal safety
guidelines.
Tire Sidewall Labeling
Useful information about a tire is molded into the
sidewall. The following illustrations are examples of a
typical P-Metric and a LT-Metric tire sidewall.
(C) DOT (Department of Transportation): The
Department of Transportation (DOT) code indicates that
the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of
Transportation Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.
(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters and
numbers following DOT code are the Tire Identification
Number (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer and
plant code, tire size, and date the tire was manufactured.
The TIN is molded onto both sides of the tire, although
only one side may have the date of manufacture.
(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and number of
plies in the sidewall and under the tread.
(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG): Tire
manufacturers are required to grade tires based on
three performance factors: treadwear, traction,
and temperature resistance. For more information, see
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire
(A) Tire Size: The tire size code is a combination of
letters and numbers used to define a particular
tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction type, and
service description. See the “Tire Size” illustration
later in this section for more detail.
(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit: Maximum
load that can be carried and the maximum pressure
needed to support that load. For information on
recommended tire pressure see Inflation - Tire Pressure
5-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all federal
safety guidelines.
(C) Dual Tire Maximum Load: Maximum load that can
be carried and the maximum pressure needed to
support that load when used in a dual configuration. For
information on recommended tire pressure see
(D) DOT (Department of Transportation): The
Department of Transportation (DOT) code indicates that
the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of
Transportation Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.
(E) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters and
numbers following DOT code are the Tire Identification
Number (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer and
plant code, tire size, and date the tire was manufactured.
The TIN is molded onto both sides of the tire, although
only one side may have the date of manufacture.
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire
(A) Tire Size: The tire size code is a combination of
letters and numbers used to define a particular
tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction type, and
service description. See the “Tire Size” illustration
later in this section for more detail.
(F) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and number of
plies in the sidewall and under the tread.
(G) Single Tire Maximum Load: Maximum load that
can be carried and the maximum pressure needed
to support that load when used as a single. For
information on recommended tire pressure see
(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed to
GM’s specific tire performance criteria have a TPC
specification code molded onto the sidewall.
5-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(A) Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: The United States
version of a metric tire sizing system. The letters LT as
the first two characters in the tire size means a light
truck tire engineered to standards set by the U.S. Tire
and Rim Association.
Tire Size
The following examples show the different parts of a
tire size.
(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicates the
tire section width in millimeters from sidewall to sidewall.
(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number that indicates
the tire height-to-width measurements. For example, if
the tire size aspect ratio is 75, as shown in item C of the
light truck (LT-Metric) tire illustration, it would mean
that the tire’s sidewall is 75% as high as it is wide.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire
(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used to
indicate the type of ply construction in the tire. The letter
R means radial ply construction; the letter D means
diagonal or bias ply construction; and the letter B means
belted-bias ply construction.
(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in inches.
(F) Service Description: The service description
indicates the load range and speed rating of a tire. The
load index can range from 1 to 279. Speed ratings
range from A to Z.
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire
(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The United States
version of a metric tire sizing system. The letter P as the
first character in the tire size means a passenger
vehicle tire engineered to standards set by the U.S. Tire
and Rim Association.
5-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cold Inflation Pressure: The amount of air pressure in
a tire, measured in pounds per square inch (psi) or
kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built up heat
Tire Terminology and Definitions
Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the tire pressing
outward on each square inch of the tire. Air pressure
is expressed in pounds per square inch (psi) or
kilopascal (kPa).
Curb Weight: This means the weight of a motor
vehicle with standard and optional equipment including
the maximum capacity of fuel, oil, and coolant, but
without passengers and cargo.
Accessory Weight: This means the combined weight
of optional accessories. Some examples of optional
accessories are, automatic transmission, power steering,
power brakes, power windows, power seats, and air
conditioning.
DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewall of a
tire signifying that the tire is in compliance with the U.S.
Department of Transportation (DOT) motor vehicle
safety standards. The DOT code includes the Tire
Identification Number (TIN), an alphanumeric designator
which can also identify the tire manufacturer, production
plant, brand, and date of production.
Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s height to
its width.
Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is located
between the plies and the tread. Cords may be made
from steel or other reinforcing materials.
Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped by
steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the front
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the plies are
laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread.
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the rear axle,
5-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire, that must always face outward
when mounted on a vehicle.
Occupant Distribution: Designated seating positions.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that faces
outward when mounted on a vehicle. The side of the tire
that contains a whitewall, bears white lettering, or
bears manufacturer, brand, and/or model name molding
that is higher or deeper than the same moldings on
the other sidewall of the tire.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used on light duty
trucks and some multipurpose passenger vehicles.
Load Index: An assigned number ranging from 1 to 279
that corresponds to the load carrying capacity of a tire.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on passenger
cars and some light duty trucks and multipurpose
vehicles.
Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum air
pressure to which a cold tire may be inflated. The
maximum air pressure is molded onto the sidewall.
Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehicle
manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation pressure and
shown on the tire placard. See Inflation - Tire Pressure
Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tire at the
maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire.
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum of curb
weight; accessory weight; vehicle capacity weight;
and production options weight.
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords
that extend to the beads are laid at 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread.
Normal Occupant Weight: The number of occupants a
vehicle is designed to seat multiplied by 150 lbs (68 kg).
Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon which the tire
beads are seated.
5-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the tread and
UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards): A
tire information system that provides consumers with
ratings for a tire’s traction, temperature, and treadwear.
Ratings are determined by tire manufacturers using
government testing procedures. The ratings are molded
into the sidewall of the tire. See Uniform Tire Quality
the bead.
Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned to a
tire indicating the maximum speed at which a tire
can operate.
Traction: The friction between the tire and the road
surface. The amount of grip provided.
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number of designated
seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs (68 kg) plus
the rated cargo load. See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-45.
Tread: The portion of a tire that comes into contact
with the road.
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimes
called wear bars, that show across the tread of a tire
when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread remains.
Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on an
individual tire due to curb weight, accessory weight,
occupant weight, and cargo weight.
Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached to a
vehicle showing the vehicle’s capacity weight and
the original equipment tire size and recommended
inflation pressure. See “Tire and Loading Information
5-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A Tire and Loading Information label is attached to the
vehicle’s center pillar (B-pillar), below the driver’s
door latch. This label shows your vehicle’s original
equipment tires and the correct inflation pressures for
your tires when they are cold. The recommended
cold tire inflation pressure, shown on the label, is the
minimum amount of air pressure needed to support your
vehicle’s maximum load carrying capacity.
Inflation - Tire Pressure
Tires need the correct amount of air pressure to operate
effectively.
Notice: Do not let anyone tell you that
under-inflation or over-inflation is all right. It is not.
If your tires do not have enough air (under-inflation),
you can get the following:
For additional information regarding how much weight
your vehicle can carry, and an example of the tire
and loading information label, see Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-45. How you load your vehicle affects
vehicle handling and ride comfort, never load your
vehicle with more weight than it was designed to carry.
• Too much flexing
• Too much heat
• Tire overloading
• Premature or irregular wear
• Poor handling
• Reduced fuel economy
When to Check
Check your tires once a month or more.
If your tires have too much air (over-inflation), you
can get the following:
Also, check the tire pressure of the spare tire.
• Unusual wear
• Poor handling
• Rough ride
• Needless damage from road hazards
5-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Check
Tire Inspection and Rotation
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire
pressure. You cannot tell if your tires are properly
inflated simply by looking at them. Radial tires may look
properly inflated even when they’re underinflated.
Check the tire’s inflation pressure when the tires
are cold. Cold means your vehicle has been sitting
for at least three hours or driven no more than
1 mile (1.6 km).
Tires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles
(8 000 to 13 000 km).
Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate your tires as
soon as possible and check wheel alignment. Also
check for damaged tires or wheels. See When It Is Time
on page 5-69 for more information.
Make sure the spare tire is stored securely. Push, pull,
and then try to rotate or turn the tire. If it moves,
use the wheel wrench to tighten the cable. For
information on storing or removing the spare tire, see
Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem. Press
the tire gage firmly onto the valve to get a pressure
measurement. If the cold tire inflation pressure matches
the recommended pressure on the tire and loading
information label, no further adjustment is necessary. If
the pressure is low, add air until you reach the
recommended amount.
The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve more
uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. The first rotation
is the most important. See Scheduled Maintenance
on page 6-4.
If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on the
metal stem in the center of the tire valve. Recheck the
tire pressure with the tire gage.
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve
stems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt
and moisture.
5-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts
become loose after a time. The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When you
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from
places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle.
In an emergency, you can use a cloth or a
paper towel to do this; but be sure to use a
scraper or wire brush later, if needed, to get all
page 5-74.
When rotating your tires, always use the correct rotation
pattern shown here.
After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front and
rear inflation pressures as shown on the Tire and
page 4-45, for an example of the label and its location
on your vehicle. Make certain that all wheel nuts
are properly tightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” under
5-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
You need a new tire if any of the following statements
are true:
When It Is Time for New Tires
• You can see the indicators at three or more places
around the tire.
One way to tell when it is
time for new tires is to
check the treadwear
indicators, which will
appear when your tires
have only 1/16 inch
(1.6 mm) or less of tread
remaining. Some
commercial truck tires may
not have treadwear
indicators.
• You can see cord or fabric showing through the
tire’s rubber.
• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut or snagged
deep enough to show cord or fabric.
• The tire has a bump, bulge, or split.
• The tire has a puncture, cut, or other damage that
cannot be repaired well because of the size or
location of the damage.
5-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GM’s TPC Spec number is molded onto the tire’s
sidewall by the tire manufacturer. If the tires have an
all-season tread design, the TPC spec number will
be followed by a MS, for mud and snow. See Tire
information.
Buying New Tires
GM has developed and matched specific tires for your
vehicle. The original equipment tires installed on
your vehicle, when it was new, were designed to meet
General Motors Tire Performance Criteria Specification
(TPC spec) system rating. If you need replacement
tires, GM strongly recommends that you get tires with
the same TPC Spec rating. This way, your vehicle
will continue to have tires that are designed to give the
same performance and vehicle safety, during normal
use, as the original tires.
{CAUTION:
Mixing tires could cause you to lose control
while driving. If you mix tires of different sizes,
brands, or types (radial and bias-belted tires)
the vehicle may not handle properly, and you
could have a crash. Using tires of different
sizes, brands, or types may also cause
damage to your vehicle. Be sure to use the
correct size, brand, and type of tires on your
vehicle’s wheels.
GM’s exclusive TPC Spec system considers over a
dozen critical specifications that impact the overall
performance of your vehicle, including brake system
performance, ride and handling, traction control, and tire
pressure monitoring performance.
5-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Different Size Tires and Wheels
{CAUTION:
If you add wheels or tires that are a different size than
your original equipment wheels and tires, this may
affect the way your vehicle performs, including its
braking, ride and handling characteristics, stability, and
resistance to rollover. Additionally, if your vehicle
has electronic systems such as, anti-lock brakes,
traction control, and electronic stability control, the
performance of these systems can be affected.
If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle, the
wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after
many miles of driving. A tire and/or wheel
could fail suddenly, causing a crash. Use only
radial-ply tires with the wheels on your vehicle.
If you must replace your vehicle’s tires with those that
do not have a TPC Spec number, make sure they
are the same size, load range, speed rating, and
construction type (radial and bias-belted tires) as your
vehicle’s original tires.
{CAUTION:
If you add different sized wheels, your vehicle
may not provide an acceptable level of
performance and safety if tires not
recommended for those wheels are selected.
You may increase the chance that you will
crash and suffer serious injury. Only use GM
specific wheel and tire systems developed for
your vehicle, and have them properly installed
by a GM certified technician.
Your vehicle’s original equipment tires are listed on the
Tire and Loading Information Label. This label is
attached to the vehicle’s center pillar (B-pillar). See
about the Tire and Loading Information Label.
5-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Treadwear
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and
a half (1.5) times as well on the government course as
a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits, service practices, and
differences in road characteristics and climate.
Quality grades can be found where applicable on the
tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum
section width. For example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
The following information relates to the system
developed by the United States National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), which grades
tires by treadwear, traction, and temperature
performance. This applies only to vehicles sold in the
United States. The grades are molded on the sidewalls
of most passenger car tires. The Uniform Tire Quality
Grading (UTQG) system does not apply to deep
tread, winter-type snow tires, space-saver, or temporary
use spare tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of
10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to some
Traction – AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A,
B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability
to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance.
limited-production tires.
While the tires available on General Motors passenger
cars and light trucks may vary with respect to these
grades, they must also conform to federal safety
requirements and additional General Motors Tire
Performance Criteria (TPC) standards.
Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does
not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
5-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Temperature – A, B, C
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation
of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can
cause the material of the tire to degenerate and
reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a
level of performance which all passenger car tires must
meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel than the
minimum required by law.
The tires and wheels on your vehicle were aligned
and balanced carefully at the factory to give you the
longest tire life and best overall performance.
Adjustments to wheel alignment and tire balancing will
not be necessary on a regular basis. However, if
you notice unusual tire wear or your vehicle pulling to
one side or the other, the alignment may need to
be checked. If you notice your vehicle vibrating when
driving on a smooth road, your tires and wheels
may need to be rebalanced. See your dealer for
proper diagnosis.
Wheel Replacement
Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or
excessive loading, either separately or in combination,
can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badly rusted
or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the
wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel nuts should be replaced.
If the wheel leaks air, replace it (except some
aluminum wheels, which can sometimes be repaired).
See your dealer if any of these conditions exist.
Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need.
5-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying
capacity, diameter, width, offset and be mounted
the same way as the one it replaces.
Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause problems
with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or
odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height,
vehicle ground clearance, and tire or tire chain
clearance to the body and chassis.
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts,
or wheel nuts, replace them only with new GM
original equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to
have the right wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel nuts
for your vehicle.
information.
Used Replacement Wheels
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel
bolts, or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be
dangerous. It could affect the braking and
handling of your vehicle, make your tires lose
air and make you lose control. You could have
a collision in which you or others could be
injured. Always use the correct wheel, wheel
bolts, and wheel nuts for replacement.
Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is
dangerous. You cannot know how it has been
used or how far it has been driven. It could fail
suddenly and cause a crash. If you have to
replace a wheel, use a new GM original
equipment wheel.
5-70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tire Chains
Accessory Inflator
Your vehicle may have an accessory inflator system.
You can inflate things like basketballs and bicycle tires.
You can also use it to bring your tire pressure up to
the proper pressure. It is not designed to inflate
large objects which will require more than five minutes
to inflate, such as an air mattress.
{CAUTION:
Do not use tire chains. There is not enough
clearance. Tire chains used on a vehicle
without the proper amount of clearance can
cause damage to the brakes, suspension, or
other vehicle parts. The area damaged by the
tire chains could cause you to lose control of
your vehicle and you or others may be injured
in a crash. Use another type of traction device
only if its manufacturer recommends it for use
on your vehicle and tire size combination and
road conditions. Follow that manufacturer’s
instructions. To help avoid damage to your
vehicle, drive slowly, re-adjust or remove the
device if it is contacting your vehicle, and do
not spin your wheels. If you do find traction
devices that will fit, install them on the
rear tires.
The accessory inflator is
located in the rear
compartment on the
driver’s side of the vehicle
behind an access cover,
near the liftgate opening.
To remove the cover, push in on the tab to access
the inflator.
5-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
You may have an air inflator kit that is located in the
glove compartment. It includes a 22 ft (6.7 m) hose with
three nozzle adapters.
4. Press and release the switch to turn the air inflator
on. The indicator light will remain on when the
inflator is running.
The system has an internal clock to prevent the
system from overheating. The system will allow
about five minutes of running time, then the
compressor will stop. The indicator light will then
begin to flash. When the indicator is off, the inflator
can be started again by pressing the switch. If
the compressor is still hot, it may only run for a short
time before shutting off again.
To use the accessory inflator, do the following:
1. Attach the appropriate nozzle adapter to the end of
the hose, if required.
{CAUTION:
5. Press and release the switch to turn the inflator off.
Inflating something too much can make it
explode, and you or others could be injured.
Be sure to read the inflator instructions, and
inflate any object only to its recommended
pressure.
Place the inflator kit tools in the pouch and store it in
its proper location. Remove the inflator hose from
the outlet during loading and unloading. Load leveling
will not function with the inflator hose attached to
the inflator outlet. See Electronically Controlled Air
2. Attach that end of the hose to the object you wish
to inflate.
To reinstall the cover, line up the tabs at the back of
the cover, put it in place and latch the tabs.
3. Attach the other end of the hose to the outlet.
A continuous flashing indicator light may also indicate a
malfunction in the air suspension system. See
page 4-55 for more information.
5-72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If a Tire Goes Flat
{CAUTION:
It is unusual for a tire to blowout while you are driving,
especially if you maintain your vehicle’s tires properly.
If air goes out of a tire, it is much more likely to leak out
slowly. But if you should ever have a blowout, here
are a few tips about what to expect and what to do:
Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do
maintenance or repairs is dangerous without
the appropriate safety equipment and training.
The jack provided with your vehicle is
designed only for changing a flat tire. If it is
used for anything else, you or others could be
badly injured or killed if the vehicle slips off
the jack. Use the jack provided with your
vehicle only for changing a flat tire.
If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag that pulls
the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the
accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly.
Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake to
a stop well out of the traffic lane.
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like a
skid and may require the same correction you would
use in a skid. In any rear blowout remove your foot from
the accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control
by steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may
be very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently
brake to a stop, well off the road if possible.
If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use the
jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.
5-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing a Flat Tire
CAUTION: (Continued)
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage
by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on your
hazard warning flashers. See Hazard Warning Flashers
on page 3-6 for more information.
6. Put the wheel blocks at the front and rear
of the tire farthest away from the one
being changed. That would be the tire
on the other side, at the opposite end of
the vehicle.
{CAUTION:
When your vehicle has a flat tire, use the following
example as a guide to assist you in the placement of
wheel blocks.
Changing a tire can be dangerous. The vehicle
can slip off the jack and roll over or fall on you
or other people. You and they could be badly
injured or even killed. Find a level place to
change your tire. To help prevent the vehicle
from moving:
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
2. Put the shift lever in PARK (P).
3. If you have a four-wheel-drive vehicle, be
sure the transfer case is in a drive
gear— not in NEUTRAL.
4. Turn off the engine and do not restart
while the vehicle is raised.
5. Do not allow passengers to remain in
the vehicle.
CAUTION: (Continued)
The following information will tell you how to use the
jack and change a tire.
5-74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools
Extended Model
The jacking equipment you will need is stored under the
rear seat (regular model) or in the left rear quarter
panel storage compartment (extended model). To
release the jack from its holder, turn the knob on the
jack counterclockwise to lower the jack head. See Rear
Regular Model
5-75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If you remove or restow a tire from/to the
storage position under the vehicle when it is
supported by a jack, you could damage the tire
and/or your vehicle. Always remove or restow a tire
when the vehicle is on the ground.
A. Wheel Wrench
B. Hoist Shaft
C. Extension(s)
D. Retainer
E. Spare or Flat Tire (Valve
Stem Pointed Up)
The tools you will be using include the wheel wrench (A),
wheel blocks (B), extension(s) (socket end) (C),
handle (jack end) (D), and jack (E). The extended model
will include an additional extension.
The following instructions explain how to remove the
underbody-mounted spare underneath your vehicle.
page 2-13 for more information.
2. Attach the wheel wrench (A) to the extension (C).
5-76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Insert the socket end
of the extension (C) on
a 45 degree angle
downward into the hoist
drive shaft hole (D).
It is exposed when the
rear gate is open
and is just above the
rear bumper.
Be sure the socket end of the extension (C)
connects to the hoist shaft.
4. Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to lower
the spare tire. Keep turning the wheel wrench until
the spare tire can be pulled out from under the
vehicle.
If the spare tire does not lower to the ground, the
secondary latch is engaged causing the tire
page 5-84 for more information.
5-77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing the Flat Tire and
Installing the Spare Tire
5. Tilt the retainer at the end of the cable when the
tire has been completely lowered, and pull it
through the wheel opening.
6. Pull the tire out from under the vehicle.
1. If your vehicle has a hubcap that covers the wheel
nuts, position the chisel end of the wheel wrench in
the notch and pry it off.
Notice: If you drive away before the spare tire or
secondary latch system cable has been reinstalled,
you could damage your vehicle. Always reinstall
this cable before driving your vehicle.
7. Put the spare tire near the flat tire.
5-78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Using the wheel
wrench, loosen all the
wheel nuts. Do not
remove them yet.
Front Position
Rear Position
C. Handle
D. Extension(s)
E. Wheel Wrench
3. Turn the jack adjusting knob clockwise by hand to
raise the jack lift head.
A. Front Frame/
Rear Axle
B. Jack
4. Place the handle, extension and wheel wrench onto
the jack.
5. Place the jack in the appropriate position nearest
the flat tire.
{CAUTION:
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is
dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack you
could be badly injured or killed. Never get under
a vehicle when it is supported only by a jack.
5-79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly
positioned can damage the vehicle and even
make the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal
injury and vehicle damage, be sure to fit the
jack lift head into the proper location before
raising the vehicle.
6. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack handle
clockwise. Raise the vehicle far enough off the
ground so there is enough room for the spare
tire to fit.
5-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Remove all the wheel
nuts and take off the
flat tire.
8. Remove any rust or dirt
from the wheel bolts,
mounting surfaces
and spare wheel.
9. Place the spare tire on the wheel-mounting surface.
{CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on the wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make the wheel nuts
become loose after a time. The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When you
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from
the places where the wheel attaches to the
vehicle. In an emergency, you can use a cloth
or a paper towel to do this; but be sure to use
a scraper or wire brush later, if needed, to get
all the rust or dirt off.
5-81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts. If
you do, the nuts might come loose. Your wheel
could fall off, causing a serious accident.
10. Put the nuts on by hand. Make sure the rounded
end is toward the wheel.
11. Tighten each nut by hand until the wheel is held
against the hub. If a nut cannot be turned by
hand, use the wheel wrench and see your dealer
as soon as possible.
12. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack handle
counterclockwise. Lower the jack completely.
5-82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead
to brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid
expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel
nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper
torque specification. See Capacities and
torque specification.
{CAUTION:
Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened
wheel nuts can cause the wheel to come loose
and even come off. This could lead to an
accident. Be sure to use the correct wheel
nuts. If you have to replace them, be sure to
get new original equipment wheel nuts. Stop
somewhere as soon as you can and have the
nuts tightened with a torque wrench to the
proper torque specification. See Capacities
torque specification.
13. Use the wrench to
tighten the wheel nuts
firmly in a crisscross
sequence as shown.
5-83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Secondary Latch System
{CAUTION:
Your vehicle has an underbody-mounted tire hoist
assembly equipped with a secondary latch system. It is
designed to stop the spare tire from suddenly falling
off your vehicle if the cable holding the spare tire
is damaged. For the secondary latch to work, the tire
must be stored with the valve stem pointing up.
for instructions on storing the spare or flat tire correctly.
Someone standing too close during the
procedure could be injured by the jack. If the
spare tire does not slide off the jack
completely, make sure no one is behind you or
on either side of you as you pull the jack out
from the spare.
{CAUTION:
To release the spare tire from the secondary latch, do
the following:
Before beginning this procedure read all the
instructions. Failure to read and follow the
instructions could damage the hoist assembly
and you and others could get hurt. Read and
follow the instructions listed below.
1. Check under the
vehicle to see if the
cable is visible. If it is
not visible, proceed
to Step 6.
5-84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. If visible, first try to tighten the cable by turning the
wheel wrench clockwise until you hear two clicks or
feel it skip twice. You cannot overtighten the cable.
3. Loosen the cable by turning the wheel wrench
counterclockwise three or four turns.
4. Repeat this procedure at least two times.
If the spare tire lowers to the ground, continue with
page 5-75.
5. Turn the wrench counterclockwise until
approximately 6 inches (15 cm) of cable is exposed.
6. Attach the jack handle, extension(s) and the wheel
wrench to the jack and place it under the vehicle
towards the front of the rear bumper. Position
the center lift point of the jack under the center of
the spare tire.
5-85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Turn the wrench clockwise to raise the jack until it
lifts the end fitting.
10. Disconnect the jack handle from the jack and
carefully remove the jack. Use one hand to push
against the spare while firmly pulling the jack out
from under the spare tire with the other hand.
8. Continue raising the jack until the spare tire stops
moving upward and is held firmly in place. The
secondary latch has released and the spare tire is
balancing on the jack.
11. If the spare tire is
hanging from the
cable, insert the socket
end of the extension
connected to the wheel
wrench into the hoist
shaft hole just
9. Lower the jack by turning the wheel wrench
counterclockwise. Keep lowering the jack until the
spare tire slides off the jack or is hanging by
the cable.
above the rear bumper
on a 45 degree
angle downward.
Be sure that the socket end of the extension connects
to the hoist shaft.
5-86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13. Tilt the retainer at the end of the cable and pull it
through the wheel opening. Pull the tire out from
under the vehicle.
Notice: If you drive away before the spare tire or
secondary latch system cable has been reinstalled,
you could damage your vehicle. Always reinstall
this cable before driving your vehicle.
14. Turn the wheel wrench clockwise to raise the cable
back up if the cable is hanging under the vehicle.
Have the hoist assembly inspected as soon as you can.
You will not be able to store a spare tire using the
hoist assembly until it has been repaired or replaced.
12. Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to lower
the spare the rest of the way.
5-87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire
and Tools
CAUTION: (Continued)
properly and the spare tire could loosen
and suddenly fall from your vehicle. If this
happened when your vehicle was being driven,
the tire might contact a person or another
vehicle, causing injury and, of course,
damage to itself as well. Be sure the
underbody-mounted spare tire is stored
with its valve stem pointing up.
{CAUTION:
Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment in the
passenger compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision,
loose equipment could strike someone. Store
all these in the proper place.
Notice: An aluminum wheel with a flat tire should
always be stored under the vehicle with the
hoist. However, storing it that way for an extended
period could damage the wheel. To avoid this,
always stow the wheel properly with the valve stem
pointing up and have the wheel repaired as soon
as possible.
{CAUTION:
The underbody-mounted spare tire needs to be
stored with the valve stem pointing up. If the
spare tire is stored with the valve stem pointing
downward, its secondary latch won’t work
CAUTION: (Continued)
5-88
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Follow this diagram to store the underbody-mounted
spare tire.
6. Raise the tire fully against the underside of the
vehicle. Continue turning the wheel wrench (A)
clockwise until you hear two clicks or feel it
skip twice. This indicates that the tire is secure and
the cable is tight. The spare tire hoist cannot be
overtightened.
A. Wheel Wrench
B. Hoist Shaft
C. Extension(s)
D. Retainer
E. Spare or Flat Tire
(Valve Stem
Pointed Up)
1. Put the tire (E) on the ground at the rear of the
vehicle.
2. Remove the hubcap, if equipped, from the flat tire
by tapping the backside of the hubcap with the
wheel wrench (A). Store in a safe location until the
flat tire is repaired. Once the tire is repaired,
replace the hubcap.
3. Ensure the valve stem is pointed up and to the rear.
4. Pull the retainer (D) through the wheel.
7. Make sure the tire is stored securely. Push, pull (A),
and then try to turn (B) the tire. If the tire moves,
use the wheel wrench and socket end of the
extension to tighten the cable.
5. Put the socket end of the extension (C), on a
45 degree angle downward, through the hole just
above the rear bumper and connected to the hoist
shaft (B).
5-89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8. Return the equipment to the proper location in the
vehicle as shown next.
1. Attach the handle (A), wheel wrench (B), and
extension (D) in the slots provided.
2. Roll up the instruction label (C) and return to the
slot in the tool kit.
3. Assemble the wheel blocks (F) to the jack.
4. Turn the knob (E) on the jack clockwise to raise the
jack head.
5. Return the rear seat to its proper position.
Regular Model
A. Handle
E. Knob
B. Wheel Wrench
C. Instruction Label
D. Extension(s)
F. Wheel Blocks
and Jack
5-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. Roll up the instruction label (A) and return to the
slot in the tool kit.
2. Insert the handle (B) and wheel wrench (F) in the
slots provided.
3. Insert the wheel blocks (E) and then the jack (E).
4. Turn the knob (C) on the jack clockwise to raise the
jack head.
5. Reinstall the cover.
Extended Model
A. Instruction Label E. Wheel Blocks
B. Handle
and Jack
C. Knob
F. Wheel Wrench
D. Extension(s)
5-91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Spare Tire
Appearance Care
Your vehicle, when new, had a fully-inflated spare tire.
A spare tire may lose air over time, so check its
inflation pressure regularly. See Inflation - Tire Pressure
for information regarding proper tire inflation and loading
your vehicle. For instruction on how to remove, install
or store a spare tire, see Removing the Flat Tire
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle
Your vehicle’s interior will continue to look its best if
it is cleaned often. Although not always visible, dust and
dirt can accumulate on your upholstery. Dirt can
damage carpet, fabric, leather, and plastic surfaces.
Regular vacuuming is recommended to remove particles
from your upholstery. It is important to keep your
upholstery from becoming and remaining heavily soiled.
Soils should be removed as quickly as possible. Your
vehicle’s interior may experience extremes of heat
that could cause stains to set rapidly.
After installing the spare tire on your vehicle, you should
stop as soon as possible and make sure the spare is
correctly inflated. Have the damaged or flat road
tire repaired or replaced as soon as you can and
installed back onto your vehicle. This way, a spare tire
will be available in case you need it again.
Lighter colored interiors may require more frequent
cleaning. Use care because newspapers and garments
that transfer color to your home furnishings may also
transfer color to your vehicle’s interior.
Do not mix tires and wheels of different sizes,
because they will not fit. Keep your spare tire
and its wheel together.
5-92
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When cleaning your vehicle’s interior, only use cleaners
specifically designed for the surfaces being cleaned.
Permanent damage may result from using cleaners on
surfaces for which they were not intended. Use glass
cleaner only on glass. Remove any accidental over-spray
from other surfaces immediately. To prevent over-spray,
apply cleaner directly to the cleaning cloth.
Do not clean your vehicle using the following cleaners
or techniques:
• Never use a knife or any other sharp object to
remove a soil from any interior surface.
• Never use a stiff brush. It can cause damage to
your vehicle’s interior surfaces.
• Never apply heavy pressure or rub aggressively
with a cleaning cloth. Use of heavy pressure
can damage your interior and does not improve the
effectiveness of soil removal.
Notice: If you use abrasive cleaners when cleaning
glass surfaces on your vehicle, you could scratch
the glass and/or cause damage to the rear window
defogger. When cleaning the glass on your
vehicle, use only a soft cloth and glass cleaner.
• Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps. Avoid laundry
detergents or dishwashing soaps with degreasers.
Using too much soap will leave a residue that
leaves streaks and attracts dirt. For liquid cleaners,
about 20 drops per gallon (3.78 L) of water is a
good guide.
Many cleaners contain solvents that may become
concentrated in your vehicle’s breathing space. Before
using cleaners, read and adhere to all safety
instructions on the label. While cleaning your vehicle’s
interior, maintain adequate ventilation by opening
your vehicle’s doors and windows.
• Do not heavily saturate your upholstery while
cleaning.
Dust may be removed from small buttons and knobs
using a small brush with soft bristles.
• Damage to your vehicle’s interior may result from
the use of many organic solvents such as naptha,
alcohol, etc.
Your GM dealer has a product for cleaning your
vehicle’s glass. Should it become necessary, you can
also obtain a product from your GM dealer to remove
odors from your vehicle’s upholstery.
5-93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If any of the soil remains, a commercial fabric cleaner or
spot lifter may be necessary. When a commercial
upholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to be used, test a
small hidden area for colorfastness first. If the locally
cleaned area gives any impression that a ring formation
may result, clean the entire surface.
Fabric/Carpet
Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft brush attachment
frequently to remove dust and loose dirt. A canister
vacuum with a beater bar in the nozzle may only
be used on floor carpet and carpeted floor mats. For
soils, always try to remove them first with plain water or
club soda. Before cleaning, gently remove as much
of the soil as possible using one of the following
techniques:
After the cleaning process has been completed, a paper
towel can be used to blot excess moisture from the
fabric or carpet.
• For liquids: gently blot the remaining soil with a
paper towel. Allow the soil to absorb into the
paper towel until no more can be removed.
Leather
A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to
remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary,
a soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution can
be used. Allow the leather to dry naturally. Do not use
heat to dry. Never use steam to clean leather. Never
use spot lifters or spot removers on leather. Many
commercial leather cleaners and coatings that are sold
to preserve and protect leather may permanently
change the appearance and feel of your leather and are
not recommended. Do not use silicone or wax-based
products, or those containing organic solvents to clean
your vehicle’s interior because they can alter the
appearance by increasing the gloss in a non-uniform
manner. Never use shoe polish on your leather.
• For solid dry soils: remove as much as possible
and then vacuum.
To clean, use the following instructions:
1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white cloth with water or
club soda.
2. Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture.
3. Start on the outside edge of the soil and gently rub
toward the center. Continue cleaning, using a clean
area of the cloth each time it becomes soiled.
4. Continue to gently rub the soiled area until the
cleaning cloth remains clean.
5. If the soil is not completely removed, use a mild
soap solution and repeat the cleaning process
that was used with plain water.
5-94
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
Plastic Surfaces
Care of Safety Belts
Keep belts clean and dry.
A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to
remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary,
a clean soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution
can be used to gently remove dust and dirt. Never use
spot lifters or removers on plastic surfaces. Many
commercial cleaners and coatings that are sold to
preserve and protect soft plastic surfaces may
permanently change the appearance and feel of your
interior and are not recommended. Do not use silicone
or wax-based products, or those containing organic
solvents to clean your vehicle’s interior because
they can alter the appearance by increasing the gloss in
a non-uniform manner.
{CAUTION:
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If you do, it
may severely weaken them. In a crash, they
might not be able to provide adequate
protection. Clean safety belts only with mild
soap and lukewarm water.
Weatherstrips
Some commercial products may increase gloss on your
instrument panel. The increase in gloss may cause
annoying reflections in the windshield and even make it
difficult to see through the windshield under certain
conditions.
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold,
damp weather frequent application may be required. See
5-95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Washing Your Vehicle
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses
The paint finish on the vehicle provides beauty, depth of
color, gloss retention, and durability.
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a car
washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses.
page 5-96.
The best way to preserve the vehicle’s finish is to keep it
clean by washing it often with lukewarm or cold water.
Do not wash the vehicle in the direct rays of the sun.
Use a car washing soap. Do not use strong soaps
or chemical detergents. Be sure to rinse the vehicle well,
removing all soap residue completely. GM-approved
cleaning products can be obtained from your dealer. See
Do not use cleaning agents that are petroleum based,
or that contain acid or abrasives. All cleaning agents
should be flushed promptly and not allowed to dry on the
surface, or they could stain. Dry the finish with a soft,
clean chamois or an all-cotton towel to avoid surface
scratches and water spotting.
Finish Care
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of your vehicle by
hand may be necessary to remove residue from the
paint finish. You can get GM-approved cleaning products
from your dealer. See Vehicle Care/Appearance
If your vehicle has a “basecoat/clearcoat” paint finish,
the clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored
basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are
non-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish.
High pressure car washes may cause water to enter
the vehicle.
Notice: Machine compounding or aggressive
polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish may
damage it. Use only non-abrasive waxes and
polishes that are made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish on your vehicle.
5-96
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other
salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird
droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc.,
can damage your vehicle’s finish if they remain
on painted surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as
possible. If necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that
are marked safe for painted surfaces to remove
foreign matter.
Windshield, Backglass, and
Wiper Blades
If the windshield is not clear after using the windshield
washer, or if the wiper blade chatters when running,
wax, sap or other material may be on the blade or
windshield.
Clean the outside of the windshield with a full-strength
glass cleaning liquid. The windshield is clean if beads do
not form when you rinse it with water.
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather
and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a
period of years. You can help to keep the paint finish
looking new by keeping your vehicle garaged or covered
whenever possible.
Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiper blades
and affect their performance. Clean the blade by
wiping vigorously with a cloth soaked in full-strength
windshield washer solvent. Then rinse the blade
with water.
Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Parts
Bright metal parts should be cleaned regularly to keep
their luster. Washing with water is all that is usually
needed. However, you may use chrome polish on
chrome or stainless steel trim, if necessary.
Check the wiper blades and clean them as necessary;
replace blades that look worn.
Use special care with aluminum trim. To avoid damaging
protective trim, never use auto or chrome polish,
steam or caustic soap to clean aluminum. A coating of
wax, rubbed to high polish, is recommended for all
bright metal parts.
5-97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If you drive your vehicle through an
automatic car wash that has silicone carbide tire
cleaning brushes, you could damage the aluminum
or chrome-plated wheels. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Never drive a vehicle
equipped with aluminum or chrome-plated wheels
through an automatic car wash that uses silicone
carbide tire cleaning brushes.
Aluminum Wheels
Notice: If you use strong soaps, chemicals,
abrasive polishes, cleaners, brushes, or cleaners
that contain acid on aluminum or chrome-plated
wheels, you could damage the surface of the
wheel(s). The repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Use only GM-approved cleaners on
aluminum or chrome-plated wheels.
Do not take the vehicle through an automatic car wash
that has silicone carbide tire cleaning brushes. These
brushes can also damage the surface of these wheels.
Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mild
soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After rinsing
thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax may then
be applied.
Tires
Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminum wheels
could damage the wheels. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Use chrome polish on
chrome wheels only.
To clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tire cleaner.
Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressing
products on your vehicle may damage the paint
finish and/or tires. When applying a tire dressing,
always wipe off any overspray from all painted
surfaces on your vehicle.
The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted
surface of the vehicle. Do not use strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners,
cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes on
them because the surface could be damaged. Do not
use chrome polish on aluminum wheels.
5-98
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sheet Metal Damage
Underbody Maintenance
If the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal
repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop
applies anti-corrosion material to parts repaired or
replaced to restore corrosion protection.
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust
control can collect on the underbody. If these are not
removed, corrosion and rust can develop on the
underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor
pan, and exhaust system even though they have
corrosion protection.
Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide the
corrosion protection while maintaining the warranty.
At least every spring, flush these materials from the
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud
and debris can collect. Dirt packed in close areas of
the frame should be loosened before being flushed.
Your dealer or an underbody car washing system can
do this for you.
Finish Damage
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the
finish should be repaired right away. Bare metal
will corrode quickly and may develop into major
repair expense.
Chemical Paint Spotting
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with
touch-up materials available from your GM dealer.
Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected in
your GM dealer’s body and paint shop.
Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a
chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and
attack painted surfaces on the vehicle. This damage can
take two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped discolorations,
and small, irregular dark spots etched into the
paint surface.
Although no defect in the paint job causes this, GM will
repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of
new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within
12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,
whichever occurs first.
5-99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
Description
Usage
Removes swirl marks, fine
scratches, and other light
surface contamination.
Removes light scratches
and protects finish.
Cleans, shines, and
protects in one step. No
wiping necessary.
Description
Usage
Swirl Remover Polish
Polishing Cloth
Wax-Treated
Interior and exterior
polishing cloth.
Cleaner Wax
Tar and Road
Oil Remover
Removes tar, road oil,
and asphalt.
Foaming Tire Shine
Low Gloss
Chrome Cleaner
and Polish
Use on chrome or
stainless steel.
White Sidewall
Tire Cleaner
Vinyl Cleaner
Removes soil and black
marks from whitewalls.
Cleans vinyl.
Removes dirt, grime,
smoke and fingerprints.
Removes dirt and grime
from chrome wheels and
wire wheel covers.
Medium foaming
shampoo. Cleans and
lightly waxes.
Wash Wax Concentrate
Biodegradable and
phosphate free.
Glass Cleaner
Quickly removes spots
and stains from carpets,
vinyl, and cloth
Chrome and Wire
Wheel Cleaner
Spot Lifter
upholstery.
Removes dust,
Odorless spray odor
eliminator used on fabrics,
vinyl, leather and carpet.
fingerprints, and surface
contaminants. Spray on
and wipe off.
Finish Enhancer
Odor Eliminator
5-100
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Identification
The eighth character in the VIN is the engine code. This
code will help you identify your vehicle’s engine,
specifications, and replacement parts.
Vehicle Identification
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Service Parts Identification Label
You will find this label on the inside of the glove box. It
is very helpful if you ever need to order parts. On
this label, you will find the following:
• VIN
• Model designation
This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It appears on
a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel, on
the driver’s side. You can see it if you look through the
windshield from outside your vehicle. The VIN also
appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts
labels and the certificates of title and registration.
• Paint information
• Production options and special equipment
Do not remove this label from the vehicle.
5-101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Headlamps
Electrical System
The headlamp wiring is protected by four fuses. An
electrical overload will cause a lamp to go on and off. If
this happens, have your headlamp wiring checked
right away.
Add-On Electrical Equipment
Notice: Don’t add anything electrical to your vehicle
unless you check with your dealer first. Some
electrical equipment can damage your vehicle and
the damage wouldn’t be covered by your warranty.
Some add-on electrical equipment can keep other
components from working as they should.
Windshield Wiper Fuses
The windshield wiper motor is protected by a circuit
breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats due to heavy
snow or ice, the wiper will stop until the motor cools.
If the overload is caused by some electrical problem, be
sure to get it fixed.
Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to
add anything electrical to your vehicle, see Servicing
Power Windows and Other
Power Options
Circuit breakers protect the power windows and other
power accessories. When the current load is too heavy,
the circuit breaker opens and closes, protecting the
circuit until the problem is fixed or goes away.
5-102
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
Engine Compartment Fuse Block
The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from
short circuits by a combination of fuses and circuit
breakers. This greatly reduces the chance of fires
caused by electrical problems.
Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If the
band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure you
replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical
size and rating.
If you ever have a problem on the road and don’t have
a spare fuse, you can borrow one that has the same
amperage. Just pick some feature of your vehicle
that you can get along without — like the radio or
cigarette lighter — and use its fuse, if it is the correct
amperage. Replace it as soon as you can.
The fuse block is located under the hood in the engine
compartment on the driver’s side of the vehicle. See
information on location.
Remove the primary cover by pressing the two locking
tabs. Remove the secondary cover by snapping off
while lifting. To reinstall the fuse panel cover, reverse
the sequence.
5-103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
L6 Engine
5-104
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
Usage
Electrically-Controlled
Air Suspension
Passenger’s Side High-Beam
Headlamp
Passenger’s Side Low-Beam
Headlamp
Back-Up Trailer Lamps
Driver’s Side High-Beam
Headlamp
Fuses
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
Usage
Fog Lamps
Stoplamp
1
Cigarette Lighter
Not Used
Electric Adjustable Pedals
Truck Body Controller, Ignition 1
Crank
2
3
4
5
Airbag
Driver’s Side Low-Beam
Headlamp
Rear Window Washer,
Headlamp Washer
Active Transfer Case
Windshield Washer
19
20
21
22
Trailer Electric Brake
Cooling Fan
Horn
Ignition E
Electronic Throttle Control
6
7
8
9
23
10
Powertrain Control Module B
5-105
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
Usage
Fuses
34
35
36
50
51
52
53
Usage
Instrument Panel Cluster, Driver
Information Center
Automatic Shift Lock
Control System
Ignition A
Blower Motor
Ignition B
24
25
Passenger’s Side Trailer Turn
Driver’s Side Trailer Turn
Hazard Flashers
Headlamp Driver Module
Air Injection Reactor (AIR)
Solenoid
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
Engine 1
Backup
Powertrain Control Module 1
Oxygen Sensor
Air Conditioning
Truck Body Controller
Trailer
54
56
58
Air Injection Reactor (AIR) Pump
Vehicle Stability Enhancement
Anti-Lock Brakes (ABS)
System (StabiliTrak®)
5-106
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Relays
37
38
39
40
Usage
Relays
46
47
49
55
Usage
Headlamp Driver Module
Starter
Electric Adjustable Pedal
Air Injection Reactor (AIR) Solenoid
Powertrain
Headlamp Washer
Rear Window Washer
Fog Lamps
Horn
Fuel Pump
41
57
42
43
44
45
Windshield Washer
High-Beam Headlamp
Air Conditioning
Cooling Fan
Miscellaneous Usage
48 Instrument Panel Battery
5-107
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
V8 Engine
5-108
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
Usage
Electrically-Controlled
Air Suspension
Passenger’s Side High-Beam
Headlamp
Passenger’s Side Low-Beam
Headlamp
Back-Up Trailer Lamps
Driver’s Side High-Beam
Headlamp
Fuses
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
Usage
Fog Lamps
Stoplamp
1
Cigarette Lighter
Ignition Coils
Canister Vent
Truck Body Controller, Ignition 1
Crank
2
3
4
5
Airbag
Driver’s Side Low-Beam
Headlamp
Rear Window Washer,
Headlamp Washer
Active Transfer Case
Windshield Washer
19
20
21
22
Trailer Electric Brake
Cooling Fan
Horn
Ignition E
Electronic Throttle Control
6
7
8
9
23
10
Powertrain Control Module B
5-109
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
Usage
Fuses
35
36
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
Usage
Instrument Panel Cluster, Driver
Information Center
Automatic Shift Lock
Control System
Blower Motor
Ignition B
24
Passenger’s Side Trailer Turn
Driver’s Side Trailer Turn
Hazard Flashers
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
Engine 1
Backup
Transmission
Powertrain Control Module 1
Powertrain Control Module
Air Conditioning
Injector Bank A
Trailer
Oxygen Sensor Bank B
Oxygen Sensor Bank A
Injector Bank B
Headlamp Driver Module
Truck Body Controller 1
Electric Adjustable Pedal
Anti-Lock Brakes (ABS)
Ignition A
5-110
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rear Underseat Fuse Block
Relays
37
38
Usage
Headlamp Washer
Rear Window Washer
Fog Lamps
39
40
Horn
41
Fuel Pump
42
43
44
45
Windshield Washer
High-Beam Headlamp
Air Conditioning
Cooling Fan
46
47
Headlamp Driver Module
Starter
49
60
Electric Adjustable Pedal
Powertrain
Envoy
Vehicle Stability Enhancement
61
System (StabiliTrak®)
Miscellaneous Usage
48 Instrument Panel Battery
5-111
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Envoy
5-112
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
01
Usage
Right Door Control Module
Left Door Control Module
Liftgate Module 2
Truck Body Controller 3
Rear Fog Lamps
Fuses
Usage
15
Blank
02
Vehicle Center High-Mounted
Stop Lamp
16
03
17
18
Right Rear Parking Lamps
Locks
04
05
Liftgate Module/Driver
Seat Module
19
06
Blank
07
Truck Body Controller 2
Power Seats
20
21
23
24
25
26
Blank
Lock
08
09
Rear Wiper
Blank
Unlock
Blank
Blank
10
Driver Door Module
Amplifier
11
12
Passenger Door Module
Rear Climate Controls
Left Rear Parking Lamps
OnStar® Overhead
13
27
28
Battery/OnStar® System
14
Sunroof
5-113
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
29
Usage
Rainsense™ Wipers
Parking Lamps
Fuses
Usage
Left Turn Signal
38
30
Heat Ventilation Air
Conditioning 1
39
31
Truck Body Controller Accessory
Truck Body Controller 5
Front Wipers
40
41
42
43
44
Truck Body Controller 4
Radio
32
33
Trailer Park
34
Vehicle Stop
Right Turn Signal
Heat Ventilation Air Conditioning
35
Transmission Control Module
Heat Ventilation Air
Conditioning B
36
37
Front Parking Lamps
5-114
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
45
Usage
Rear Fog Lamps
46
Auxiliary Power 1
Ignition 0
47
48
Four-Wheel Drive
Blank
49
50
Truck Body Controller Ignition
Brakes
51
52
Truck Body Controller Run
Envoy XL
5-115
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Envoy XL
5-116
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
Usage
Right Door Control Module
Left Door Control Module
Liftgate Module 2
Truck Body Controller 3
Rear Fog Lamps
Blank
Truck Body Controller 2
Power Seats
Rear Wiper
Driver Door Module
Amplifier
Passenger Door Module
Rear Climate Controls
Left Rear Parking Lamps
Blank
Vehicle Center High-Mounted
Stop Lamp
Right Rear Parking Lamps
Fuses
18
Usage
Locks
Liftgate Module/Driver Seat
Module
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
Vent Window
Lock
Retained Accessory Power
Blank
Unlock
Blank
Blank
OnStar® Overhead
27
Battery/OnStar® System
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
Sunroof
Rainsense™ Wipers
Parking Lamps
Truck Body Controller Accessory
Truck Body Controller 5
Front Wipers
16
17
Vehicle Stop
5-117
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
35
Usage
Fuses
47
Usage
Transmission Control Module
Ignition 0
Heat Ventilation Air
Conditioning B
Front Parking Lamps
Left Turn Signal
Heat Ventilation Air
Conditioning 1
Truck Body Controller 4
Radio
48
49
50
51
Four-Wheel Drive
Blank
Truck Body Controller Ignition
Brakes
36
37
38
52
Truck Body Controller Run
39
BLANK
BLANK
BLANK
BLANK
BLANK
BLANK
Blank
Blank
Blank
Blank
Blank
Blank
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
Trailer Park
Right Turn Signal
Heat Ventilation Air Conditioning
Rear Fog Lamps
Auxiliary Power 1
5-118
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. See Recommended Fluids and
Capacities
Application
English
Metric
Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a
Cooling System
1.9 lbs
0.86 kg
4.2L L6 Regular Wheelbase
4.2L L6 Extended Wheelbase
5.3L V8 Regular Wheelbase
5.3L V8 Extended Wheelbase
Engine Oil with Filter
4.2L L6
10.8 qt
13.8 qt
12.2 qt
15.3 qt
10.2 L
13.1 L
11.6 L
14.5 L
7.0 qt
6.0 qt
6.6 L
5.7 L
5.3L V8
Fuel Tank
Regular Wheelbase
22.0 gal
25.5 gal
2.0 qt
5.0 qt
100 lb ft
83.3 L
96.5 L
1.8 L
4.7 L
140 Y
Extended Wheelbase
Transfer Case Lubricant
Transmission (Drain and Refill)
Wheel Nut Torque
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the appropriate level, as recommended in this
manual. Recheck the fluid level after filling.
5-119
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Specifications
Engine
4.2L L6
5.3L V8
VIN Code
Transmission
Spark Plug Gap
S
Automatic
0.042 inches (1.07 mm)
0.040 inches (1.01 mm)
M
Automatic
5-120
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your Vehicle and the Environment
Maintenance Schedule
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep your
vehicle in good working condition, but also helps the
environment. All recommended maintenance is
important. Improper vehicle maintenance can even
affect the quality of the air we breathe. Improper fluid
levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase the level of
emissions from your vehicle. To help protect our
environment, and to keep your vehicle in good condition,
be sure to maintain your vehicle properly.
Introduction
Important: Keep engine oil at the proper level and
change as recommended.
Using the Maintenance Schedule
We at General Motors want to help you keep your
vehicle in good working condition. But we do not know
exactly how you will drive it. You may drive very
short distances only a few times a week. Or you may
drive long distances all the time in very hot, dusty
weather. You may use your vehicle in making deliveries.
Or you may drive it to work, to do errands, or in many
other ways.
Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plan
supplements your new vehicle warranties. See your
Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet or your dealer
for details.
Maintenance Requirements
Notice: Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections,
replacement parts, and recommended fluids and
lubricants as prescribed in this manual are
necessary to keep your vehicle in good working
condition. Any damage caused by failure to follow
scheduled maintenance may not be covered by
warranty.
6-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Because of all the different ways people use their
vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You may need more
frequent checks and replacements. So please read
the following and note how you drive. If you have any
questions on how to keep your vehicle in good condition,
see your GM Goodwrench® dealer.
{CAUTION:
Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can
be dangerous. In trying to do some jobs, you
can be seriously injured. Do your own
This schedule is for vehicles that:
maintenance work only if you have the
required know-how and the proper tools and
equipment for the job. If you have any doubt,
see your GM Goodwrench® dealer to have a
qualified technician do the work. See Doing
• carry passengers and cargo within recommended
limits. You will find these limits on the tire and
loading information label. See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-45.
• are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal
driving limits.
• are driven off-road in the recommended manner.
Some maintenance services can be complex. So,
unless you are technically qualified and have the
necessary equipment, you should have your GM
Goodwrench® dealer do these jobs.
on page 5-5.
should be performed when indicated. See Additional
When you go to your GM Goodwrench® dealer for your
service needs, you will know that GM-trained and
supported service technicians will perform the work
using genuine GM parts.
If you want to purchase service information, see Service
6-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
should be checked, when to check it, and what you
can easily do to help keep your vehicle in good
condition.
If the engine oil life system is ever reset accidentally,
you must service your vehicle within 3,000 miles
(5 000 km) since your last service. Remember to reset
the oil life system whenever the oil is changed. See
the Engine Oil Life System and resetting the system.
The proper replacement parts, fluids, and lubricants to
use are listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
make sure these are used. All parts should be replaced
and all necessary repairs done before you or anyone
else drives the vehicle. We recommend the use of
genuine GM parts.
When the change engine oil light or CHANGE ENGINE
OIL DIC message appears, certain services, checks,
and inspections are required. Required services
are described in the following for “Maintenance I” and
“Maintenance II.” Generally, it is recommended that your
first service be Maintenance I, your second service be
Maintenance II, and that you alternate Maintenance I
and Maintenance II thereafter. However, in some cases,
Maintenance II may be required more often.
Scheduled Maintenance
When the change engine oil light or CHANGE ENGINE
OIL DIC message comes on, it means that service is
required for your vehicle. See Change Engine Oil Light
page 3-54. Have your vehicle serviced as soon as
possible within the next 600 miles (1 000 km). It
is possible that, if you are driving under the best
conditions, the engine oil life system may not indicate
that vehicle service is necessary for over a year.
However, your engine oil and filter must be changed at
least once a year and at this time the system must
be reset. Your GM Goodwrench® dealer has GM-trained
service technicians who will perform this work using
genuine GM parts and reset the system.
Maintenance I — Use Maintenance I if the light or
message comes on within 10 months since the vehicle
was purchased or Maintenance II was performed.
Maintenance II — Use Maintenance II if the previous
service performed was Maintenance I. Always use
Maintenance II whenever the light or message comes
on 10 months or more since the last service or if the light
or message has not come on at all for one year.
6-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Scheduled Maintenance
Service
Maintenance I Maintenance II
Control Service.
•
•
•
Visually check for any leaks or damage. See footnote (j).
•
•
Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace filter. See Engine Air
Rotate tires and check inflation pressures and wear. See Tire Inspection and
page 6-9.
•
•
Inspect brake system. See footnote (a).
•
•
•
•
Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels and add fluid
as needed.
Perform any needed additional services. See “Additional Required Services” in
this section.
•
•
Inspect suspension and steering components. See footnote (b).
Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c).
•
•
•
•
•
•
Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d).
Inspect restraint system components. See footnote (e).
Lubricate body components. See footnote (f).
Check transmission fluid level and add fluid as needed. See footnote (g).
6-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional Required Services
The following services should be performed at the first maintenance service (I or II) after the indicated miles
(kilometers) shown for each item.
Additional Required Services
25,000
(40 000)
50,000
75,000
100,000
125,000
150,000
Service and Miles (Kilometers)
(80 000) (120 000) (160 000) (200 000) (240 000)
Inspect fuel system for damage
or leaks.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Inspect exhaust system for loose or
damaged components.
Replace engine air cleaner filter. See
Change automatic transmission fluid
and filter (severe service). See
footnotes (g) and (h).
•
•
•
•
Change automatic transmission fluid
and filter (normal service). See
footnote (g).
Automatic transfer case only: Change
transfer case fluid. See footnote (g).
•
•
•
•
•
Replace spark plugs. An Emission
Control Service.
V8 engine only: Inspect spark plug
wires. An Emission Control Service.
6-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional Required Services (cont’d)
25,000
(40 000)
50,000
75,000
100,000
125,000
150,000
Service and Miles (Kilometers)
(80 000) (120 000) (160 000) (200 000) (240 000)
Engine cooling system service (or every
five years, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. See
footnote (i).
•
Inspect engine accessory drive belt.
An Emission Control Service. See
footnote (l).
•
(c) Visually inspect hoses and have them replaced if
they are cracked, swollen, or deteriorated. Inspect
all pipes, fittings and clamps; replace with genuine
GM parts as needed. To help ensure proper operation,
a pressure test of the cooling system and pressure
cap and cleaning the outside of the radiator and
air conditioning condenser is recommended at least
once a year.
Maintenance Footnotes
(a) Visually inspect brake lines and hoses for proper
hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Inspect
disc brake pads for wear and rotors for surface
condition. Inspect other brake parts, including calipers,
parking brake, etc.
(b) Visually inspect front and rear suspension and
steering system for damaged, loose, or missing parts or
signs of wear. Inspect power steering lines and hoses
for proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc.
(d) Visually inspect wiper blades for wear or cracking.
Replace wiper blades that appear worn or damaged
or that streak or miss areas of the windshield.
6-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(e) Make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your
belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors, and anchorages
are working properly. Look for any other loose or
damaged safety belt system parts. If you see anything
that might keep a safety belt system from doing its
job, have it repaired. Have any torn or frayed safety belts
replaced. Also look for any opened or broken airbag
coverings, and have them repaired or replaced.
(h) Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the
vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these
conditions:
− In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature
regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.
− In hilly or mountainous terrain.
− When doing frequent trailer towing.
The airbag system does not need regular maintenance.
− Uses such as found in taxi, police, or delivery
service.
(f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders, hood latch
assembly, secondary latch, pivots, spring anchor,
release pawl, rear compartment hinges, outer liftgate
handle pivot points, rear door detent link, roller
mechanism, liftgate handle pivot points, latch bolt, fuel
door hinge, cargo door hinge, locks, and folding
seat hardware. More frequent lubrication may be
required when exposed to a corrosive environment.
Applying silicone grease on weatherstrips with a clean
cloth will make them last longer, seal better and not stick
or squeak.
(i) Drain, flush, and refill cooling system. This service
can be complex; you should have your dealer perform
what to use. Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser,
pressure cap, and filler neck. Pressure test the
cooling system and pressure cap.
(j) A fluid loss in any vehicle system could indicate a
problem. Have the system inspected and repaired and
the fluid level checked. Add fluid if needed.
(k) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions, inspect
the filter at each engine oil change.
(g) Inspect hoses for cracks, chafing, leaks, kinks, and
proper installation.
(l) Visually inspect belt for fraying, excessive cracks, or
obvious damage. Replace belt if necessary.
6-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Coolant Level Check
Owner Checks and Services
Check the engine coolant level and add
These owner checks and services should be performed
at the intervals specified to help ensure the safety,
dependability, and emission control performance of your
vehicle. Your GM Goodwrench® dealer can assist you
with these checks and services.
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check
Check the windshield washer fluid level in the windshield
washer fluid reservoir and add the proper fluid if
necessary.
Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.
Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to your
vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shown
At Least Once a Month
At Each Fuel Fill
Tire Inflation Check
It is important to perform these underhood checks at
each fuel fill.
Visually inspect your vehicle’s tires and make sure they
are inflated to the correct pressures. Do not forget to
details. Check to make sure the spare tire is stored
Engine Oil Level Check
Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if
details.
Tire Wear Inspection
Tire rotation may be required for high mileage highway
drivers prior to the Engine Oil Life System service
notification. Check the tires for wear and, if necessary,
page 5-63.
Notice: It is important to check your oil regularly
and keep it at the proper level. Failure to keep your
engine oil at the proper level can cause damage
to your engine not covered by your warranty.
6-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Transmission Shift Lock
Control System Check
At Least Once a Year
Starter Switch Check
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be injured.
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be injured.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle. It should be parked on a level
surface.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle.
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular
on page 2-31.
Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready to
turn off the engine immediately if it starts.
Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if
the vehicle begins to move.
3. Try to start the engine in each gear. The vehicle
should start only in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N). If
the vehicle starts in any other position, contact your
GM Goodwrench® dealer for service.
3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to RUN, but do
not start the engine. Without applying the regular
brake, try to move the shift lever out of PARK (P)
with normal effort. If the shift lever moves out
of PARK (P), contact your GM Goodwrench® dealer
for service.
6-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing
downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake, set the
parking brake.
Ignition Transmission Lock Check
While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn
the ignition to LOCK in each shift lever position.
• To check the parking brake’s holding ability: With
the engine running and transmission in
• The ignition should turn to LOCK only when the
shift lever is in PARK (P).
NEUTRAL (N), slowly remove foot pressure from
the regular brake pedal. Do this until the vehicle is
held by the parking brake only.
• The key should come out only in LOCK.
Contact your GM Goodwrench® dealer if service is
required.
• To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding ability:
With the engine running, shift to PARK (P). Then
release the parking brake followed by the regular
brake.
Contact your GM Goodwrench® dealer if service is
required.
Parking Brake and Automatic
Transmission Park (P) Mechanism Check
{CAUTION:
Underbody Flushing Service
At least every spring, use plain water to flush any
corrosive materials from the underbody. Take care to
clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris
can collect.
When you are doing this check, your vehicle
could begin to move. You or others could be
injured and property could be damaged. Make
sure there is room in front of your vehicle in
case it begins to roll. Be ready to apply the
regular brake at once should the vehicle begin
to move.
6-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part
number, or specification may be obtained from
your dealer.
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Chassis Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 12377985, in
Canada 88901242) or lubricant
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
GM Power Steering Fluid
(GM Part No. U.S. 89021184, in
Canada 89021186).
DEXRON®-VI Automatic
Parking Brake
Cable Guides
Power Steering
System
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Engine oil which meets GM
Standard GM6094M and displays
the American Petroleum Institute
Certified for Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. GM Goodwrench®
oil meets all the requirements for
your vehicle. To determine the
proper viscosity for your vehicle’s
Automatic
Transmission Transmission Fluid.
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in
Canada 10953474).
Key Lock
Cylinders
Engine Oil
Chassis Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 12377985, in
Canada 88901242) or lubricant
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Chassis
Lubrication
page 5-16.
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
water and use only DEX-COOL®
page 5-25.
Engine Coolant
SAE 75W-90 Synthetic
Axle Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 12378261,
in Canada 10953455) meeting
GM Specification 9986115.
Front and Rear
Axle
Hydraulic Brake Delco® Supreme 11 Brake Fluid or
System
Windshield
Washer
equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.
GM Optikleen® Washer Solvent.
6-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
AUTO-TRAK II Fluid
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Hood and Door
Hinges, Body
Door Hinge
Pins, Liftgate Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
Hinge and
Linkage,
Folding Seats,
and Fuel Door
Hinge
Outer Tailgate
Handle Pivot
Points and
Hinges
Transfer Case (GM Part No. U.S. 12378508, in
Canada 10953626).
Chassis Lubricant
Rear Driveline
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in
Canada 10953474).
(GM Part No. U.S. 12377985, in
Center Spline
Canada 88901242) or lubricant
and Universal
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Joints
Category LB or GC-LB.
Chassis Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 12377985, in
Canada 88901242) or lubricant
Constant
Velocity
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in
Canada 10953474).
Universal Joint meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Dielectric Silicone Grease
(GM Part No. U.S. 12345579, in
Canada 992887).
Hood Latch
Weatherstrip
Conditioning
Assembly,
Secondary
Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346293, in
Latch, Pivots, Canada 992723) or lubricant
Synthetic Grease with
Spring
Anchor, and
Release Pawl
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Weatherstrip Teflon, Superlube (GM Part
Squeaks
No. U.S. 12371287, in
Canada 10953437).
6-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.
Part
Automatic Transmission Filter Kit
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
Engine Oil Filter
GM Part Number
24208576
ACDelco® Part Number
TF337
15036141
A2014C
4.2L L6 Engine
5.3L V8 Engine
89017342
88984215
PF61
PF46
Spark Plugs
4.2L L6 Engine
5.3L V8 Engine
12599232
12571164
41-981
41-985
Wiper Blades
Front – 22 inches (56 cm)
Rear – 16 inches (41 cm)
15214346
15160740
—
—
6-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and the
type of services performed in the boxes provided. See Maintenance Requirements on page 6-2. Any additional
information from Owner Checks and Services on page 6-9 can be added on the following record pages. You should
retain all maintenance receipts.
Maintenance Record
Odometer
Reading
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Date
Serviced By
Services Performed
6-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Odometer
Reading
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Date
Serviced By
Services Performed
6-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Odometer
Reading
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Date
Serviced By
Services Performed
6-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Odometer
Reading
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Date
Serviced By
Services Performed
6-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
We encourage you to call the toll-free number in order
to give your inquiry prompt attention. Please have
the following information available to give the Customer
Assistance Representative:
Customer Assistance and
Information
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). This is
available from the vehicle registration or title, or the
plate at the top left of the instrument panel and
visible through the windshield.
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to
your dealer and to GMC. Normally, any concerns with
the sales transaction or the operation of the vehicle
will be resolved by your dealer’s sales or service
departments. Sometimes, however, despite the best
intentions of all concerned, misunderstandings can
occur. If your concern has not been resolved to your
satisfaction, the following steps should be taken:
• Dealership name and location.
• Vehicle delivery date and present mileage.
When contacting GMC, please remember that your
concern will likely be resolved at a dealer’s facility. That
is why we suggest you follow Step One first if you
have a concern.
STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a member of
dealership management. Normally, concerns can
be quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has
already been reviewed with the sales, service or parts
manager, contact the owner of the dealership or
the general manager.
STEP THREE: Both General Motors and your dealer
are committed to making sure you are completely
satisfied with your new vehicle. However, if you continue
to remain unsatisfied after following the procedure
outlined in Steps One and Two, you should file with the
BBB Auto Line Program to enforce any additional
rights you may have. Canadian owners refer to your
Warranty and Owner Assistance Information booklet for
information on the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration
Plan (CAMVAP).
STEP TWO: If after contacting a member of dealership
management, it appears your concern cannot be
resolved by the dealership without further help, contact
the GMC Consumer Relations Manager by calling
1-800-GMC-8782 (1-800-462-8782, Customer
Assistance prompt). In Canada, contact GM of Canada
Customer Communication by calling 1-800-263-3777
(English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French).
7-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program
administered by the Council of Better Business
Bureaus to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle
repairs or the interpretation of the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Although you may be required to
resort to this informal dispute resolution program prior to
filling out a court action, use of the program is free of
charge and your case will generally be heard within
40 days. If you do not agree with the decision given in
your case, you may reject it and proceed with any other
venue for relief available to you.
Online Owner Center
The Owner Center is a resource for your GM ownership
needs. Specific vehicle information can be found in
one place.
The Online Owner Center allows you to:
• Get e-mail service reminders.
• Access information about your specific vehicle,
including tips and videos and an electronic
version of this owner’s manual (United States only).
You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program using the
toll-free telephone number or write them at the
following address:
• Keep track of your vehicle’s service history and
maintenance schedule.
• Find GM dealers for service nationwide.
BBB Auto Line Program
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
• Receive special promotions and privileges only
available to members (United States only).
Refer to the web for updated information.
Arlington, VA 22203-1838
To register your vehicle, visit www.MyGMLink.com
(United States) or My GM Canada within
www.gmcanada.com (Canada).
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
This program is available in all 50 states and the District
of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age,
mileage, and other factors. General Motors reserves the
right to change eligibility limitations and/or discontinue
its participation in this program.
7-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
United States
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users
To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing,
or speech-impaired and who use the Text
Telephones (TTYs), GMC has TTY equipment
available at its Customer Assistance Center. Any
TTY user can communicate with GMC by dialing:
1-800-GMC-8583 (462-8583). (TTY users in Canada
can dial 1-800-263-3830.)
GMC Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33172
Detroit, MI 48232-5172
www.GMC.com
1-800-GMC-8782 (462-8782)
1-800-GMC-8583 (462-8583) (For Text Telephone
devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-GMC-8782 (462-8782)
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
From Puerto Rico
1-800-496-9992 (English)
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
Customer Assistance Offices
GMC encourages customers to call the toll-free number
for assistance. However, if a customer wishes to
write or e-mail GMC, refer to the addresses below.
U.S. Virgin Islands:
1-800-496-9994
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
7-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Canada
GM Mobility Reimbursement
Program
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
1-800-263-3777 (English)
1-800-263-7854 (French)
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone
devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800
All Overseas Locations
Please contact the local General Motors Business Unit.
This program, available to qualified applicants, can
reimburse you up to $1,000 of the cost of eligible
aftermarket adaptive equipment required for your vehicle,
such as hand controls or a wheelchair/scooter lift.
Mexico, Central America and
The offer is available for a very limited period of time
from the date of vehicle purchase/lease. For more
details, or to determine your vehicle’s eligibility, visit
gmmobility.com or call the GM Mobility Assistance
Center at 1-800-323-9935. Text telephone (TTY) users,
call 1-800-833-9935.
Caribbean Islands/Countries (Except
Puerto Rico and U.S. Virgin Islands)
General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.
Customer Assistance Center
Paseo de la Reforma # 2740
Col. Lomas de Bezares
GM of Canada also has a Mobility Program. Call
1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for details.
TTY users call 1-800-263-3830.
C.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.
01-800-508-0000
Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800
7-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Emergency Tow: Tow to the nearest dealership for
warranty service or in the event of a vehicle-disabling
accident. Assistance provided when the vehicle is
mired in sand, mud, or snow.
Roadside Assistance Program
As the owner of a new GMC vehicle, you are
automatically enrolled in the GMC Roadside Assistance
program. This value-added service is intended to
provide you with peace of mind as you drive in the city
or travel the open road. Call 1-800-GMC-8782
(1-800-462-8782) to speak with a GMC Road Assistance
representative 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
• Flat Tire Change: Installation of a spare tire will be
covered at no charge. The customer is responsible
for the repair or replacement of the tire if not covered
by a warrantable failure.
• Jump Start: No-start occurrences which require a
We will provide the following services during the
Bumper-to-Bumper warranty period, at no expense
to you:
battery jump start will be covered at no charge.
• Dealer Locator Service
• Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel
($5 maximum) for the customer to get to the
nearest service station.
• Trip Routing: Your Roadside Assistance
Representative can provide you with specific
information regarding this feature.
• Lock-out Service (identification required):
Replacement keys or locksmith service will be
covered at no charge if you are unable to gain entry
into your vehicle. Delivery of the replacement key will
be covered within 10 miles (16 km).
• Trip Interruption Expense Benefits: Your
Roadside Assistance Representative can provide
you with specific information regarding this feature.
7-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In many instances, mechanical failures are covered
under GMC’s Bumper-to-Bumper warranty. However,
when other services are utilized, our Roadside
Assistance Representatives will explain any payment
obligations you might incur.
While we hope you never have the occasion to use our
service, it is added security while traveling for you
and your family. Remember, we are only a phone call
away. GMC Roadside Assistance: 1-800-462-8782, text
telephone (TTY) users, call 1-888-889-2438.
For prompt and efficient assistance when calling, please
provide the following to the Roadside Assistance
Representative:
GMC reserves the right to limit services or
reimbursement to an owner or driver when, in GMC’s
judgement, the claims become excessive in frequency or
type of occurrence.
• Your name, home address, and home
telephone number.
Roadside Assistance is not part of or included in the
coverage provided by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
GMC reserves the right to make any changes or
discontinue the Roadside Assistance program at any
time without notification.
• Telephone number of your location.
• Location of the vehicle.
• Model, year, color, and license plate number of
the vehicle.
Canadian Roadside Assistance
• Mileage, Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) and
delivery date of the vehicle.
Vehicles purchased in Canada have an extensive
roadside assistance program accessible from anywhere
in Canada or the United States. Please refer to the
Warranty and Owner Assistance Information book.
• Description of the problem.
7-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Transportation Options
Courtesy Transportation
Warranty service can generally be completed while you
wait. However, if you are unable to wait, GM helps
to minimize your inconvenience by providing several
transportation options. Depending on the circumstances,
your dealer can offer you one of the following:
To enhance your ownership experience, we and our
participating dealers are proud to offer Courtesy
Transportation, a customer support program for
new vehicles.
The Courtesy Transportation program is offered to
customers in conjunction with the Bumper-to-Bumper
coverage provided by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Several transportation options are available when
warranty repairs are required. This will reduce your
inconvenience during warranty repairs.
Shuttle Service
Participating dealers can provide you with shuttle
service to get you to your destination with minimal
interruption of your daily schedule. This includes
one-way or round trip shuttle service to a destination up
to 10 miles (16 km) from the dealership.
Scheduling Service Appointments
Public Transportation or Fuel
Reimbursement
When your vehicle requires warranty service, you should
contact your dealer and request an appointment. By
scheduling a service appointment and advising
If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs,
reimbursement of public transportation expenses may
be available, for up to a maximum of five days. In
addition, should you arrange transportation through a
friend or relative, reimbursement for reasonable
fuel expenses may be available, up to a five-day
maximum. Claim amounts should reflect actual costs
and be supported by original receipts.
your service consultant of your transportation needs,
your dealer can help minimize your inconvenience.
If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service
department immediately, keep driving it until it can be
scheduled for service, unless, of course, the problem is
safety-related. If it is, please call your dealership, let
them know this, and ask for instructions.
If the dealer requests that you simply drop the vehicle off
for service, you are urged to do so as early in the work
day as possible to allow for the same day repair.
7-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Courtesy Rental Vehicle
Additional Program Information
Your dealer may arrange to provide you with a courtesy
rental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental vehicle
that you obtain if your vehicle is kept for a warranty
repair. Reimbursement will be limited to a maximum
amount per day and must be supported by receipts. This
requires that you sign and complete a rental agreement
and meet state, local and rental vehicle provider
requirements. Requirements vary and may include
minimum age requirements, insurance coverage, credit
card, etc. You are responsible for fuel usage charges
and may also be responsible for taxes, levies,
usage fees, excessive mileage or rental usage beyond
the completion of the repair.
Courtesy Transportation is available during the
Bumper-to-Bumper warranty coverage period, but it is
not part of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. A
separate booklet entitled Warranty and Owner
Assistance Information furnished with each new vehicle
provides detailed warranty coverage information.
Courtesy Transportation is available only at participating
dealers and all program options, such as shuttle
service, may not be available at every dealer. Please
contact your dealer for specific information about
availability. All Courtesy Transportation arrangements
will be administered by appropriate dealer personnel.
Canadian Vehicles: For warranty repairs during
the Complete Vehicle Coverage period of the General
Motors of Canada New Vehicle Limited Warranty,
alternative transportation may be available under the
Courtesy Transportation Program. Please consult
your dealer for details.
Generally it is not possible to provide a like-vehicle as a
courtesy rental.
General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify,
change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at
any time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility
pursuant to the terms and conditions described
herein at its sole discretion.
7-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This information has been used to improve vehicle
crash performance and may be used to improve crash
performance of future vehicles and driving safety.
Unlike the data recorders on many airplanes, these
on-board systems do not record sounds, such as
conversation of vehicle occupants.
Vehicle Data Collection and Event
Data Recorders
Your vehicle, like other modern motor vehicles, has a
number of sophisticated computer systems that monitor
and control several aspects of the vehicle’s performance.
Your vehicle uses on-board vehicle computers to monitor
emission control components to optimize fuel economy,
to monitor conditions for airbag deployment and, if so
equipped, to provide anti-lock braking and to help the
driver control the vehicle in difficult driving situations.
Some information may be stored during regular
operations to facilitate repair of detected malfunctions;
other information is stored only in a crash event by
computer systems, such as those commonly called event
data recorders (EDR).
To read this information, special equipment is needed
and access to the vehicle or the device that stores
the data is required. GM will not access information
about a crash event or share it with others other than:
• with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if the
vehicle is leased, with the consent of the lessee,
• in response to an official request of police or similar
government office,
• as part of GM’s defense of litigation through the
discovery process, or
In a crash event, computer systems, such as the Airbag
Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) in your vehicle
may record information about the condition of the vehicle
and how it was operated, such as data related to
engine speed, brake application, throttle position, vehicle
speed, safety belt usage, airbag readiness, airbag
performance, and the severity of a collision. If your
vehicle is equipped with StabiliTrak®, steering
• as required by law.
In addition, once GM collects or receives data, GM may:
• use the data for GM research needs,
• make it available for research where appropriate
confidentiality is to be maintained and need is
shown, or
performance, including yaw rate, steering wheel angle,
and lateral acceleration, is also recorded.
• share summary data which is not tied to a specific
vehicle with non-GM organizations for research
purposes.
7-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Others, such as law enforcement, may have access to
the special equipment that can read the information
if they have access to the vehicle or the device
that stores the data.
If your vehicle is equipped with OnStar®, please check
the OnStar® subscription service agreement or manual
for information on its operations and data collection.
Recycled original equipment parts may also be used for
repair. These parts are typically removed from vehicles
that were total losses in prior accidents. In most
cases, the parts being recycled are from undamaged
sections of the vehicle. A recycled original equipment
GM part, may be an acceptable choice to maintain your
vehicle’s originally designed appearance and safety
performance, however, the history of these parts is not
known. Such parts are not covered by your GM New
Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any related failures
are not covered by that warranty.
Collision Damage Repair
If your vehicle is involved in a collision and it is
damaged, have the damage repaired by a qualified
technician using the proper equipment and quality
replacement parts. Poorly performed collision repairs
will diminish your vehicle’s resale value, and safety
performance can be compromised in subsequent
collisions.
Aftermarket collision parts are also available. These are
made by companies other than GM and may not
have been tested for your vehicle. As a result, these
parts may fit poorly, exhibit premature
durability/corrosion problems, and may not perform
properly in subsequent collisions. Aftermarket parts are
not covered by your GM New Vehicle Limited
Warranty, and any vehicle failure related to such parts
are not covered by that warranty.
Collision Parts
Genuine GM Collision parts are new parts made with the
same materials and construction methods as the parts
with which your vehicle was originally built. Genuine GM
Collision parts are your best choice to assure that your
vehicle’s designed appearance, durability and safety are
preserved. The use of Genuine GM parts can help
maintain your GM New Vehicle Warranty.
Repair Facility
GM also recommends that you choose a collision repair
facility that meets your needs before you ever need
collision repairs. Your GM dealer may have a collision
repair center with GM-trained technicians and state
of the art equipment, or be able to recommend a
collision repair center that has GM-trained technicians
and comparable equipment.
7-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Insuring Your Vehicle
If an Accident Occurs
Protect your investment in your GM vehicle with
comprehensive and collision insurance coverage. There
are significant differences in the quality of coverage
afforded by various insurance policy terms. Many
insurance policies provide reduced protection to your
GM vehicle by limiting compensation for damage repairs
by using aftermarket collision parts. Some insurance
companies will not specify aftermarket collision parts.
When purchasing insurance, we recommend that you
assure your vehicle will be repaired with GM original
equipment collision parts. If such insurance coverage is
not available from your current insurance carrier,
consider switching to another insurance carrier.
Here is what to do if you are involved in an accident.
• Try to relax and then check to make sure you are all
right. If you are uninjured, make sure that no one else
in your vehicle, or the other vehicle, is injured.
• If there has been an injury, call 911 for help. Do not
leave the scene of an accident until all matters have
been taken care of. Move your vehicle only if its
position puts you in danger or you are instructed to
move it by a police officer.
• Give only the necessary and requested information
to police and other parties involved in the accident.
Do not discuss your personal condition, mental frame
of mind, or anything unrelated to the accident. This
will help guard against post-accident legal action.
If your vehicle is leased, the leasing company may
require you to have insurance that assures repairs with
Genuine GM Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM)
parts or Genuine Manufacturer replacement parts. Read
your lease carefully, as you may be charged at the
end of your lease for poor quality repairs.
• If you need roadside assistance, call GM Roadside
page 7-6 for more information.
• If your vehicle cannot be driven, know where the
towing service will be taking it. Get a card from the
tow truck operator or write down the driver’s name,
the service’s name, and the phone number.
• Remove any valuables from your vehicle before it is
towed away. Make sure this includes your insurance
information and registration if you keep these items
in your vehicle.
7-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Gather the important information you will need from
the other driver. Things like name, address, phone
number, driver’s license number, vehicle license
plate, vehicle make, model and model year, Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN), insurance company and
policy number, and a general description of the
damage to the other vehicle.
Managing the Vehicle Damage
Repair Process
In the event that your vehicle requires damage repairs,
GM recommends that you take an active role in its
repair. If you have a pre-determined repair facility of
choice, take your vehicle there, or have it towed there.
Specify to the facility that any required replacement
collision parts be original equipment parts, either new
Genuine GM parts or recycled original GM parts.
Remember, recycled parts will not be covered by your
GM vehicle warranty.
• If possible, call your insurance company from the
scene of the accident. They will walk you through the
information they will need. If they ask for a police
report, phone or go to the police department
headquarters the next day and you can get a copy of
the report for a nominal fee. In some states with “no
fault” insurance laws, a report may not be necessary.
This is especially true if there are no injuries and both
vehicles are driveable.
Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but you must live
with the repair. Depending on your policy limits, your
insurance company may initially value the repair using
aftermarket parts. Discuss this with your repair
professional, and insist on Genuine GM parts. Remember
if your vehicle is leased you may be obligated to have the
vehicle repaired with Genuine GM parts, even if your
insurance coverage does not pay the full cost.
• Choose a reputable collision repair facility for
your vehicle. Whether you select a GM dealer or a
private collision repair facility to fix the damage,
make sure you are comfortable with them.
Remember, you will have to feel comfortable
with their work for a long time.
If another party’s insurance company is paying for the
repairs, you are not obligated to accept a repair
valuation based on that insurance company’s collision
policy repair limits, as you have no contractual limits with
that company. In such cases, you can have control of
the repair and parts choices as long as cost stays within
reasonable limits.
• Once you have an estimate, read it carefully and
make sure you understand what work will be
performed on your vehicle. If you have a question,
ask for an explanation. Reputable shops welcome
this opportunity.
7-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehicle
has a safety defect, you should immediately notify
Transport Canada, in addition to notifying General
Motors of Canada Limited. You may call them at
1-800-333-0510 or write to:
Reporting Safety Defects
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could
cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA), in addition to notifying
General Motors.
Transport Canada
Place de Ville Tower C
330 Sparks Street
Ottawa, Ontario K1A 0N5
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your dealer, or
General Motors.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety
Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY:
1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov;
or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA
400 Seventh Street, SW.
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
7-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reporting Safety Defects to
General Motors
Service Publications Ordering
Information
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) in
a situation like this, we certainly hope you’ll notify us.
Please call us at 1-800-GMC-8782 (1-800-462-8782),
or write:
Service Manuals
Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair
information on engines, transmission, axle suspension,
brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.
GMC Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33172
Detroit, MI 48232-5172
Transmission, Transaxle, Transfer
Case Unit Repair Manual
This manual provides information on unit repair service
procedures, adjustments, and specifications for GM
transmissions, transaxles, and transfer cases.
In Canada, please call us at 1-800-263-3777 (English)
or 1-800-263-7854 (French). Or, write:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
7-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service Bulletins
Current and Past Model Order Forms
Service Bulletins give technical service information
needed to knowledgeably service General Motors cars
and trucks. Each bulletin contains instructions to
assist in the diagnosis and service of your vehicle.
Service Publications are available for current and
past model GM vehicles. To request an order form,
please specify year and model name of the vehicle.
ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123
Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PM
Eastern Time
In Canada, information pertaining to Product Service
Bulletins can be obtained by contacting your General
Motors dealer or by calling 1-800-GM-DRIVE
(1-800-463-7483).
For Credit Card Orders Only
(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc. on the
World Wide Web at: www.helminc.com
Owner’s Information
Owner publications are written specifically for owners
and intended to provide basic operational information
about the vehicle. The owner’s manual will include
the Maintenance Schedule for all models.
Or you can write to:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner’s Manual, and
Warranty Booklet.
Prices are subject to change without notice and without
incurring obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00
Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are
quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents are to make
checks payable in U.S. funds.
Without Portfolio: Owner’s Manual only.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00
7-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Audio System(s) (cont.)
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cleaning (cont.)
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Assistance Information (cont.)
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Electrical System (cont.)
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
I
Ignition Positions ............................................. 2-19
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Locking Rear Axle ............................................ 4-9
Maintenance Schedule (cont.)
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Outside (cont.)
N
Navigation/Radio System, see
Navigation Manual ..................................... 3-124
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Power (cont.)
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Belts (cont.)
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service (cont.)
Storage Areas (cont.)
12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires (cont.)
13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Windshield (cont.)
W
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators ................ 3-31
14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|
